VXT 2000+/VXT 2000
Windowing Terminal
User Information
Order Number: EK–VXT20–UG. E01


January, 1994

This document describes how to use the VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 windowing
terminal with VXT Version 2.1 software.
Topics include
•   Creating X window and terminal window sessions on a host system
•   Customizing the terminal’s screens and operating features
•   Using VXT software or VXT EX (essential X server) software
•   Programming with the X windows image extension (XIE)
Internet Address for Reader Comments
You can send your comments and suggestions about this guide and other
VXT manuals by electronic mail to the following Internet address:
docteam@gwen.enet.dec.com




Revision/Update Information     This is a revised document.
Operating System & Version:     InfoServer Version 2.2
                                OpenVMS VAX Version 5.4–2
                                OpenVMS AXP Version 1.5
                                ULTRIX Version 4.2
                                DEC OSF/1 AXP Version 1.2
                                SunOS Version 4.1.2
                                HP–UX Version 8.05
                                IBM AIX Version 3.1
                                SCO ODT Version 1.1
Software Version:               VXT Version 2.1
Digital Equipment Corporation
Maynard, Massachusetts
First Edition, January 1992
Fifth Edition, January 1994
Possession, use, or copying of the software described in this publication is authorized only
pursuant to a valid written license from Digital or an authorized sublicensor.
© Digital Equipment Corporation 1992, 1994. All Rights Reserved.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation: AXP, DEC, DECconnect,
DECdirect, DECimage, DEClaser, DECnet, DECserver, DECterm, DECwindows, Digital, LA,
LA50, LA75 Companion, LA324, LAT, LN03, OpenVMS, ReGIS, Scholar, ThinWire, ULTRIX,
VAX DOCUMENT, VMS, VT, VT52, VT100, VT300, VT320, VXT 2000, and the DIGITAL logo.
AT&T is a trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph Co.
HP and LaserJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. Domain is a
registered trademark of Apollo Computer, Inc., a subsidiary of Hewlett-Packard Company
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
MS–DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
POSTSCRIPT is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark licensed exclusively by X/Open Co. Ltd.
Open Look is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
OSF, OSF/1, and Motif are trademarks of The Open Software Foundation, Inc.
Sun, Solaris, and NFS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.



This document was prepared using VAX DOCUMENT Version 2.1.
                                                                                                  Contents

About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         xiii

1 A Look at the Terminal
      1.1        Terminal Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        1
      1.2        How the Terminal Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             3
      1.3        VXT Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     3
      1.4        VXT EX Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        4
      1.5        Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            5
      1.5.1         Monitoring Memory Use (Host-Based Terminals) . . . . . . . . . .                              6
      1.6        X Window Sessions and Terminal Window Sessions . . . . . . . . . . .                             6
      1.7        Customizing Your Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              7
      1.8        Compatibility with VT Series and 3270 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .                          9
      1.8.1         Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       10

2 Using the Terminal
      2.1     Terminal Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  12
      2.1.1      VXT Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               13
      2.1.2      Closing the Terminal Manager Window and VXT Message
                 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   13
      2.2     Creating Sessions and VXT Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       14
      2.2.1      Displaying the Create Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      14
      2.2.2      Starting LAT or Serial Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   15
      2.2.3      Starting a DECnet Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   16
      2.2.4      Starting an IP Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              17
      2.2.4.1        Optional Buttons for Specifying IP Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          18
      2.2.5      Starting VXT Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 21
      2.2.6      Starting Remote Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    21
      2.2.7      Preferred Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            22
      2.2.8      Creating Sessions from a Menu: Preferred Services . . . . . . .                                 23
      2.3     Autostarting, Pausing, or Ending Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                        24
      2.3.1      Autostarting a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              24


                                                                                                                  iii
     2.3.2        Pausing a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            25
     2.3.3        Ending All Sessions and Restarting VXT Software . . . . . . . .                                27
     2.3.4        Ending Individual Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 27
     2.4      Checking Network and Terminal Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         28
     2.5      Working with Multiple Remote X Session Managers . . . . . . . . . .                                28
     2.6      Using the Open Look Window Manager from Sun Systems . . . . .                                      29
     2.7      Customizing Your Terminal’s Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          32
     2.8      Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   32
     2.8.1        Printing the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            32
     2.8.2        Printing from a Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  34
     2.9      Getting Started Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             36

3 Customizing the Terminal
     3.1      Displaying the Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    39
     3.2      Saving and Restoring Terminal Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .                             40
     3.3      Changing Your Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    41
     3.4      Choosing the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  44
     3.5      Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         45
     3.6      Changing Your Print Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    48
     3.7      Changing Your Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  50
     3.8      Changing Your Screen Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      52
     3.9      Changing Your Window Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  54
     3.10     Changing Your Terminal Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          56
     3.11     Changing Your Video Alignment Settings (VX227 Models) . . . . . .                                  60
     3.12     Saving the Terminal Manager Window’s Position and Size . . . . .                                   61
     3.13     Customizing the VXT Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      61
     3.13.1      Saving the VXT Message Box’s Position and Size . . . . . . . . .                                63

4 Customizing Communications
     4.1      Displaying the Communications Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          65
     4.2      Changing Your Serial and Parallel Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          66
     4.3      Changing Your LAT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 69
     4.4      Changing Your LASTport Group Code Settings (InfoServer
              Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     71
     4.5      Changing Your TCP/IP IP Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                           73
     4.6      Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            74
     4.7      Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            76
     4.8      Changing Your NFS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 78
     4.9      Changing Your DECnet Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          81
     4.10     Changing Your DECnet Name Translator Settings . . . . . . . . . . .                                82



iv
5 Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
   5.1     Displaying the Customize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 85
   5.2     Changing Your Configuration Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          85
   5.3     Changing Your Font Path Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  86
   5.3.1      Entering a Font Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           88
   5.4     Changing Your X Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               93
   5.5     Changing Your Startup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                94
   5.6     Specifying Your AutoStart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                95
   5.7     Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                        98
   5.7.1      Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     99
   5.7.2      Using Host-Based Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                100
   5.7.3      Using Server-Based Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                102
   5.7.4      Customize Boot Dialog Box Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     105
   5.7.5      Entering Boot Commands to Load VXT Software . . . . . . . . .                               108
   5.8     Changing Your Software Options Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    110
   5.9     Using Customized Resource Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                113

6 Checking the Terminal’s Status
   6.1     Displaying the Status Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              115
   6.2     Checking a TCP/IP Host System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                115
   6.3     TCP/IP Routes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           117
   6.4     Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   118
   6.5     Monitoring the Terminal’s Memory and Network Use . . . . . . . . .                             123
   6.6     Checking the Terminal’s System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       124

7 Using VXT DECterm Windows
   7.1     The VXT DECterm Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               128
   7.2     Copying and Pasting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           130
   7.2.1       Host Synchronization Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                130
   7.2.2       Selecting Text to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         131
   7.2.3       Pasting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   131
   7.2.4       Using Quick Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         132
   7.2.5       Extending Your Selected Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             132
   7.3     Clearing or Resetting the Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               133
   7.4     Using Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    135
   7.5     Printing the DECterm Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                135
   7.6     Exiting from a VXT DECterm Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      137




                                                                                                            v
8 Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
     8.1      Displaying the Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            139
     8.2      Saving and Restoring VXT DECterm Option Settings . . . . . . . . .                             140
     8.3      Changing Your Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                142
     8.3.1       Using Fonts on Your Host System or InfoServer . . . . . . . . . .                           146
     8.4      Changing Your Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               148
     8.5      Changing Your General Operating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       150
     8.6      Changing Your Keyboard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  154
     8.7      Choosing National Replacement Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         156
     8.8      Changing Your Graphics Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    157
     8.9      Changing Your Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             158

9 Using VXT 3270 Windows
     9.1      VXT 3270 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         161
     9.2      Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   162
     9.3      Creating a VXT 3270 Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            162
     9.4      Entering 3270 TE Connection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     163
     9.5      Using the VXT 3270 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              166
     9.5.1       Using the VXT 3270 Window Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         167
     9.5.2       Working in the Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               168
     9.5.3       Understanding Operator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      169
     9.5.4       Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       169
     9.5.5       Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      170
     9.5.6       Printing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     171
     9.5.7       Copying and Pasting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              171
     9.5.8       Selecting Text to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          171
     9.5.9       Pasting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    172
     9.5.10      Using Quick Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          172
     9.5.11      Extending Your Selected Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              173
     9.5.12      Copying and Pasting With the Keyboard Only . . . . . . . . . . . .                          173
     9.5.13      Recording and Playing Back Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          174
     9.5.14      Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Numbers . . . . . . . . . . .                             175
     9.5.15      Saving Current Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             176
     9.5.16      Viewing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        176
     9.5.17      Viewing Keyboard Layout Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  176
     9.5.18      Viewing the Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             177
     9.5.19      Viewing Your Connection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      177
     9.5.20      Viewing Field Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            177
     9.5.21      Using the MB3 Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   178
     9.5.22      Exiting from a VXT 3270 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    179




vi
10 Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
   10.1   Customizing the VXT 3270 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    180
   10.1.1    Customizing Key Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 180
   10.1.2    Saving and Loading Custom Key Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .                           182
   10.1.3    Modifying VXT 3270 Window Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         183
   10.1.4    Using the Selector Mouse Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     184
   10.2   Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      184
   10.2.1    Key Functions Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             187
   10.3   Translation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      193

11 Using Windows
   11.1      Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     195
   11.1.1       Pointer Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     197
   11.2      Working with Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          197
   11.2.1       What Are Windows? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          197
   11.2.2       Selecting the Active Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              199
   11.2.3       Moving Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         199
   11.2.4       Changing the Size of Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               200
   11.2.5       Reducing Windows to Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              201
   11.2.6       Raising and Lowering Stacked Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       202
   11.3      The Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       202
   11.3.1       Using the Workspace Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  204
   11.4      Working With Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        206
   11.4.1       Choosing Items from Pull-Down Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      206
   11.4.2       Choosing Items from Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     207
   11.4.3       Choosing Items from Options Menus in Dialog Boxes . . . . . .                              208
   11.5      Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 208
   11.5.1       Dimmed Items in Menus and Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         210
   11.5.2       Moving and Changing Settings in a Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .                         210
   11.6      Using Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   211

12 Customizing Windows
   12.1      Displaying the Options Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              214
   12.2      Saving and Restoring Window Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       215
   12.3      Changing Your Workspace Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                216
   12.4      Changing Your Border Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             218
   12.5      Changing Your Border Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 220
   12.6      Changing Your Icon Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           221
   12.7      Changing Your Icon Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               223
   12.8      Changing Your Matte Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            225


                                                                                                            vii
       12.9      Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         226

13 Launching Applications
       13.1      Launching Sessions and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     232
       13.2      Launching Sessions and VXT Applications with the Window
                 Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   233
       13.2.1       Defining Menu Items to Launch Sessions and Local VXT
                    Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       233
       13.2.2       Defining Keys to Launch Sessions and Local VXT
                    Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       235
       13.3      Launching Remote Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 236
       13.3.1       Running the Application Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       237
       13.3.2       Launch Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       238
       13.3.3       Defining Menu Items or Keys to Launch Remote
                    Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       240
       13.4      Launching Sessions and VXT Applications Using rsh . . . . . . . . .                               241

14 Using VXT EX Software
       14.1      VXT EX Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         242
       14.2      Loading VXT EX Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               243
       14.3      Creating a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        243
       14.4      VXT EX Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 245

15 Using Your Keyboard
       15.1    ANSI Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           247
       15.1.1     Keyboard Dialect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             247
       15.1.2     Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       248
       15.1.3     Main Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            248
       15.1.4     Editing Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             250
       15.1.5     Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               251
       15.1.6     Top-Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  251
       15.1.7     Data Processing Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               253
       15.1.8     Compose Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 253
       15.1.9     Text-Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               254
       15.1.10    Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           254
       15.1.11    Audible Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             254
       15.1.12    Keyclick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       255
       15.1.13    Bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     255
       15.2    Short ANSI Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               255
       15.2.1     Main Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            256


viii
15.2.2     Using Extend Key Sequences for Keypad and Function
           Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   256
15.2.3     Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         258
15.2.4     Top-Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                258
15.2.5     Compose Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               259
15.2.6     Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         260
15.2.7     Audible Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           260
15.3    The PC Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         260
15.3.1     PC Keyboard Models—Setting the Keyboard Type . . . . . . . . .                                 260
15.3.2     Using the ANSI Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       260
15.3.3     Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     261
15.3.4     Main Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          261
15.3.5     Janus-Faced and Front-Faced Character Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .                             263
15.3.6     Editing Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           263
15.3.7     Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             263
15.3.8     Top-Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                263
15.3.9     Audible Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           264
15.3.10    Keyclick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     264
15.3.11    Bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   264
15.3.12    Redefining Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          265
15.3.13    PC Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments . . . . . . . . .                                  266
15.4    The Sun Style Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              270
15.4.1     Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     270
15.4.2     Main Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          271
15.4.3     Editing Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           272
15.4.4     Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             272
15.4.5     Top-Row Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                273
15.4.6     Audible Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           273
15.4.7     Keyclick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     273
15.4.8     Bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   273
15.4.9     Redefining Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          274
15.4.10    Sun Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments . . . . . . . . .                                 274
15.5    Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       278
15.5.1     Using the Editing Keypad to Perform Mouse Functions . . . .                                    278
15.5.2     Using Menu Bars and Pull-Down Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            278
15.5.3     Using Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               279
15.5.4     Using Submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             279
15.5.5     Navigating Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               280
15.5.6     Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        280
15.5.7     Using Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             282
15.6    Typing Additional Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                282
15.6.1     What Characters Can I Type? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    283
15.6.2     Key Sequences with Nonspacing Diacritical Keys . . . . . . . . .                               283


                                                                                                           ix
    15.6.3        How to Type a Character Using the Compose Character
                  Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   284
    15.6.4        How to Type a Character Using the Group Shift Key . . . . . .                                 285
    15.6.5        Invalid Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           285
    15.6.6        Canceling or Restarting a Key Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                        286
    15.6.7        Hexadecimal Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   286

A Solving Problems and Getting Service
    A.1      Operating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           293
    A.1.1        NFS Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            300
    A.2      Power-Up Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         302
    A.2.1        Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           302
    A.3      Restoring the Terminal to Factory-Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . .                           303
    A.4      Digital Service Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             304
    A.4.1        How to Get Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             304

B Mixing Colors
    B.1      What Color Settings Can I Customize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       306
    B.2      Color Mixing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              307
    B.2.1        Picker Color Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           307
    B.2.2        Hue, Lightness, Saturation (HLS) Color Model . . . . . . . . . . .                             310
    B.2.3        Red, Green, Blue (RGB) Color Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       312
    B.2.4        Browser Color Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              313
    B.2.5        Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      314

C Programming with the X Windows Image Extension
    C.1      Checking the Terminal’s Imaging Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         317
    C.2      Hardware Accelerated XIE Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       317
    C.3      XIE Pipeline Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           317
    C.3.1       XIE Pipeline Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                318
    C.3.2       XIE Pipeline Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 319

D Related Documentation
    D.1      Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           322




x
E Options
   E.1     Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   324

F Specifications

G Setting Up the Work Environment
   G.1     Proper Setup and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            331

Glossary

Index

Tables
   6–1          LAT Counters Display Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                118
   6–2          Ethernet Counters Display Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   121
   6–3          System Configuration Display Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    125
   9–1          Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        169
   9–2          Keyboard Copy and Paste Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   173
   9–3          Field Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       178
   9–4          Quick Access to Functions: MB3 Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . .                             178
   10–1         VXT 3270 Window — Default Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            184
   13–1         Application Names and Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      234
   15–1         PC Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments . . . . . . . . .                                266
   15–2         Sun Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments . . . . . . . . .                               275
   15–3         Keyboards with Diacritical Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   284
   15–4         Key Sequences for Additional Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                        288
   A–1          System Box, Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, and Printer
                Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     293
   A–2          Booting, Server, and Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      296
   A–3          Session, Application, and Dialog Box Problems . . . . . . . . . . .                          298
   A–4          NFS Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          300
   G–1          Recommendations for Proper Setup and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . .                           332




                                                                                                              xi
                                                About This Guide


     This guide describes how to use VXT software on a VXT 2000 windowing
     terminal. The terminal makes use of the open windowing environment. The
     guide describes how to create X window or terminal window sessions on a wide
     variety of operating systems.

Who Should Use This Guide
     This guide is for the general user of the VXT 2000 windowing terminal.
     •   If you are new to windows or the Motif windows environment, the guide
         provides basic information on how to use windows and the mouse pointing
         device.
     •   If you are familiar with windows, you can use the guide to learn about VXT
         software features and customize your terminal’s operating features.

Organization
     This guide contains the following chapters and appendices:
     •   Chapter 1, ‘‘A Look at the Terminal,’’ provides an overview of the terminal
         and its features.
     Terminal Manager Window
     •   Chapter 2, ‘‘Using the Terminal,’’ describes the basic features of the
         Terminal Manager window. The chapter describes how to create sessions,
         print the screen, and view online VXT 2000 documentation.
     •   Chapter 3, ‘‘Customizing the Terminal,’’ describes how to customize basic
         terminal settings for your language, personal preference, and system
         security.
     •   Chapter 4, ‘‘Customizing Communications,’’ describes how to customize
         terminal settings that affect communications with host computer systems.


                                                                                  xiii
      •   Chapter 5, ‘‘Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings,’’ describes how to
          customize more advanced settings. Topics include autostarting sessions
          and applications, changing font paths, booting VXT software, and loading
          or unloading VXT software features.
      •   Chapter 6, ‘‘Checking the Terminal’s Status,’’ describes how to use the
          Terminal Manager window’s Status menu to monitor memory use, network
          use, network counters, and the terminal’s system configuration. You can
          also view TCP/IP routes and use ping to determine the availability of hosts.
      VXT DECterm Windows
      •   Chapter 7, ‘‘Using VXT DECterm Windows,’’ describes how to use DECterm
          windows, which emulate a VT300 series terminal.
      •   Chapter 8, ‘‘Customizing VXT DECterm Windows,’’ describes how to
          customize your DECterm windows for your computing environment and
          personal preference.
      VXT 3270 Windows
      •   Chapter 9, ‘‘Using VXT 3270 Windows,’’ describes how to use the VXT 3270
          terminal emulator to run applications on an IBM SNA host system through
          a DECnet/SNA gateway.
      •   Chapter 10, ‘‘Customizing VXT 3270 Windows,’’ describes how to customize
          the VXT 3270 terminal emulator window.
      Window Manager
      •   Chapter 11, ‘‘Using Windows,’’ describes how to manage windows and use
          menus, dialog boxes, and scroll boxes. The chapter also shows how to use
          the mouse.
      •   Chapter 12, ‘‘Customizing Windows,’’ describes how to check and control
          the settings for many of the window manager’s features. You can make
          changes to the settings and save them for all future sessions.
      •   Chapter 13, ‘‘Launching Applications,’’ describes how to launch sessions,
          local VXT applications or remote host applications from your terminal.
      VXT EX Software
      •   Chapter 14, ‘‘Using VXT EX Software,’’ describes how to use VXT EX
          software. VXT EX software is a minimal version of VXT software without
          a terminal manager and other local clients.




xiv
    Keyboards
    •   Chapter 15, ‘‘Using Your Keyboard,’’ describes the keys and indicator lights
        on the terminal’s ANSI, short ANSI (UNIX), PC, and Sun style keyboards.
        It also describes how to type additional characters not listed on your
        keyboard keys and how to use the keyboard in place of the mouse.
    Appendixes
    •   Appendix A, ‘‘Solving Problems and Getting Service,’’ describes how to solve
        typical operating problems and how to get service.
    •   Appendix B, ‘‘Mixing Colors,’’ describes how to use the Color Mixing dialog
        box that lets you change the color of windows and the screen.
    •   Appendix C, ‘‘Programming with the X Windows Image Extension,’’
        provides guidelines for programming with XIE protocol functions.
    •   Appendix D, ‘‘Related Documentation,’’ lists related documentation.
    •   Appendix E, ‘‘Options,’’ lists available hardware options.
    •   Appendix F, ‘‘Specifications,’’ lists the general, environmental, and electrical
        specifications for the terminal.
    •   Appendix G, ‘‘Setting Up the Work Environment,’’ lists recommendations
        for your health and safety while using the terminal.
    •   The glossary defines new terms introduced in the text and other relevant
        terms.

Comments?
    Please send us your comments and suggestions about this guide or other VXT
    manuals. You can use the Reader’s Comments form at the end of this guide, or
    you can send electronic mail to the following Internet address:
    docteam@gwen.enet.dec.com
    When making comments, please include the manual title and part number
    listed on the front cover. For specific comments, please include a page number,
    section number, or section title for reference.




                                                                                     xv
Conventions
      This guide uses the following conventions:

      Convention           Meaning
      VXT 2000 windowing   Refers to all models of the VXT 2000 windowing terminal.
      terminal
      InfoServer system    Refers to a disk server that downloads a VXT system image to
                           the terminal.
      Mouse                Refers to any pointing device, such as a mouse, a puck, or a
                           stylus.
      MB1, MB2, and MB3    Represent the three mouse buttons: left (MB1), middle (MB2),
                           and right (MB3). Lefthanded users can exchange the MB1 and
                           MB3 button assignments if desired.
       key                 Keys or switches that are labeled appear in a box .
                           Example: Press the Return key.
       Alt                 Represents the Alt or Alt Function key on your keyboard.
       Ctrl key key        For Ctrl key sequences, press and hold each key in order until
                           you complete the sequence.
       Ctrl +left Alt      If a key sequence includes descriptive words, the keys are
                           joined by a plus (+) symbol for clarity.
      Caution              Provides information to prevent damage to equipment or
                           software.
      Note                 Provides general information about the current topic.
      Menu item . . .      Menu items followed by . . . display a dialog box when chosen.
      Menu item            Menu items followed by    display a submenu when chosen.
      Glossary entries     Appear in bold when first used in text.
      Index entries        The following abbreviations are used in the index:
                            (TM)     for Terminal Manager
                            (WM)     for Window Manager


Notes to the Reader
      The screens and windows shown in this guide represent the latest information
      available at the time of publication. Some screens and windows may not
      exactly match those that appear on your terminal or reflect the system-default
      settings.




xvi
                                                                               11
                                       A Look at the Terminal


      This chapter provides an overview of the VXT 2000 windowing terminal and
      its basic operating features. The chapter tells you where to look in this guide
      for more information about each feature.

1.1 Terminal Highlights
      The VXT 2000 windowing terminal lets you access X window applications and
      traditional terminal applications on computer systems in your network. You
      can open several windows on the terminal, to display multiple applications
      from different systems at the same time.
      The VXT 2000 terminal provides many features of a workstation without the
      need for workstation management. Here are some of the terminal’s main
      features:
      Hardware
      •   A workstation-style display, a keyboard, and a mouse.
      •   A monochrome, gray scale, or color monitor.
      •   A choice of Ethernet network connectors: ThinWire, thickwire, or twisted
          pair.
      •   A 25-pin RS-232 serial printer/communications port with full modem
          control.
      •   A 25-pin parallel printer port.
      •   Serial interfaces for a keyboard and a mouse or tablet.
      •   Expandable memory (user installable).




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 1
A Look at the Terminal
1.1 Terminal Highlights

        Software
        •     The ability to access several computer systems at the same time, using the
              TCP/IP, LAT, or DECnet transports.
        •     A choice of VXT software or VXT EX software, downloaded from a host
              computer system or an InfoServer system.
        •     VXT software provides local applications and features such as
                 A local Terminal Manager window that lets you create and manage
                 connections to computer systems. You can connect to systems using the
                 TCP/IP, LAT, or DECnet transport. See Chapter 2.
                 VXT DECterm windows that let you access VT video terminal
                 applications on computer systems. VXT DECterm windows emulate
                 VT300 series video terminals. See Chapter 7.
                 VXT 3270 windows that let you access applications on an IBM SNA
                 system. See Chapter 9.
                 A local Motif window manager that lets you easily move and resize
                 windows, using a mouse or keyboard for navigation. See Chapter 11.
                 An AutoStart feature to automatically start your selected computer
                 sessions and local terminal applications when you start work, or at any
                 other time. See Section 5.6.
                 A Customize Boot dialog box for choosing the VXT software version you
                 want your terminal to load. See Section 5.7.
                 A Customize Font Path dialog box that lets you access fonts from host
                 systems and font servers on your network. See Section 5.3.
                 Configuration Manager windows that let a system manager configure
                 individual terminals or groups of terminals to share customized
                 settings and fonts. See VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and
                 System Management.
        •     VXT EX (essential X server) software is a clientless version of VXT
              software, without local applications. You can use VXT EX software to
              access X applications on computer systems with minimal memory installed
              in the terminal. When you use VXT EX software, the system you connect
              to must provide all window and session management features.




2 Chapter 1
                                                          A Look at the Terminal
                                                     1.2 How the Terminal Works

1.2 How the Terminal Works
     The VXT software and fonts for your terminal are installed on a host computer
     system or an InfoServer system. An InfoServer system is a high-performance
     virtual disk server that can efficiently download software to many terminals.
     You can use the terminal with one or more computer systems. You can connect
     the terminal to
     •   An Ethernet network, using the ThinWire, thickwire, or twisted-pair port
     •   A computer, using the serial port
     The computer system you connect to is called the host. You can connect your
     terminal to several hosts.
     You use the keyboard, mouse and monitor to interact with applications on your
     host. You send data to the application by typing on the keyboard or selecting
     window options with the mouse. Data sent by the application appears as
     text or graphics on the terminal’s screen. You can print text or graphics on a
     printer connected to the terminal’s printer port or on any networked printer.
     You can use a variety of host software applications on the terminal. For
     example, your host may have applications for word processing, data entry,
     programming, or business graphics. Most applications involve interactive
     processing. This means the terminal immediately sends the information you
     enter from the keyboard or mouse to the host.

1.3 VXT Software
     Each time you start up the terminal, it sends out a network request for a host
     or InfoServer system to download VXT software and fonts to the terminal.
     This process of starting up the software and bringing it to an operable state is
     also known as booting.
     Knowledgeable users can customize the terminal’s boot settings to load a
     particular VXT software version. See Section 5.7 for details.
     There are some differences between host-based and server-based operation.
     VXT Host-Based Software
     If your terminal downloads VXT software from a host system, the terminal
     always uses its own physical memory to display applications and store your
     customized terminal settings. Host-based operation provides
     •   A Terminal Manager window
     •   VXT DECterm and VXT 3270 windows



                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 3
A Look at the Terminal
1.3 VXT Software

        •     A local Motif window manager
        •     A configuration manager—Your system manager can use the Configuration
              Manager dialog boxes to customize and manage individual terminals from
              a central terminal.
        VXT Server-Based Software
        If your terminal downloads VXT software from an InfoServer system, the
        terminal typically operates in server-based mode. In server-based mode, the
        terminal saves your customized terminal settings on an InfoServer system.
        Server-based mode provides all the features of the host-based operation, plus
        •     Virtual memory capability—The InfoServer system provides the terminal
              with additional memory as needed to display more applications. As a
              result, the terminal needs less installed memory than when you use
              host-based operation.
        •     More configuration manager features—Your system manager can use the
              Configuration Manager dialog boxes to customize and manage groups of
              terminals, as well as the fonts they use.
        •     InfoReader library—You can access this library of online VXT documenta-
              tion from the Getting Started menu in the Terminal Manager window. The
              library includes this user guide.
        You can also choose the host-based mode of operation when downloading from
        an InfoServer system. In this case, your customized settings are stored in the
        terminal’s memory, and the terminal cannot use the InfoServer system for
        memory services. You still have access to the InfoReader library. Your boot
        settings determine the mode of operation. See Section 5.7.

1.4 VXT EX Software
        VXT EX (essential X server) software is a clientless version of VXT software,
        which means it does not include any local applications such as the Terminal
        Manager window, VXT DECterm and VXT 3270 windows, or the Motif window
        manager.
        VXT EX software lets you use a VXT 2000 windowing terminal as a
        workstation companion, relying on the host system to provide a session
        manager, window manager, and other applications. You can use VXT EX
        software with minimal memory installed in the terminal.
        VXT EX software provides a single dialog box for starting an X session on
        a host system. You can start a session on a system that supports the LAT
        or TCP/IP transports and access that system’s X window applications. See
        Chapter 14.


4 Chapter 1
                                                                   A Look at the Terminal
                                                               1.5 Memory Requirements

1.5 Memory Requirements
     When you turn on the terminal, the VXT software is loaded into the terminal
     from an InfoServer system or from a host computer system. There are
     different memory requirements for using server-based or host-based software.
     The optional image accelerator board for some VXT 2000 models also requires
     extra memory.

                                                                 Your Terminal Needs At
     If You Use VXT Software...      And...                      Least...
     Server-based                    –                            4 megabytes of memory
     Server-based                    Image accelerator board      6 megabytes
     Host-based                      –                           10 megabytes
     Host-based                      Image accelerator board     12 megabytes



     If You Use VXT EX                                           Your Terminal Needs At
     Software...                     And...                      Least...
     Host- or server-based           –                           4 megabytes of memory
     Host- or server-based           Image accelerator board     6 megabytes

     Standard Terminal (4 MB)
     The standard terminal comes with 4 megabytes of memory. You can expand
     memory up to 18 megabytes by installing memory modules in the terminal. To
     expand memory on system box models, you must install a memory controller
     board.
     Optional Memory (To 18 MB)
     •   2-megabyte memory controller board (for system box models)
     •   One to three 2-megabyte or 4-megabyte memory modules
     To install memory, see VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal Installing
     and Getting Started. To order memory, see Appendix E.




                                  VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 5
A Look at the Terminal
1.5 Memory Requirements

1.5.1 Monitoring Memory Use (Host-Based Terminals)
        If your terminal uses host-based VXT software, the number of applications
        and windows you can display is limited by the amount of physical memory in
        the terminal. The amount of memory in use changes as you open and close
        windows and applications. If you run out of memory, the terminal may quit all
        current X sessions and terminal window sessions and reboot itself.
        When the amount of available memory is low, the Terminal Manager window
        displays a warning message. You can also monitor memory use by checking the
        System Monitor dialog box (Section 6.5).
        To regain memory, you can
        •     Close or quit from any unused applications, windows, or sessions.
        •     Decrease the number of lines the terminal saves when you scroll them off
              the top of a VXT DECterm window. See Section 8.4.
        •     Limit the software options you load to only those you need. See Section 5.8.
        •     End all current sessions by rebooting the terminal’s software. To reboot the
              terminal’s software:
              –   Choose Reset, Reboot, or Shutdown from the Terminal Manager
                  window’s Session menu.
              –   Press the reboot key sequence for your keyboard:
                  ANSI (LK401) keyboard   Press Ctrl Alt . , using the left Alt key and the
                                          period key on the numeric keypad.
                  PC (LK443/LK444)        Press Ctrl Alt . , using the period key on the
                  keyboard                numeric keypad.
                  Short ANSI (LK421)      Press Ctrl Alt Extend   . .
                  keyboard
                  Sun style (LK460)       Press Ctrl   Del .
                  keyboard
        To install more memory in the terminal, see Appendix E.

1.6 X Window Sessions and Terminal Window Sessions
        You can use two types of sessions on your host computers: an X window
        session or a VXT terminal window session. You can open X window
        sessions and VXT terminal window sessions at the same time.




6 Chapter 1
                                                    A Look at the Terminal
                      1.6 X Window Sessions and Terminal Window Sessions

     X Window and DECwindows Sessions
     The X Window System is a graphically oriented user interface that lets you
     display one or more windows on the screen. Each window can represent a
     different software application running on its own host system. For example,
     you could run a word processing application in one window and a spreadsheet
     application in another window. With multiple windows, you can perform many
     tasks in an easy and efficient manner.
     The X Window System was designed at the Massachusetts Institute of
     Technology. Digital’s DECwindows Motif software is based on the X Window
     System and the Open Software Foundation’s Motif standard.
     To use an X window session, you log in to a host that has X window
     applications. In an X window session, you can use all the applications and
     utilities provided in the X Window System. For more information about
     Digital’s X applications, see the DECwindows Motif User’s Guide for your
     operating system.
     Terminal Window Sessions
     You can create terminal windows to access video text terminal applications on
     host systems. The terminal lets you create multiple VXT DECterm or VXT
     3270 terminal windows. When you open a terminal window, you log in to a
     host as you would on a conventional video terminal.

1.7 Customizing Your Terminal
     VXT software provides menus and dialog boxes that let you customize the
     operating settings for your terminal’s window manager, terminal manager,
     VXT DECterm windows, and VXT 3270 windows. You can save your own
     settings or use factory-default settings from memory.
     When you save customized settings in dialog boxes, the terminal stores
     your settings in a native resource file. Whenever you turn on or reset the
     terminal, it reads the settings in the native resource file.
     If you use host-based operation, the terminal stores the native resource file
     in the terminal’s nonvolatile memory. If you use server-based operation, the
     terminal stores the native resource file on an InfoServer system.
     If you want central management, you or your system manager can use the
     configuration manager on any VXT 2000 windowing terminal in your network.
     The configuration manager lets you customize settings for individual terminals
     or groups of terminals. Configuration manager settings are stored in the native
     resource files. Alternatively, you can create your own host-based resource
     files and store them on a host system.



                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 7
A Look at the Terminal
1.7 Customizing Your Terminal

        Using Menus
        You can use the following menus to customize settings:
        •     Terminal Manager—Customize menu
              You use the Customize menu in the Terminal Manager window to view and
              change the settings for most of the terminal’s operating features.
              –   For user-preference features, see Chapter 3.
              –   For communication settings, see Chapter 4.
              –   For startup settings and fonts, see Chapter 5.
        •     Window manager—Options submenu
              The window manager provides an Options submenu that lets you customize
              window features such as border colors. You can access the Options
              submenu from the window menu button (Section 11.3) or from the
              Workspace pop-up menu (Chapter 12).
              Advanced users can customize window manager menus, mouse buttons,
              or keyboard keys (Section 12.9). For example, you can define menu
              items, buttons, or keys to launch local VXT applications or remote host
              applications (Chapter 13).
        •     VXT DECterm Options menu
              Each VXT DECterm terminal window you create includes an Options
              menu. This menu lets you change many DECterm operating features for
              that window while an application is running in the window. However,
              many applications handle the customization of the VXT DECterm window
              on their own. Chapter 8 describes how to use the VXT DECterm Options
              menu.
        •     VXT 3270 Options menu
              Each VXT 3270 terminal window you create includes an Options menu.
              This menu lets you change certain VXT 3270 operating features while an
              application is running. However, many applications handle customization
              of the VXT 3270 window on their own. Chapters 9 and 10 describe how to
              use the VXT 3270 Options menu.
        Central Management
        VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management describes how
        to centrally manage terminals, using the configuration manager or your own
        host-based resource files.
        •     Configuration Manager
              When you click on Configuration . . . in the Terminal Manager window’s
              Customize menu, the terminal displays the Configuration submenu. From



8 Chapter 1
                                                           A Look at the Terminal
                                                   1.7 Customizing Your Terminal

          the Configuration submenu you can display a Resource Management or
          Font Management dialog box.
          The Resource Management dialog box lets a system manager centrally
          manage VXT 2000 windowing terminals from one terminal. The system
          manager can control the customizable features of these menus:
          •   Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu
          •   Terminal Manager window’s Create menu
          •   Window manager’s Options menu
          •   VXT DECterm window’s Options menu
          The Font Management dialog box lets a system manager customize and
          configure font support for terminals on multiple InfoServer systems.
      •   Host-based resource files
          You can create your own host-based resource files to store the customized
          settings for terminals. You edit these files directly. Host-based resource
          files provide a way for host-based terminals to share the same settings.
      Other Features on Host Systems
      Host systems can also customize certain features of your terminal:
      •   Host-based control functions
          Applications can control many terminal features from the host system by
          using control functions.
      •   Client Customize
          The X window or DECwindows software package includes its own
          Customize utility, not described here. For more information, see the
          DECwindows Motif User’s Guide for your operating system.

1.8 Compatibility with VT Series and 3270 Terminals
      The terminal can operate as a video text terminal when you want to log in to a
      host system and use applications designed for conventional video terminals.
      You can use VXT DECterm windows to emulate VT300 series video terminals.
      See Chapters 7 and 8.
      You can use VXT 3270 windows to access applications on an IBM SNA system.
      See Chapters 9 and 10.




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 9
A Look at the Terminal
1.8 Compatibility with VT Series and 3270 Terminals

1.8.1 Character Sets
        VXT DECterm Windows
        When you use VXT DECterm terminal windows, you can choose different
        character sets to match your computer system or software application
        requirements. You can choose from
        •      Two 8-bit multinational character sets—DEC Multinational or the ISO
               Latin Alphabet No. 1 set of the International Standards Organization
        •      Several 7-bit national replacement character sets (NRCs) for Western
               European languages
        Chapter 3 describes how to choose characters sets.
        VXT 3270 Windows
        VXT 3270 windows use a translation table to translate the characters
        generated by the terminal into EBCDIC characters that your IBM application
        uses. See Section 10.3.




10 Chapter 1
                                                                        22
                                        Using the Terminal


This chapter describes how to start using the terminal with VXT software.
When you turn on the terminal, it normally displays the Terminal Manager
window after loading VXT software. This window acts as a control panel for
creating sessions and customizing terminal settings.
VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal Installing and Getting Started
provides step-by-step instructions to start creating sessions with the Terminal
Manager window. This chapter provides more details and describes other basic
functions you can perform from the Terminal Manager window. The chapter
covers the following major topics:
•   Terminal Manager Window
•   VXT Message Box
•   Creating Sessions and VXT Applications
•   Autostarting, Pausing, or Ending Sessions
•   Checking Network and Terminal Status
•   Working with Multiple Remote X Session Managers
•   Using the Open Look Window Manager from Sun Systems
•   Printing
•   Getting Started Menu
If you want to use VXT EX software, see Chapter 14. When you use VXT EX
software, the terminal displays a VXT EX connection window instead of the
Terminal Manager window.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 11
Using the Terminal
2.1 Terminal Manager Window

2.1 Terminal Manager Window
        When you turn on the terminal, it normally displays the Terminal Manager
        window and VXT Message Box. Here is the Terminal Manager window:

                                            VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                  Ethernet Active Address   LAT Host Name        IP Address      DECnet Address

                  08−00−2B−11−CD−46         LAT_08002B11CD46    12.122.123.123   12.123



                                                                                          LJ−01140C−RAGS




        •      The title bar displays the window title and VXT software version.
        •      The menu bar provides access to the following menus:
               Session                 To end, pause, or autostart a session, or to display network and
                                       terminal status information (Chapter 6)
               Create                  To start X sessions, terminal windows, and local terminal
                                       applications
               Customize               To customize terminal manager features and access the
                                       Configuration Manager dialog boxes
               Print Screen            To print all or part of the screen on a local printer, or to cancel a
                                       LAT print job
               Getting Started         To get help on creating sessions and entering your terminal’s IP
                                       or DECnet address
                                       To access the InfoReader library of online VXT documentation
                                       (server-based terminals)
        •      The address region shows the terminal’s Ethernet, LAT, IP, and DECnet
               addresses. These addresses define the terminal’s location on a network for
               LAT, TCP/IP, and DECnet communications.
               Initially, the IP and DECnet addresses are blank. To use TCP/IP or
               DECnet communications, you must enter and save the terminal’s IP or
               DECnet address in the appropriate Customize Communications dialog box.
               Initially, the Ethernet Active Address field displays the terminal’s Ethernet
               hardware address. If you enable DECnet communications, the displayed
               Ethernet address is converted to a global network address in the network
               service access point (NSAP) format. In this case, you can still view the
               Ethernet hardware address in the System Configuration dialog box.




12 Chapter 2
                                                              Using the Terminal
                                                   2.1 Terminal Manager Window

2.1.1 VXT Message Box
      The VXT Message Box lets you monitor system messages that affect the
      terminal’s operating status.
      The VXT Message Box provides a Customize menu that lets you choose
      the category of messages displayed and change the box’s position and size
      (Section 3.13).
      Normally, the terminal starts the Terminal Manager window and the VXT
      Message Box as a single application. You can start them as separate
      applications if you want to control them separately (Section 5.6). In this
      case, the VXT Message Box also includes a File menu with an Exit item that
      lets you close the box.




                                                                         TI−03010−RAGS

2.1.2 Closing the Terminal Manager Window and VXT Message Box
      The Terminal Manager window and Message box are local VXT applications.
      You can close these applications without closing your other open sessions.
      Closing the Terminal Manager window can free the terminal’s memory to
      perform other tasks. You can restart the Terminal Manager window and VXT
      Message Box if needed.
      To close the Terminal Manager window and VXT Message Box:
      •   Click on the Session menu in the Terminal Manager window.
      •   Click on the Close menu item.
      If you have customized settings in the Customize AutoStart dialog box to run
      the Terminal Manager window and VXT Message Box as separate applications,
      the VXT Message Box remains open.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 13
Using the Terminal
2.1 Terminal Manager Window

        To restart the Terminal Manager window and VXT Message Box:
        1. Click and hold MB2 anywhere on the screen background, outside your
           windows. The terminal displays the pop-up VXT Create menu.
        2. Click on the Term Mgr + Msg Box menu item.
        Hiding the Terminal Manager Window
        You can also hide the Terminal Manager window and Message Box applications
        without stopping them. You can choose to hide these applications each time
        you start the terminal or hide them during operation. You can enable the F3
        key to act as a toggle switch for hiding or displaying these applications. See
        Section 3.10.

2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications
        You can open two types of sessions on host systems—an X session or a terminal
        window session. X sessions let you access X window applications on your host.
        Terminal window sessions provide a VXT DECterm or VXT 3270 terminal
        emulator for accessing traditional video terminal applications on your host.
        You can open multiple sessions.
        You can also start or stop three VXT applications:
               Terminal Manager window
               VXT Message Box
               Motif window manager
        By default, the terminal starts all three applications when you turn on or reset
        the terminal.
        Initially, you use a Create dialog box to start sessions or change VXT
        applications. After you save a list of preferred services in the dialog box, you
        can quickly start sessions and VXT applications from the Create pull-down
        menu or VXT Create pop-up menu (Section 2.2.8).

2.2.1 Displaying the Create Dialog Box
        To display the Create dialog box:
        1. Click on the Create menu in the Terminal Manager window.
        2. Click on Other... menu item to display the Create dialog box.

                                               Note
               Your system manager can use the terminal’s configuration manager to
               prevent users from accessing the Create dialog box. In this case, the



14 Chapter 2
                                                             Using the Terminal
                                     2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

          Other... menu item is dimmed.




                                                                       TI−3009A−RAGS


       You can connect to hosts or services on a network supporting the TCP/IP, LAT,
       or DECnet protocol.

2.2.2 Starting LAT or Serial Sessions
       To start a LAT or serial session from the Create dialog box:
       1. In the Application box, click on the type of session you want to start:
          X Session, DECterm, or 3270.
       2. In the Transport box, click on the communication method to use for the
          session: LAT or Serial.
          If you choose the Serial transport, skip the next step.



                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 15
Using the Terminal
2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

        3. Click on the Host Name or Address box and enter the name or address of
           the host you want to connect to.
        4. Click on the      button to add your session settings to the Preferred
           Services scroll box.
        5. Click on the Save button to save your Preferred Services list for future
           use. The terminal adds your services to the Create menu and VXT Create
           pop-up menu for quick access.
        6. Click on the Start button to connect to the host. The terminal displays a
           login window.
        7. Log in to the session.
        If the Start button is dimmed:
        If you are trying to start a serial DECterm window, see Section 4.2 to change
        the Port Usage feature to set the serial port to work as a host port.

2.2.3 Starting a DECnet Session
        Before you create your initial DECnet session, you must enter and save your
        terminal’s DECnet address (Section 4.9).
        Your host system must have the VXT$SERVER DECnet object installed.
        For more information, see the section on the OpenVMS operating system in
        VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management.
        To start a DECnet session from the Create dialog box:
        1. In the Application box, click on the type of session you want to start:
           X Session, DECterm, or 3270.
        2. In the Transport box, click on the DECnet button.
        3. Click on the Host Name or Address box and enter the DECnet host address
           or name (up to 6 characters). Host names require at least one alphabetic
           character.
               You can specify DECnet addresses in two forms:
               •   The long form uses a period to separate the area number and node
                   number. For example: 61.513.
               •   The short form collapses the area and node numbers into a single deci-
                   mal value, using the formula (area_number 1024) + node_number.
                                                              




                   For example: 62977 = (61 1024) + 513.
                                             




               If you want to use host names instead of addresses, you first must
               enter and save the address of your network’s DECnet name translator
               (Section 4.10).


16 Chapter 2
                                                             Using the Terminal
                                     2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

       4. Click on the      button to add your session settings to the Preferred
          Services scroll box.
       5. Click on the Save button to save your Preferred Services list for future use.
          The terminal adds your list to the Create menu and VXT Create pop-up
          menu for quick access.
       6. Click on the Start button to connect to the host. The terminal displays a
          login window.
       7. Log in to the session.

2.2.4 Starting an IP Session
       Before you create your initial session, you must enter and save your terminal’s
       TCP/IP address (Section 4.5).

                                            Note
          You can create only one IP X session to a given host. If you try to
          create a second IP X session to the same host, the X display manager
          (XDM) closes the first IP X session while creating the second IP X
          session.


       To start an IP session from the Create dialog box:
       1. In the Application box, click on the type of session you want to start:
          X Session, DECterm, or 3270.
       2. In the Transport box, click on the TCP/IP button.
       3. Click on the Host Name or Address box and enter the IP host address or
          name (up to 30 characters).
          If you want to use host names instead of addresses, you first must enter
          and save the address of your network’s TCP/IP name server (Section 4.6).
          Options:
          •   Use the Any Host button if you want to use the first available IP host.
          •   Use the Any Host Indirect button to specify a host that will act as a
              pathway to find the first available IP host. Specify the host in the Host
              Name or Address box.
          •   Use the Comment box to enter optional text comments. For example,
              if you entered a host name, you may want to enter the IP address as a
              comment.



                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 17
Using the Terminal
2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

               •   Use the List Known Hosts... button to display a dialog box that lets
                   you list available IP hosts.
               See Section 2.2.4.1 for button descriptions.
               You can enter a host IP address in one of the following formats:
               Format                           Example
               Decimal whole number             215279382
               Decimal dot notation             12.212.231.22
               Hexadecimal                      0xcd4e716
               Hexadecimal dot notation         0xc.d4.e7.16
               Octal dot notation               01465163426
               Octal whole number               014.324.347.26
               For DECterm windows, you can specify the port for Telnet to connect on.
               Simply append a comma to the host name or IP address followed by the
               port number.
               Format                           Example
               Host_Name,Port                   market,24
               IP_Address,Port                  12.212.231.22,24
        4. Click on the      button to add your session settings to the Preferred
           Services scroll box.
        5. Click on the Save button to save your Preferred Services list for future use.
           The terminal adds your list to the Create menu and VXT Create pop-up
           menu for quick access.
        6. Click on the Start button to connect to the host. The terminal displays a
           login window.
        7. Log in to the session.
        HP–UX Systems: Reset Required if You Cannot Log In
        When creating X IP sessions to the HP–UX system, you may have to reset the
        terminal if you are unable to log in. This is because the HP–UX system does
        not issue a server reset after closing the login box.
2.2.4.1 Optional Buttons for Specifying IP Hosts
           Any Host
        Use the Any Host button if you want to connect to first available IP host on the
        network. When you click on the Any Host button, an asterisk appears in the
        Host Name or IP Address box.



18 Chapter 2
                                                     Using the Terminal
                             2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

    Any Host Indirect
Use the Any Host Indirect button if you want to enter a host to use as a path
to your destination host. When you click on the Any Host Indirect button, the
title of the Host Name or IP Address box changes to Through Host Name or IP
Address. You can then enter the host name or IP address of the host to use as
a pathway.
   Optional Comment for Host
You can store optional text comments with your host name or IP address. For
example, if you entered a host name in the Host Name or IP Address box, you
may want to store the IP address as a comment.
   List Known Hosts...
You can choose from a list of hosts on your local subnet or on other subnets,
by using on the List Known Hosts... button. Click on the button to display the
Known Hosts dialog box:




                                          LJ−1147A−RAGS




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 19
Using the Terminal
2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

        The Known Hosts dialog box lists the available TCP/IP hosts and services on
        the network. If the host you want is not listed, it may be currently unavailable.
        Click on the List button to update the list. You may have to click on this
        button several times before the host you want is listed. Sometimes it takes
        a few minutes for the terminal to establish communication with hosts on the
        network.
        If the Known Hosts box displays IP addresses with question marks (?) where
        host names should appear, you need to enter your TCP/IP Name Server address
        in the TCP/IP Name Server dialog box (Section 4.6).
        To view hosts on the local subnet:
        Click on the Local button. The dialog box lists known hosts in the terminal’s
        local subnet. In the following example, 135 represents the local subnet of the
        terminal.
        Subnet example:
        16.122.135.222
        To view hosts on other subnets:
        Click on the Indirect button. Then click on the Indirect Host Name box and
        enter the name of a host to use as a source for subnet information.
        To connect to a Host in the Known Hosts scroll box:
        There are two ways to connect to a host from the Known Hosts scroll box.
        •      Double click on the host in the Known Hosts scroll box.
        •      Click on the host name or address in the Known Hosts scroll box. The
               name or address appears in the Host Name or IP Address box of the Create
               Session dialog box.
               Click on the Connect button in the Create dialog box.
        To add a host from the Known Hosts scroll box to the Preferred
        Services scroll box:
        1. Click on the host name in the Known Hosts scroll box. The host name
           appears in the Host Name or IP Address box of the Create dialog box.
        2. Click on the    button in the Create dialog box. The host appears in the
           Preferred Services scroll box.
        3. Click on the Save button in the Create dialog box.
        To update the Known Hosts scroll box list:
        Click on the List button. The terminal updates the list of available hosts.


20 Chapter 2
                                                             Using the Terminal
                                     2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

       To close the Known Hosts dialog box:
       Click on the Close button.

2.2.5 Starting VXT Applications
       To start a VXT application from the Create dialog box:
       1. In the Application box, click on the type of local application you want
          to start: Motif Window Manager, Terminal Manager, Message Box, or
          Terminal Manager + Message Box.
          By default, the terminal runs the Terminal Manager window and VXT
          Message Box as a single application.
       2. Click on the     button to add the application to the Preferred Services
          scroll box.
       3. Click on the Save button to save your Preferred Services list for future use.
          The terminal adds your list to the Create menu and VXT Create pop-up
          menu for quick access.
       4. Click on the Start button if you wish to start the application.
          If the application is already running, it will not start again. Only one copy
          of an application can run at a time.

2.2.6 Starting Remote Applications
       You can start a remote application on a host system that you are currently
       connected to. Before you start a remote application, you must run the VXT
       application launcher on the host system. For instructions, see Section 13.3.
       To start a remote application from the Create dialog box:
       1. In the Application box, click on the Remote Application button.
       2. In the Name box, enter the name of the VXT launcher. The default name
          is VXT.
          If you plan to launch applications from several host systems, you must
          specify a unique name for the VXT launcher on each system. You can
          specify a name when you run the VXT launcher. See Chapter 13.
       3. In the Command box, enter the host system command to start the
          application.
          For example, the following command starts a clock:
          OpenVMS system            MCR DECW$CLOCK




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 21
Using the Terminal
2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

               ULTRIX, DEC OSF/1           /usr/bin/dxclock
               AXP, or UNIX system
        4. Click on the    button to add your remote application settings to the
           Preferred Services scroll box.
        5. Click on the Save button to save your Preferred Services list for future use.
           The terminal adds your list to the Create menu and VXT Create pop-up
           menu for quick access.
        6. Click on the Start button to start the remote application. The terminal
           displays the application.

2.2.7 Preferred Services
        You can add, move, and delete services from your Preferred Services list in the
        Create dialog box.
        To add a service to the Preferred Services scroll box:
        1. Use the Application, Transport, and Host Name or Address boxes to specify
           the service you want to add.
        2. Click on the         button to add the service to the Preferred Services scroll
           box.
        3. Click on the Save button to save your service’s name so you do not have to
           enter it each time you turn on the terminal.
        To start a session or application from the Preferred Services scroll
        box:
        •      Double click on a service in the Preferred Services scroll box.
        •      Click on a service in the Preferred Services scroll box. The service name
               appears in the Service or Host Name box. Click on the Connect button.
        To move a service in the Preferred Services scroll box:
        You can move a service up or down in the list. The terminal will display the
        services in the same order on the Create pull-down submenus and the VXT
        Create pop-up menu.
        1. Click on the service name you want to move.
        2. Click on the        or      button to move the service one place up or down in
           the list.
        To remove a service from the Preferred Services scroll box:
        1. Click on the service name you want to remove.



22 Chapter 2
                                                           Using the Terminal
                                   2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

      2. Click on the trash can button.

2.2.8 Creating Sessions from a Menu: Preferred Services
      After you save preferred services in the Create dialog box, the terminal adds
      them to
      •   The Create menu, as submenus
      •   The VXT Create pop-up menu (after you restart the window manager)
      You can quickly start a preferred service (a session or VXT application) by
      choosing the service name from these menus.
      Create Menu
      The Create menu adds a menu item for each type of session you have saved –
      DECterm, X Session, and so on. When you choose one of these menu items, the
      terminal displays a submenu that lists all of your preferred services for that
      type of session.

                             VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                                  LJ−01145C−RAGS

      VXT Create Pop-Up Menu
      After you restart the window manager, the VXT Create pop-up menu also lists
      all preferred services.
      To restart the window manager and view the VXT Create pop-up menu:
      1. Click and hold mouse button 1 (MB1) anywhere on the screen background,
         outside the Terminal Manager window and other windows.
          The terminal displays a Workspace pop-up menu.
      2. Drag the pointer to the Restart... menu item, then release MB1.
          The terminal displays a confirmation box asking if you really want to
          restart the window manager.
      3. Click on the OK button to restart the window manager.
          The borders around the windows on the screen disappear while the window
          manager is being restarted.


                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 23
Using the Terminal
2.2 Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

        4. After the window borders reappear, click and hold MB2 anywhere on the
           screen background.
               The terminal displays the VXT Create pop-up menu, listing your preferred
               services. The default VXT Create pop-up menu lists the combined Terminal
               Manager and VXT Message Box applications:

               VXT Create
         Term Mgr + Msg Box
                  LJ−03026−RAGS



2.3 Autostarting, Pausing, or Ending Sessions
        The Terminal Manager window’s Session menu lets you automatically start or
        pause a session. You can also end all sessions by using the Reset, Reboot, or
        Shutdown items    to reset the terminal’s VXT software.
                      VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager



                            VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                        LJ−01141C−RAGS


2.3.1 Autostarting a Session
        The AutoStart menu item lets you quickly start the list of sessions and VXT
        applications that you saved in the Customize AutoStart dialog box. The
        terminal also autostarts this list when you perform any action that restarts the
        terminal, such as
        •      Turning the terminal on
        •      Choosing the Reset, Reboot or Shutdown menu items from the Session
               menu
        To enter your AutoStart settings, see Section 5.6.
        To autostart your applications:
        1. Click on the Session menu in the Terminal Manager window.




24 Chapter 2
                                                             Using the Terminal
                                 2.3 Autostarting, Pausing, or Ending Sessions

      2. Click on AutoStart. The terminal starts up the sessions and applications in
         the order you listed them in the Customize AutoStart dialog box.

2.3.2 Pausing a Session
      If you want to interrupt your work without ending your session, you can
      pause a session. When you pause a session, the terminal displays the Pause
      Password dialog box. After you enter and verify a pause password, the
      terminal clears the screen and displays the Enter Password to Resume prompt.
      Any applications you started continue to run. When you resume your session,
      you can continue work where you left off.
      The pause password is valid for the current terminal session only. The
      password is not saved when you reboot or reset the terminal.
      To pause your session:
      1. Click on the Session menu in the Terminal Manager window.
      2. Click on Pause to display the Pause Password dialog box.




                                                       LJ−01142−RAGS

      3. You can enter a new pause password or use a previous pause password
         that you saved during the current terminal session.
         To enter a new pause password:
         a. Enter the password in the Enter Pause Password box. The password
            may be from 1 to 127 characters. Blank spaces are not allowed.
         b. Click on the Verify Password box and enter the same password. If you
            make a mistake, click on the Clear button to start over.
         c.   Click on the OK button to save the password and exit the dialog box.
         To use your previous pause password:
         Click on the Use Previous Password button.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 25
Using the Terminal
2.3 Autostarting, Pausing, or Ending Sessions

        When you click on the OK or Use Previous Password button, the terminal
        clears the screen and displays the Enter Password to Resume prompt.




                                                        LJ−01143A−RAGS

        To resume your session :
        Enter your password into the Password box and click on the OK button.
        If you forget the password, you can click on the Reset button to end all sessions
        and restart the terminal.
        If you choose...    The terminal...
        OK                  Verifies that your password is correct.
        Clear               Clears the password box.
        Reset               Ends all sessions on the terminal. Resets the X server and restarts
                            applications listed in the Customize AutoStart dialog box.

                                  Note: Serial Window Not Closed
               The Reset button does not end a terminal window created on the serial
               port. To close a session on the serial port, choose the Exit menu item
               from the terminal window’s File menu.




26 Chapter 2
                                                                Using the Terminal
                                    2.3 Autostarting, Pausing, or Ending Sessions

2.3.3 Ending All Sessions and Restarting VXT Software
      You can use the Reset, Reboot, or Shutdown menu items on the Session menu
      to end all active sessions on the terminal. If you choose Reboot or Shutdown,
      the terminal also reloads the VXT software from a host system or InfoServer
      system. You must reload VXT software to activate changes you make in some
      Customize dialog boxes (Language, Boot, Communications, Software Options,
      Resource Files).
      If you choose...   The terminal...
      Reset              Ends all sessions on the terminal.
                         Resolicits the network for the terminal’s resource file.
                         Restarts your AutoStart sessions and clients.
                         Resets the X server.
      Reboot             Ends all sessions on the terminal.
                         Resolicits the network for the terminal’s resource file.
                         Reloads VXT software.
                         Restarts your AutoStart sessions and clients.
                         Resets the X server.
      Shutdown           Ends all sessions on the terminal and displays the message
                         Press RETURN to restart VXT
                         After you press Return , the terminal
                         Resolicits the network for the terminal’s resource file.
                         Reloads VXT software.
                         Restarts your AutoStart sessions and clients.
                         Resets the X server.
      When you choose the Reset, Reboot, or Shutdown menu item, the terminal
      displays a confirmation box. To confirm your choice, click on Yes. To remain in
      the session, click on No. To bypass this confirmation box, see Confirm Reset
      Session in Section 3.10.
      You can also reboot the terminal by pressing Ctrl +left Alt +keypad           .   .

2.3.4 Ending Individual Sessions
      If you have multiple sessions open, you can end individual sessions. The effect
      of ending a session depends on the type of session.




                                VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 27
Using the Terminal
2.3 Autostarting, Pausing, or Ending Sessions

        Ending an IP X Session
        You can end an IP X session by using the quit function in the remote session
        manager for that session. Quitting from the remote session manager (xsession)
        on a UNIX, ULTRIX, or DEC OSF/1 AXP system ends the xsession and the
        window manager (xwm).
        Ending a LAT X or DECnet X Session
        You can end a LAT X or DECnet X session by using the End Session function
        in the remote session manager for that session.
        By default, using the End Session function from an OpenVMS remote session
        manager restarts the terminal, ending all sessions on the terminal. If your
        terminal is using VXT server-based software, you can customize the terminal
        so it only ends the LAT X window session without restarting the terminal. See
        Section 5.4.
        Ending Terminal Window Sessions
        You can end a Telnet, LAT, DECnet, or Serial terminal window session by using
        the Exit menu item in the window’s File menu.

2.4 Checking Network and Terminal Status
        You can use the Status menu item on the Session menu to access screens that
        help you identify network problems. You can
        •      View the terminal’s configuration—software version, font path, network
               addresses, memory, installed options, and work group
        •      View TCP/IP routes and ping hosts to determine their availability
        •      Monitor and reset LAT and Ethernet counters
        •      Monitor memory and network utilization
        Chapter 6 describes the Status submenu.

2.5 Working with Multiple Remote X Session Managers
        Each X session you create has its own session manager on the host system.
        Each session manager expects to have complete control of your terminal.
        To maintain a consistent user interface when using multiple remote session
        managers, you should consider the effects on the terminal’s feature settings
        and the Motif window manager.




28 Chapter 2
                                                         Using the Terminal
                       2.5 Working with Multiple Remote X Session Managers

     Feature Settings
     The host session manager changes any settable features of your terminal, such
     as screen background, security, and keyboard selection.
     If you run multiple session managers, each one sets up the terminal according
     to the terminal’s saved settings at the time the session manager starts up. To
     keep the settings from changing unexpectedly, be sure to change and save all
     your preferences in all of your session managers.
     When you quit from a remote session manager, the system may ask you if you
     want to save customized settings before quitting. This question refers only to
     the remote session manager’s settings.
     Security Settings with OpenVMS DECwindows Session Manager The
     DECwindows session manager overrides the terminal manager’s Customize
     Security settings. Every time you log into a new OpenVMS host and run its
     DECwindows session manager, the security settings on the new node override
     the current settings. To maintain security, enter your settings on each host.
     Remote Window Managers
     You can choose whether or not a host-based window manager can take over
     windowing operations on the screen. The terminal’s local window manager
     provides you with quicker response time and overall higher performance.
     However, a host-based window manager may offer more features. To let the
     host control windowing operations, click on the Allow Remote Window Manager
     button in the Customize Terminal Manager dialog box (Section 3.10).

2.6 Using the Open Look Window Manager from Sun
    Systems
     If your host system has the Open Look window manager, you can perform the
     following steps to use this window manager on the terminal:
     1. Load the fonts for the Sun Open Look cursor in the /vxt/fonts/misc
        directory on the host system.
     2. In the Customize Terminal Manager dialog box, click on the Allow Remote
        Window Manager button (Section 3.10).
     3. In the Customize Security dialog box, click on the All button to allow all
        connections for TCP/IP (Section 3.7).
     4. In the Customize X Server dialog box, set the X Session Reset Server
        Action to Ignore Reset Server.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 29
Using the Terminal
2.6 Using the Open Look Window Manager from Sun Systems

        5. In the Create dialog box, create a session on your Sun system. The Sun
           system must have the X display manager (XDM) installed to be able to
           display the username and password banner on the terminal.
        6. Use the env command to verify the following symbol definitions on the Sun
           system:
               OPENWINHOME=/usr/openwin
               DISPLAY=vxt-ip:0
               LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/usr/openwin/lib
               If the symbols are not defined, apply them manually. For example:
               # setenv OPENWINHOME /usr/openwin
               # setenv DISPLAY vxt_ip_address:0.0
               # setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH /usr/openwin/lib
        7. To complete the initialization of the window manager, enter the following
           commands:
               # xrdb .Xdefaults (or .OWdefaults for Solaris 2.n systems)
               # /usr/openwin/lib/openwin-sys
               This is the OpenWindows X11/NeWS Server system
               initialization file)
               # olwm &
               After you complete these steps, the Open Look window manager
               environment should appear after a short time.
        If the system displays errors about elements not found, you may need to modify
        your path in .cshrc to access those elements.
        1. Use the find command to find the elements’ location.
        2. Modify the .cshrc file to include the correct path to the elements.
        3. Enter the following command to have the system read the updated .cshrc
           file.
               # source .cshrc
               The following example uses the find command to locate the executable
               code named xrdb:
               # find / -name xrdb -print




30 Chapter 2
                                                Using the Terminal
          2.6 Using the Open Look Window Manager from Sun Systems

Using Sun Open Look Fonts from the Host System
You use the Customize Font Path dialog box (Section 5.3) to enter the path to
the Sun Open Look fonts on your host system. By default, the VXT software
installation places font directories in the following path:
/tftpboot/vxt/fonts or /usr/tftpboot/vxt/fonts
The fonts you need are in the 100dpi and misc directories.
Specify the following two font paths in the Customize Font Path dialog box.
You need both font paths to access the fonts for various Sun applications. The
font paths you specify depend on whether your host system uses restricted or
unrestricted TFTP access. Digital recommends using restricted TFTP access,
for security reasons.
Restricted TFTP Systems
/vxt/fonts/misc/fonts.dir
/vxt/fonts/100dpi/fonts.dir
Unrestricted TFTP Systems
/tftpboot/vxt/fonts/misc/fonts.dir
(or /usr/tftpboot/vxt/fonts/misc/fonts.dir)
/tftpboot/vxt/fonts/100dpi/fonts.dir
(or /usr/tftpboot/vxt/fonts/100dpi/fonts.dir)
Using Sun Open Look Fonts from an InfoServer
Server-based terminals can use an InfoServer system to provide the Sun Open
Look fonts. VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management
describes how to use the terminal’s font manager to copy host fonts to
InfoServer font sets.
Converting Sun Fonts
The VXT 2000 windowing terminal uses fonts in the portable compiled font
(PCF) format. You can convert Sun fonts into PCF format, using conversion
utilities provided with the VXT software installation kit. See VXT Software
Version 2.1 Installation and System Management.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 31
Using the Terminal
2.7 Customizing Your Terminal’s Environment

2.7 Customizing Your Terminal’s Environment
        The Customize menu in the Terminal Manager window lets you check
        and control the settings for many features—from the keyboard to host
        communications. See the following chapters for details on the Customize
        menu:
        Chapter 3        Describes user-preference and security settings (top half of the
                         Customize menu).
        Chapter 4        Describes settings that affect communication with host systems
                         (Communications submenu).
        Chapter 5        Describes advanced settings for autostarting sessions, entering font
                         paths, booting VXT software, and turning VXT software options on or
                         off (bottom half of Customize menu).


2.8 Printing
        This section describes how to
        •      Print the screen from the Print Screen menu
        •      Send printing jobs from a host system to the terminal’s printer
        You can also perform printing operations from the Print menu in VXT
        DECterm windows (Section 7.5).
        Supported Printers
        The terminal supports level 1 and level 2 Digital printers.
        •      Level 1 printers include the LA50 and LA70 dot matrix printers.
        •      Level 2 printers include the LA75 and LA324 dot-matrix printers; LJ250
               (serial) and LJ252 (parallel) color ink-jet printers; and LN03, LN05, and
               LN06 laser printers.
        The terminal also supports PostScript printers, including Digital’s and
        ScriptPrinter and DEClaser family, the HP LaserJet II and HP LaserJet III
        printers, and the IBM 4019 laser printer.

2.8.1 Printing the Screen
        The Print Screen menu in the Terminal Manager window lets you print all or
        part of the screen display, using a serial or parallel printer connected to the
        rear of the terminal. Depending on your printer, you can print monochrome,
        gray scale, or color displays in sixel or PostScript format.
        You can also cancel a current printing job sent from a remote host system to
        the terminal’s printer.



32 Chapter 2
                                                           Using the Terminal
                                                                  2.8 Printing

Before printing, you should customize the print screen settings and select the
port you are using (serial or parallel). Normally, the print screen function
is set to print a monochrome image in sixel format on the parallel port. To
customize the print screen settings, see Section 3.6. To choose the printer port,
see Section 4.2.
The Print Screen menu looks like this:

                    VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                     LJ−01153C−RAGS

To print the complete screen image:
Choose the Local Print Entire Screen menu item.
If you are printing from a VR319 monitor to an LA50 printer, the image may
be too large for the page. Click on the Rotate/Scale Picture button in the
Terminal Manager window’s Customize Print Screen dialog box to print the
image on the page.
To print a portion of the screen image:
1. Choose the Local Print Portion of Screen menu item. The pointer turns
   into a cross.
2. Wait for terminal to redisplay the Print Screen menu.
3. Move the pointer to one corner of the area you want to print. Hold down
   MB1 and drag the pointer to the opposite corner of the desired area. As
   you drag the pointer, a rectangular outline is displayed.
4. Release MB1 to send the selected image to the printer.
To cancel a remote printing job that is currently printing:
Choose the Cancel Current Remote Print Job menu item. The remote print job
currently printing stops.
Normally, the terminal can accept printing jobs from systems using the TCP/IP
or LAT transport. To change this setting, see Section 4.2.




                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 33
Using the Terminal
2.8 Printing

        Printer Status
        When you send a job to the printer, the terminal displays printer status
        messages in the VXT Message Box.
        Printer Offline                Indicates that the printer is turned off or not
                                       connected. The printer did not assert its DTR signal
                                       within 2 seconds after the print request.
        Printer Busy                   Indicates the printer is printing another job.
        In both cases, your print request is canceled.
        Canceling a Print Screen Operation
        During large printing jobs, the terminal displays a Print Cancel dialog box to
        let you cancel the print operation. To cancel the print operation, click on the
        Click Here to Cancel Print button. Printing stops when the printer empties its
        input buffer. The Print Cancel dialog box is not printed.

2.8.2 Printing from a Host System
        VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management describes how
        to set up the terminal’s printer port for printing from a host system. After
        the host is set up, you can send printing jobs from the host to the terminal’s
        printer.
        You can print from hosts that use the TCP/IP or LAT transport.
        Printing from Hosts that Use TCP/IP
        To use TCP/IP for printing:
        •      The terminal’s TCP/IP or Ethernet address must be displayed in the
               Terminal Manager window
        •      The Host Accessible Printer Port button must be enabled in the Customize
               Serial and Parallel Ports dialog box (Section 4.2). This is the default
               setting.
        •      The VXT printer support utilities provided with the VXT software
               installation kit must be installed on your host system.
        The terminal accepts only one TCP/IP printing job at a time. If a second job is
        sent while the first job is printing, the second job is ignored and no notification
        is sent to the requester. The requester must wait until the first job completes,
        then submit the second job again.




34 Chapter 2
                                                             Using the Terminal
                                                                    2.8 Printing

Printing from ULTRIX, DEC OSF/1 AXP, SunOS, or IBM AIX Hosts Use the
lpr command to submit printing jobs to the terminal’s printer. Ask your
system manager for the printer name to specify.
lpr -Pvxt_printer [-Dpostscript] printfile
•   vxt_printer is the name of the printer connected to the terminal.
•   printfile is the file to print.
•   The -Dpostscript option is for printing PostScript files from ULTRIX
    systems. You can use this option if your printer supports PostScript
    printing.
For more information, see the lpr man page.
Printing from an HP–UX or SCO ODT Host Use the lp command to submit
printing jobs to the terminal’s printer. Ask your system manager for the
printer name to specify.
lp -dvxt_printer printfile
•   vxt_printer is the name of the printer connected to the terminal.
•   printfile is the file to print.
Printing from an OpenVMS Host
To print from an OpenVMS system to a VXT 2000 windowing terminal’s
printer, use the DCL PRINT command. Ask your system manager for the
printer’s queue.
$ PRINT/QUEUE=vxt_printer myfile.EXT
•   vxt_printer is the name of the terminal’s printer queue. Use the queue
    name that was created when initializing the printer port.
•   myfile.ext is the file you wish to print.
Canceling a Remote Printing Job
To cancel a printing job from a host that is currently printing, choose the
Cancel Current Remote Print Job menu item from the Print Screen menu in
the Terminal Manager window. The terminal stops printing the current job.




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 35
Using the Terminal
2.9 Getting Started Menu

2.9 Getting Started Menu
        The Getting Started menu in the Terminal Manager window provides help
        on choosing your keyboard type, entering an IP or DECnet address, and
        creating sessions. If you have a server-based terminal, you can also acess
        the InfoReader library of online VXT documentation. To display the Getting
        Started menu, click on the Getting Started menu in the menu bar. The Getting
        Started menu looks like this:

                             VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                              LJ−01144D−RAGS

        InfoReader—Viewing Online VXT Documentation
        To view online VXT documentation, choose the InfoReader... menu item.
        The documentation is an optional part of the VXT software installation. The
        InfoReader utility is similar to the Bookreader utility on DECwindows systems.
        When you choose the InfoReader... menu item, the terminal displays a new
        window that lists the available VXT document titles. If you are unfamiliar
        with Bookreader or InfoReader, double click on the Using InfoReader selection.
        For VXT Version 2.1 software, the following titles are available:
        •      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal Installing and Getting Started
               (in six languages)
        •      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information
        •      VXT Software Version 2.1 Release Notes
        •      VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management
               Each section of this document is a separate online book that covers the use
               of VXT software on different operating systems.




36 Chapter 2
                                                        Using the Terminal
                                                  2.9 Getting Started Menu

•   InfoServer System Operations Guide




                                                       LJ−03013A−RAGS




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 37
                                                                              33
                                    Customizing the Terminal


        This chapter describes how you can customize basic terminal feature settings,
        using the top half of the Customize menu in the Terminal Manager window.
        The chapter also describes how to customize the VXT Message Box.
        Initially, the terminal uses factory-default settings that work with many
        host systems. You can make changes to suit your personal preference and
        computing environment. After you make changes, you can save your settings
        for all future sessions.
        The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •      Displaying the Customize Menu
        •      Saving and Restoring Terminal Manager Settings
        •      Changing Your Keyboard Settings
        •      Choosing the Display Language
        •      Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings
        •      Changing Your Print Screen Settings
        •      Changing Your Security Settings
        •      Changing Your Screen Background
        •      Changing Your Window Colors
        •      Changing Your Terminal Manager Settings
        •      Changing Your Video Alignment Settings (VX227 Models)
        •      Saving the Terminal Manager Window’s Position and Size
        •      Customizing the VXT Message Box




38 Chapter 3
                                                           Customizing the Terminal
                                                 3.1 Displaying the Customize Menu

3.1 Displaying the Customize Menu
     To display the Customize menu, click on Customize in the Terminal Manager
     window’s menu bar. This chapter describes the menu items highlighted in
     gray:

                            VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                                LJ−01157D−RAGS


     When you choose one of the highlighted menu items from the Customize menu,
     the terminal displays a dialog box with the feature settings for that topic. In
     dialog boxes, shaded buttons indicate the current settings. You can examine
     the settings and change them if desired. You can use the last three menu items
     to save and restore the Terminal Manager window’s position and size.

                                              Note
        A system manager can customize settings for terminals and work
        groups. The system manager can also lock or unlock access to one or
        more of the Customize menu items. Locked menu items are dimmed.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 39
Customizing the Terminal
3.2 Saving and Restoring Terminal Manager Settings

3.2 Saving and Restoring Terminal Manager Settings
        Each dialog box has a set of push buttons for saving and restoring settings.
        After you make changes in a dialog box, you can save your settings for future
        sessions by clicking on the OK button or Apply button. If you do not want to
        save your changes, click on the Cancel button. Some new settings do not take
        effect until you end your current session and begin another one.

        Click on ...      To ...
        OK                Apply and save new settings and dismiss the dialog box.
        Apply             Apply and save new settings without dismissing the dialog box.
        System Defaults   Apply and save the factory-default settings, clearing all text and
                          scroll boxes.
                          If your terminal is in a work group: Clicking on the System
                          Defaults button applies and saves the work group’s customized
                          settings.
        Cancel            Dismiss the dialog box without changing any settings. If you made
                          any changes without applying them, clicking on the Cancel push
                          button cancels those changes.




40 Chapter 3
                                                    Customizing the Terminal
                                         3.3 Changing Your Keyboard Settings

3.3 Changing Your Keyboard Settings
     You can control general keyboard settings from the Terminal Manager window,
     such as your keyboard type and keyclick volume. The keyboard type setting
     should match the keyboard you are using. To view or change your keyboard
     settings, choose Keyboard... from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize
     menu. The Customize Keyboard dialog box looks like this:

                                         Note
        You can also customize some keyboard settings for individual VXT
        DECterm windows. See Chapter 7.




                                                                     LJ−01158−RAGS


     From the Customize Keyboard dialog box, you can change any of the following
     settings:
        Keyboard Type
     The keyboard comes in various models for different languages and dialects.
     The location of some keyboard characters varies, depending on the keyboard
     model. Make sure the Keyboard Type setting in the dialog box matches your
     keyboard model number, so the system will send the correct characters when
     you use the keyboard.



                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 41
Customizing the Terminal
3.3 Changing Your Keyboard Settings

        The System Default setting is the North American model of your standard
        (LK401), short UNIX style (LK421), PC style (LK443 or LK444), or Sun style
        (LK460) keyboard. If you are using a keyboard for another language or dialect,
        you must choose the matching keyboard type.
        To find your keyboard model number: Look on the bottom of the keyboard
        for the label that specifies the model number. The model number should be in
        a format similar to LK4nn-xx or nn-nnnnn-xx. Use the xx value to choose your
        keyboard type from the Keyboard Type scroll box.
        For example, if you have a British keyboard and the model number is LK401-
        AA, you choose British_LK401AA_TW or British_LK401AA_DP.
        Typewriter (TW) or data processing (DP) keys
        You also use the keyboard type setting to specify whether you want your
        keyboard to act as a typewriter (TW) or data processing (DP) keyboard.
        This setting affects keys with three or more characters. If you choose data
        processing, these keys send the characters on the right half of their keycaps.
        If you choose the typewriter setting, these keys send the characters on the left
        half of their keycaps.
        Typewriter and data processing settings are identical for these keyboard types:
        •      North American and Dutch
        •      When using 8-bit multinational characters: British, German, and
               Portuguese
        When using DECwindows: The DECwindows host session manager has a
        similar Keyboard Type option. Digital recommends that you leave the host
        setting at System Default to avoid having the host session manager and local
        terminal manager compete to set the keyboard.
           Bell Volume
        The keyboard’s warning bell alerts you to system messages. To adjust the bell
        volume, either drag the Percent Volume slider to the right or left, or point to
        a new location on the scale and click MB1. To disable the bell, click on the
        Disable button.
           Keyclick Volume
        When you press a keyboard key, the keyboard makes a clicking sound. To
        adjust the keyclick volume, either drag the Percent Volume slider to the right
        or left, or point to a new location on the scale and click MB1. To disable
        keyclicks, click on the Disable button.




42 Chapter 3
                                                Customizing the Terminal
                                     3.3 Changing Your Keyboard Settings

   Cursor Blink
Normally, the text input cursor blinks. To adjust the rate of blinking, either
drag the Milliseconds slider to the right or left, or point to a new location on
the scale and click MB1. To disable blinking, click on the Disable button. Your
new setting takes effect when you restart the terminal.
VXT DECterm windows also have a Cursor Blink feature, controlling the text
cursor in the VXT DECterm terminal window. The Cursor Blink setting in
the Customize Keyboard dialog box has no effect on the VXT DECterm Cursor
Blink setting.
   Auto Repeat
When you press a key longer than normal, it repeats until you release it. To
disable this feature, click on the Disable button. The Help and Return keys
never autorepeat.
VXT DECterm windows also have an Auto Repeat feature. When you create
a VXT DECterm window, its Auto Repeat setting works independently of the
Terminal Manager window’s setting. To disable Auto Repeat for the Terminal
Manager and VXT DECterm windows, disable both settings.
   Lock Key State
Normally when you press the lock key, the alphabetic keys send uppercase
letters; the number keys and nonalphabetic character keys do not send their
shifted character.
When you click on the Shift Lock button, all keys send their shifted character.
The new setting takes effect when you restart the terminal.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 43
Customizing the Terminal
3.4 Choosing the Display Language

3.4 Choosing the Display Language
        The terminal supports different display languages for VXT screens. To change
        your display language setting, choose Language... from the Terminal Manager
        window’s Customize menu. The Customize Language dialog box looks like this:




                                              LJ−01159A−RAGS

        To choose a new language:
        1. Click on the language in the Session Language scroll box.
        2. Click on OK to save the setting and dismiss the Customize Language dialog
           box.
        3. Display the Session menu from the Terminal Manager window’s menu bar.
        4. Click on Reboot to restart the terminal and display the new language.
        Hebrew Language for VXT DECterm Windows Only
        The Hebrew language setting only affects VXT DECterm windows. All other
        VXT windows are displayed in English. You may also wish to select the
        Hebrew keyboard type.
        Reenter Your AutoStart Settings
        If you have customized AutoStart settings, you must reenter the settings after
        you change your display language (Section 5.6).




44 Chapter 3
                                                   Customizing the Terminal
                               3.5 Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings

3.5 Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings
     You can change the shape, color, and speed of the screen pointer for the mouse
     or other input device. You can set the mouse buttons for a left-handed or
     right-handed user. You can also set the time limit for performing the second
     click in a double-click sequence. To change your mouse and pointer settings,
     choose Pointer... from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. The
     Customize Pointer dialog box looks like this:
     Customize Pointer Dialog Box (Monochrome)




                                                                  LJ−01160−RAGS




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 45
Customizing the Terminal
3.5 Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings

        Customize Pointer Dialog Box (Gray Scale or Color)




                                                                   LJ−01150−RAGS


        From the Customize Pointer dialog box, you can change any of the following
        settings:
           Pointer Acceleration
        Click on one of the four options to vary the rate at which the pointer moves in
        relation to the mouse. The None setting keeps the pointer speed constant. The
        Fast setting makes the pointer move farther as you move the mouse faster.
        The default setting is Medium.
            Button Arrangement
        The default mouse button arrangement is for a right-handed user—MB1 on the
        left of the mouse and MB3 on the right. If you are left-handed, you can click
        on the Left Handed button. This makes MB1 the right mouse button and MB3
        the left mouse button. MB2 is always the middle button.




46 Chapter 3
                                               Customizing the Terminal
                           3.5 Changing Your Pointer and Mouse Settings

  Pointer Foreground Color
The pointer consists of an outline and filled center.
On a monochrome terminal: Normally, the pointer’s filled area is black with
a white outline. To reverse the fill and outline colors, click on the White On
Black button.
On gray scale and color terminals: Normally, the pointer’s filled area
(foreground) is black. To change this setting, click on the Pointer Foreground
Color button. The terminal displays a Color Mixing dialog box (Appendix B).
To see your changes, click on Apply or OK in the dialog box.
   Pointer Background Color
This button is only on gray scale and color terminals. To change the default
color, click on the Pointer Background Color button. The terminal displays a
Color Mixing dialog box (Appendix B).
To see your changes, click on Apply or OK in the dialog box.
   Pointer Shape
To change the pointer shape, scroll through the list of shapes and choose the
one you want.
   Mouse Double Click Timeout
Some applications can tell two single clicks from a double click, based on the
speed at which buttons are clicked. To change the time allowed for making the
second click in a double-click sequence, drag the slider to the right or left, or
move the pointer to a location on the scale and click MB1.




                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 47
Customizing the Terminal
3.6 Changing Your Print Screen Settings

3.6 Changing Your Print Screen Settings
        Print screen settings affect a printer connected locally to the serial or parallel
        port on the rear of the terminal. You can control certain printing features for
        print screen operations, such as the output format and the ability to center or
        rotate the image. To view the print screen settings, choose Print Screen... from
        the Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. The Customize Print Screen
        dialog box looks like this:




                                                                 LJ−01161−RAGS


        From the Customize Print Screen dialog box, you can change the following
        settings:
          Output Format
        You can choose the output format to match your printer’s data format, sixel or
        POSTSCRIPT.




48 Chapter 3
                                                 Customizing the Terminal
                                   3.6 Changing Your Print Screen Settings

   Pixel Aspect Ratio
You can choose the pixel aspect ratio to match the dot density of the printer
you are using. A pixel aspect ratio of 1 to 1 is appropriate for most printers.
•   For level 2 printers such as the LA75 or LN03, use a pixel aspect ratio of
    1 to 1.
•   For level 1 printers such as the LA50, use a pixel aspect ratio of 2 to 1.
   Print FF Mode
The terminal can send a form feed (FF) character to the printer port at the end
of a print screen operation. If you want to send a form feed, click on the Form
Feed button.
   Ribbon or Toner Saver
Normally, you print dark images on a light background. However, a large
image may consume a great deal of printer ribbon or toner. To save ribbon or
toner, you can click on the Negative Image button; this reverses the dark and
light portions of the printed output.
  Output Color Mode
Window snapshots are usually printed or captured in black and white.
Click on the Color option if you want to print color pictures. Click on the
Grayscale option to print black and white images in various gray tones. The
Grayscale setting also makes screen colors easier to distinguish in black and
white print.
You may want to use the Dithered Color or Dithered Grayscale buttons when
you are printing continuous tone images, such as photographic images.
   Center Image
Use the Center Image button to automatically center the screen image on the
printed page.
   Rotate/Scale Picture
For wide images, you can use the Rotate/Scale button to automatically rotate
and scale images so they fit on the printed page.




                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 49
Customizing the Terminal
3.7 Changing Your Security Settings

3.7 Changing Your Security Settings
        Initially, you cannot connect to your terminal from another system (unless
        your system manager has customized your security settings). This means you
        cannot log in from another system and use your terminal until you authorize
        yourself to do so.
        You can choose which hosts and users can connect to your terminal. Only
        authorized hosts and users can make connections to the terminal to display
        applications on your screen or request data from your screen. To change your
        security settings, choose Security... from the Terminal Manager window’s
        Customize menu. The Customize Security dialog box looks like this:




                                                                         LJ−01162B−RAGS

            Connections Allowed
        Normally, only those users listed in the Authorized Users scroll box can connect
        to the terminal. To allow any user on the network to connect to the terminal,
        click on the All button.
        To prevent any X connection to your terminals, click on the Listed Users Only
        button and leave the Authorized Users scroll box empty.



50 Chapter 3
                                                Customizing the Terminal
                                      3.7 Changing Your Security Settings

Listed Users Only When you choose this setting, only the systems and users
entered in the Authorized Users scroll box can establish X connections to
your terminal. This setting requires that you authorize your own account in
addition to any others that need access to your display.
All When you choose this setting, any system on the Ethernet can establish
an X connection to your terminal. Use this setting if you are part of a small
group running interactive applications that require sharing of information in
real time.
   Authorized Users
The Authorized Users scroll box contains the names of those users you allow
to have access to your terminal. When you add a user, you associate the user
with their communication transport, address, node name, and username, if
applicable.
To add users to the Authorized Users List:
1. In the Transport box, click on the type of transport of the user (TCP/IP,
   LAT, or DECnet).
2. Enter an address or node name in the Node box, then press the Return
   key.
   •   TCP/IP example: market or 12.345.123.45
   •   LAT example: MARKET
   •   DECnet example: MARKET or 61.513
3. For LAT and DECnet, enter a username in the Username box, then press
   the Return key. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character to specify
   all users.
   •   Example: CAROLYN or *
4. Click on the      button to enter the user in the Authorized Users scroll
   box.
5. Repeat the previous steps for each user you want to add to the Authorized
   Users scroll box.
6. Click on Apply or OK to save your security settings.
To remove an authorized user:
1. In the Authorized Users scroll box, click on the username you want to
   remove.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 51
Customizing the Terminal
3.7 Changing Your Security Settings

        2. Click on the trash can button.

                                              Caution
               If you click on System Defaults, you clear the Authorized Users scroll
               box. If you belong to a work group, System Defaults recalls your work
               group settings.



3.8 Changing Your Screen Background
        You can change the look of your terminal’s screen display. For example, you
        can change the screen’s background color or select the default screen pattern.
        To change your screen settings, choose Screen Background... from the Terminal
        Manager window’s Customize menu. The Customize Screen Background dialog
        box is displayed:
        Customize Screen Background Dialog Box (Monochrome)




                                                           LJ−01163A−RAGS




52 Chapter 3
                                                Customizing the Terminal
                                    3.8 Changing Your Screen Background

Customize Screen Background Dialog Box (Gray Scale or Color)




                                                  LJ−01177−RAGS


From the Customize Screen Background dialog box, you can change the
following settings:
    Screen Saver
The Screen Saver extends the life of your monitor by shutting off the display if
the terminal is inactive for a specified time. Normally, the terminal shuts off
its display after 10 minutes of keyboard or mouse inactivity. You can use the
sliding scale to vary the time, from 1 to 60 minutes.
   Screen Background
The default screen background pattern is a tight, gray crossweave. To change
the screen background to a solid color:
On a monochrome terminal: Click on the Black or White radio button.
On gray scale and color terminals: Click on the Solid Color button. Then
click on the Screen Color button. The terminal displays a Color Mixing dialog
box (Appendix B).
To see your new setting in effect, click on Apply or OK.
To display the default pattern, click on the Default Pattern button.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 53
Customizing the Terminal
3.8 Changing Your Screen Background

        DECwindows Session Manager Sets the Screen Background
        On host systems that use DECwindows software, the session manager has a
        similar Screen Background option. If you create an X session to the system,
        the screen background setting on the host system takes effect. For a consistent
        screen background, use the same setting on the terminal and the host.

3.9 Changing Your Window Colors
        You can change the window colors of your local VXT windows. On monochrome
        terminals, you can use the default black text on a white background or change
        to white text on a black background. On gray scale and color terminals, you
        can change foreground, background, and highlight colors. You can also change
        the shadow colors that produce the three-dimensional look.
        If you have VXT Version 2.1 software, your color settings also affect local VXT
        DECterm windows.
        Your window color settings do not affect windows that you open through a
        remote session manager. For example, if you open DECterm windows through
        a remote session manager on a host system, you can set the colors for those
        windows in the remote session manager.
        To change your window color settings, choose Window Color... from the
        Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. The terminal displays the
        Customize Window Color dialog box for a monochrome or color terminal.
        Customize Window Color Dialog Box (Monochrome)




                                      LJ−01164−RAGS

        From the Customize Window Color dialog box, you can change the following
        settings on monochrome terminals:




54 Chapter 3
                                                 Customizing the Terminal
                                         3.9 Changing Your Window Colors

On Monochrome Terminals
   Window Color
The window color is normally black on white. Click on the White On Black
radio button to reverse the colors.
To see your new setting in effect, click on Apply or OK.
Customize Window Color Dialog Box (Color)




                                                 LJ−01165−RAGS


From the Customize Window Color dialog box, you can change the following
settings on gray scale or color terminals:
On Gray Scale or Color Terminals
   Top Shadow Color
Top and bottom shadow colors must be well matched to present a three-
dimensional look. Normally, the terminal automatically determines top and
bottom shadow colors when you change the window color. When you use
automatic shadowing, the Top Shadow Color and Bottom Shadow Color labels
are dimmed.
To choose your own top shadow color:
1. Click on the Manual Shadowing button to disable automatic shadowing.
2. Click on the Top Shadow Color button to display the Color Mixing dialog
   box (Appendix B).




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 55
Customizing the Terminal
3.9 Changing Your Window Colors

           Window Background Color
        The window background color is normally white. To change this setting, click
        on the Window Background Color button to display the Color Mixing dialog box
        (Appendix B).
        If you save your changes by clicking on Apply or OK in the Color Mixing dialog
        box, your new settings take effect when you start your next session.
          Bottom Shadow Color
        The Bottom Shadow button works like the Top Shadow button.
           Window Foreground Color
        The Window Foreground Color setting changes the color of text and graphics in
        the window.
        To change the window foreground color, click on the Window Foreground Color
        button to display the Color Mixing dialog box (Appendix B).
        If you save your changes by clicking on Apply or OK in the Color Mixing dialog
        box, your new settings take effect when you start your next session.
           Highlight Color
        The Highlight Color setting controls the color of screen objects with input focus
        such as text-entry boxes and check and radio buttons. The highlight color is
        normally black. To change the highlight color, click on the Highlight Color
        button to display the Color Mixing dialog box (Appendix B).
        If you save your changes by clicking on Apply or OK in the color mixer, your
        new settings take effect when you start your next session.

3.10 Changing Your Terminal Manager Settings
        The Customize Terminal Manager dialog box lets you choose various settings
        that affect the terminal manager and window management. You can
        •      Choose to use the terminal’s window manager or a window manager on a
               host system
        •      Choose the Terminal Manager window’s startup state (normal, icon, or
               hidden)
        •      Use the F3 toggle key to hide or display the Terminal Manager window
        •      Disable the confirmation box displayed when resetting the terminal
        •      Enter a tag to identify your terminal in the configuration manager
        •      Enter the text to display when you pause a session



56 Chapter 3
                                              Customizing the Terminal
                          3.10 Changing Your Terminal Manager Settings

•   Specify how frequently to update the status boxes in the Session menu
To change your Terminal Manager window settings, choose Terminal Manager...
from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. The Customize
Terminal Manager dialog box looks like this:




                             LJ−01166C−RAGS


From the Customize Terminal Manager dialog box, you can change the
following settings:
   Allow Remote Window Manager
You can choose whether or not a host-based window manager can take over
windowing operations on the screen. The terminal’s local window manager
provides you with quicker response time and overall higher performance.
However, a host-based window manager may offer more features. To let the
host control windowing operations, click on the Allow Remote Window Manager
button.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 57
Customizing the Terminal
3.10 Changing Your Terminal Manager Settings

            Confirm Reset Session
        When you choose Reset, Reboot, or Shutdown from the Session menu, the
        terminal normally asks for confirmation. You can turn this feature on or
        off by clicking on the Confirm Reset Session button. When this feature
        is off, choosing Reset, Reboot, or Shutdown from the Session menu will
        immediately end the current session, without displaying the confirmation
        box. See Section 2.3.3 for details on the Session menu.
           Confirm Close Terminal Manager
        When you choose Close from the Session menu, the terminal normally asks you
        to confirm that you want to close the Terminal Manager window. You can turn
        this confirmation feature on or off by clicking on the Confirm Close Terminal
        Manager button. When this feature is off, choosing Close from the Session
        menu immediately closes the Terminal Manager window, without displaying
        the confirmation box. Closing the Terminal Manager window also closes the
        VXT Message Box, unless you have customized the terminal to start the VXT
        Message Box as a separate application.
           Disable F3 Key (For Hiding the Terminal Manager Window)
        You can choose to use the F3 key as a toggle key for hiding and displaying the
        Terminal Manager window, VXT Message Box, and their icons. This feature
        allows you to hide these applications while you are working in other windows,
        then redisplay them when needed. Normally, the F3 key function is disabled.
        When you redisplay the Terminal Manager window and VXT Message Box, the
        message box receives input focus.
        If you have customized the AutoStart dialog box to start the Terminal Manager
        window and VXT Message Box as separate applications, then the F3 key
        cannot hide the message box. In this case, the Terminal Manager window
        receives input focus when you redisplay it.
        When you use the F3 key to hide and redisplay the Terminal Manager and
        VXT Message Box, you lose any customized window size settings for those
        applications. If you maximize the windows before hiding them, you cannot use
        the maximize button to return them to their normal size.
           Startup State
        Normally when you restart the terminal, it displays the Terminal Manager
        window and VXT Message Box. You can choose to hide the Terminal Manager
        window and VXT Message Box at startup, or to display them as icons. To
        change the current setting, click on the appropriate button.




58 Chapter 3
                                              Customizing the Terminal
                          3.10 Changing Your Terminal Manager Settings

If you have changed the Customize AutoStart dialog box settings to start the
Terminal Manager window and VXT Message Box as separate applications, the
Startup State only affects the Terminal Manager window.

                                   Caution
   Before you change the Startup State to Hidden, decide whether or
   not you need to make the Terminal Manager window viewable after
   startup. If you want the window to be viewable, make sure the F3 key
   is enabled to display the Terminal Manager window. See the Disable
   F3 Key button in this dialog box. If you forget to enable the F3 key,
   see your system manager to change the setting from the Configuration
   Manager: Resource Management dialog box.


   Terminal Tag
You can specify a name to identify your terminal in the configuration manager
(server-based systems only). To enter a name, click on the Terminal Tag box.
Your name can have up to 31 characters. After you click on Apply or OK in the
Customize Terminal Manager dialog box, your system manager can display the
new terminal tag in the Configuration Manager: Resource Management dialog
box.
Your system manager can also create a name for your terminal by using the
Optional Name field in the configuration manager’s Create Terminal dialog box.
The terminal uses the most recently entered name (Terminal Tag or Optional
Name).
   Pause Prompt
You can specify the text displayed in the pause prompt box when you pause
your terminal session. Click on the Pause Prompt box and enter a prompt of
up to 80 characters.
   Status Update Frequency (seconds)
You can specify how frequently the terminal updates the information in the
status dialog boxes displayed from the Session menu. The normal setting is 5
seconds. Click on the Status Update Frequency (seconds) slider to specify an
interval from 0 to 60 seconds.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 59
Customizing the Terminal
3.11 Changing Your Video Alignment Settings (VX227 Models)

3.11 Changing Your Video Alignment Settings (VX227
     Models)
        If you have a VXT 2000 model VX227 windowing terminal, you adjust your
        video alignment from a Customize dialog box rather than using physical
        controls on the terminal. The video alignment dialog box is only for VX227
        terminals.
        To adjust your video alignment settings, choose Video Alignment... from the
        Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. The Customize Video Alignment
        dialog box looks like this:




                                      7                9



                               8




                                                               LJ−01139−RAGS

        From the video alignment dialog box, you can change the following settings.
        Your new settings take effect when you click on OK.
           Adjust Video Centering
        You use the four Adjust Video Centering buttons to center the display on the
        screen. Each time you click on an    button, the display shifts in the arrow’s
        direction.
           Adjust Video Rotation
        You use the two Adjust Video Rotation buttons to rotate the display on the
        screen. Each time you click on one of the buttons, the display rotates in the
        arrow’s direction.




60 Chapter 3
                                                   Customizing the Terminal
                 3.12 Saving the Terminal Manager Window’s Position and Size

3.12 Saving the Terminal Manager Window’s Position and
     Size
     You can make changes to the Terminal Manager window’s position and size on
     the screen, then save the changes for use in all future sessions. You can also
     recall the factory-default position and size for the Terminal Manager window,
     or recall the last position and size you saved.
     To save or restore the Terminal Manager window’s position and size on the
     screen, use the following menu items from the Customize menu:

     Choose...                              To...
     Save Terminal Manager Window           Save the Terminal Manager window’s
                                            current position and size for use in all
                                            future sessions.
     Restore Terminal Manager Window        Restore the last position and size you
                                            saved. Choose this menu item if you want
                                            to reset features you changed temporarily,
                                            but did not save.
     Default Terminal Manager Window        Recall the factory-default position and size
                                            for the Terminal Manager window.


3.13 Customizing the VXT Message Box
     The VXT Message Box displays system status and error messages. You can
     choose the categories of messages displayed. You can also set the number
     of message lines saved in the scroll box. To change your VXT Message Box
     settings:
     1. Click on the Customize menu in the VXT Message Box.




                                                      TI−03011−RAGS

     2. Choose Message Box... to display the Customize Message dialog box.



                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 61
Customizing the Terminal
3.13 Customizing the VXT Message Box




                                                            TI−03012−RAGS

        From the Customize Message dialog box, you can change the following settings:
            Message Region
        You can scroll through text in the VXT Message Box. The Scroll Lines Saved
        slider lets you specify how many message lines to save when they are scrolled
        out of the region. Any extra lines are discarded.
        This feature does not affect the size of the Messages region. You can change
        the size of the scroll box by changing the size of the VXT Message Box window.
           Messages Displayed
        Normally, the terminal displays all informational, warning, and error messages
        in the Messages scroll box. You can choose to display warning and error
        messages only, or error messages only.
            Header Text
        Normally, the title of the Messages scroll box in the VXT Message Box is
        Messages. To change the title, click on the Header Text box and enter a new
        title.




62 Chapter 3
                                                       Customizing the Terminal
                                          3.13 Customizing the VXT Message Box

3.13.1 Saving the VXT Message Box’s Position and Size
      You can make changes to the VXT Message Box’s position and size on the
      screen, then save the changes for use in all future sessions. You can also recall
      the factory-default position and size, or recall the last position and size you
      saved.
      To save or restore the VXT Message Box’s position and size on the screen, use
      the following menu items from the Customize menu:

      Choose...                        To...
      Message Box...                   Display the Customize Message Box.
      Save Message Box Window          Save the VXT Message Box’s current position and
                                       size for use in all future sessions.
      Restore Message Box Window       Restore the last position and size you saved. Choose
                                       this menu item if you want to reset features you
                                       changed temporarily, but did not save.
      Default Message Box Window       Recall the factory-default position and size for the
                                       VXT Message Box.

      Closing the VXT Message Box:
      Normally, the VXT Message Box runs together with the Terminal Manager
      window. To close the Terminal Manager window and VXT Message Box, click
      on the Session menu in the Terminal Manager window and choose Close.
      If you customize your AutoStart settings to run the VXT Message Box as a
      separate application, the VXT Message Box has a separate File menu. In this
      case, you can close the VXT Message Box alone by clicking on the File menu
      and choosing Exit. See Section 5.6.




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 63
                                                                                 44
                             Customizing Communications


        This chapter describes how to customize communication between the terminal
        and host systems. Your terminal can use several communication protocols to
        communicate with host systems: TCP/IP, NFS, LAT, LASTport, and DECnet.
        You can also choose to use a serial or parallel port for a local printer or host
        system. After you make changes, you can save your settings for all future
        sessions.
        The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •      Changing Your Serial and Parallel Port Settings
               These settings affect your local printer or serial host.
        •      Changing Your LAT Settings
               These settings let a system manager fine-tune communication in a LAT
               network.
        •      Changing Your LASTport Group Code Settings (InfoServer Systems)
               The group code determines which InfoServer systems your terminal can
               communicate with.
        •      Changing Your TCP/IP IP Address Settings
               You must enter an IP address to communicate with systems that use the
               TCP/IP transport.
        •      Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings
               You must specify a name server if you want to identify TCP/IP systems by
               name in other dialog boxes.
        •      Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings
               You can specify routing information for communicating with TCP/IP
               systems.



64 Chapter 4
                                                         Customizing Communications


     •   Changing Your NFS Settings
         You must enter NFS Mount Points to communicate with systems that use
         the NFS transport.
     •   Changing Your DECnet Name Translator Settings
         You must specify a name translator if you want to identify DECnet systems
         by name in other dialog boxes.
     To customize communications, you use the Communications submenu on the
     Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu.

4.1 Displaying the Communications Submenu
     To display the Communications submenu, first click on the Customize
     menu in the Terminal Manager window and choose Communications. The
     Communications submenu looks like this:

                            VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                .12.123.123   12.123




                                                                       LJ−03540−RAGS


     When you choose a menu item from the Commmunications submenu, the
     terminal displays a dialog box with the feature settings for that topic. In
     dialog boxes, shaded buttons indicate the current settings. You can examine
     the settings and change them if desired.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 65
Customizing Communications
4.1 Displaying the Communications Submenu

                                              Note
               A system manager can customize settings for terminals and work
               groups. The VXT manager can also lock or unlock access to one or
               more of the Customize menu items. Locked menu items are dimmed.



4.2 Changing Your Serial and Parallel Port Settings
        You can specify the communication settings of the terminal’s serial and parallel
        ports to make them compatible with a serial host system or a local printer.
        The default settings work with most Digital systems. Make sure the settings
        you use match your host system.
        The serial port is for connecting a host system or a local serial printer. The
        parallel port is for connecting a local parallel printer. Each port has one 25-pin
        connector on the rear of the system box.
        When you connect to a host system through the serial port, you use the 25-pin,
        RS–232 serial port connector on the rear of the terminal. The serial port
        connector is above the parallel port connector.
        To change the port settings, choose the Communications submenu from the
        Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. Then choose Serial and Parallel
        Ports... to display the Customize Serial and Parallel Ports dialog box:




66 Chapter 4
                                         Customizing Communications
                      4.2 Changing Your Serial and Parallel Port Settings




                                                    LJ−01168B−RAGS

From the Customize Serial and Parallel Ports dialog box, you can change the
following settings:
   Port Usage
By default, the parallel port acts as a printer port and the serial port acts as a
host port. You can set the serial port to act as the printer port. You can choose
one of two functions for the serial port:




                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 67
Customizing Communications
4.2 Changing Your Serial and Parallel Port Settings

        Choose...                 To...
        Parallel Port: Printer,   Use the parallel port for a parallel printer, and the serial
        Serial Port: Host         port for a host system.
        Serial Port: Printer      Use the serial port for a serial printer.

           Transmit
        You can change the speed the terminal uses to send data, to match your host
        system or printer. Normally, the serial port uses a speed of 9600 baud, which
        works with most Digital systems. To choose another speed, click on the button
        in the Transmit box and make a choice from the pop-up menu. Your new speed
        appears in the Transmit box.
        The terminal does not support speeds lower than 300 baud.
           Receive
        You can change the speed the terminal uses to receive data from the host
        system or printer. Make sure you choose a receive speed that matches your
        host’s or printer’s transmit speed. Normally, the terminal’s receive speed
        matches its transmit speed (rx = tx setting). However, the terminal can
        transmit at one speed and receive at another.
        To choose another speed, click on the button in the Receive box and make a
        choice from the pop-up menu. Your new speed appears in the Receive box.
           Character Format
        You can choose the word size and number of parity bits used to communicate
        with the host system or printer. The terminal uses a default word size of 8 bits
        and no parity. This setting works with most of today’s computer systems.
        To choose another setting, click on the button in the Character Format box
        and make a choice from the pop-up menu. Your new setting appears in the
        Character Format box.
           Parity Check
        Normally, the terminal performs a parity check on bytes of data. To turn this
        feature on or off, click on the Parity Check button.
           Host Accessible Printer Port
        Normally, the terminal can accept remote printing jobs sent from host systems
        that use the TCP/IP or LAT transport. To turn this feature on or off, click on
        the Host Accessible Printer Port button. To send printing jobs from a host, see
        Section 2.8.2.




68 Chapter 4
                                              Customizing Communications
                           4.2 Changing Your Serial and Parallel Port Settings

         Stop Bits
     You can choose the number of stop bits used in the character format. Digital
     recommends using one stop bit for most applications. To select two stop bits,
     click on the Two button.
        XOFF At
     You can choose how many characters the terminal stores in its receive buffer
     before sending the host or printer an XOFF signal to stop sending data.
     Normally, the terminal sends XOFF to the host when the input buffer contains
     64 characters. To choose 128 characters or no XOFF, click on the appropriate
     button.
       Modem Control
     You can choose Modem Control if you are communicating with a host system
     and need to use extended modem features. Otherwise, use Data Leads Only.
     Data Leads Only Choose Data Leads only if you do not plan to use modem
     control features or your modem (or modem cable) is not configured for modem
     control. The terminal uses pin 2 to transmit data and pin 3 to receive data.
     The terminal asserts the data terminal ready (DTR) signal on pin 20 whenever
     the terminal is on.
     The terminal receives the data set ready (DSR) signal on pin 6. The terminal
     uses DSR to detect the status of the connected printer or host system modem
     and display status messages about the device. Note that in Data Leads Only
     mode data is always transmitted, regardless of the state of the DSR signal.
     Modem Control Choose Modem Control if you plan to use modem features
     that require additional signals beyond data leads only, such as call origination
     and dialing from the keyboard. The control lines follow the CCITT V.24 and
     V.28 and EIA RS–232–C designations and control the flow of data based on the
     state of various signals.

4.3 Changing Your LAT Settings
     OpenVMS systems typically use the local area transport (LAT) to connect to
     the terminal. The terminal connects to all LAT group codes (0 to 255); you
     cannot select group codes.
     Your system manager can fine-tune the characteristics of your LAT
     environment by adjusting the three slide bars in the Customize LAT dialog
     box.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 69
Customizing Communications
4.3 Changing Your LAT Settings

                                               Note
               These settings directly affect the performance of your local area
               network. Do not try to adjust these settings yourself; they should be
               adjusted only by system managers. Incorrect adjustments can produce
               poor network and terminal performance.


        To change LAT settings and adjust performance, choose the Communications
        submenu from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. Then choose
        LAT... to display the Customize LAT dialog box:




                                                      LJ−01169A−RAGS


        From the Customize LAT dialog box, you can change the following settings:
           LAT Circuit Timer
        You set the LAT Circuit Timer to tune the network for the best response time
        and network performance when running an X window or DECterm terminal
        window session. The optimum setting depends on the number of users on
        the local area network and the typical network traffic conditions. The normal
        setting of 30 milliseconds produces the best performance for most systems.




70 Chapter 4
                                                   Customizing Communications
                                                 4.3 Changing Your LAT Settings

     LAT circuit timer settings takes effect when the first LAT circuit is created. If
     you change the setting while LAT circuits are running, it does not take effect
     until you exit all existing LAT circuits.
         Retransmit Limit
     To make a LAT connection to a host system, the terminal sends out a request-
     to-connect message, then waits for an acknowledgement. If the host does not
     acknowledge the request, the terminal resends the message a specified number
     of times.
     The Retransmit Limit setting tells the terminal how many times to resend the
     message. If the terminal does not receive an acknowledgement after sending
     the message the specified number of times, the terminal stops requesting a
     connection and indicates it could not connect to that host.
     Normally, the terminal resends the message 40 times before it stops trying to
     connect to the host. This setting works well with most Digital systems.
        Keep Alive Timer
     When the terminal is inactive, it sends certain LAT messages out on the
     network every few seconds to keep the LAT connection alive. Normally, the
     terminal sends messages out every 40 seconds. This setting works well with
     most Digital systems.

4.4 Changing Your LASTport Group Code Settings
    (InfoServer Systems)
     Server-based terminals use an InfoServer system for downloading and booting
     VXT software, configuration management, access to the InfoReader library,
     virtual memory, and other services. To communicate with a particular
     InfoServer system, your terminal must have the same group code as the
     InfoServer. On large local area networks, group codes can help reduce
     the number of InfoServer systems that your terminal must identify and
     communicate with.
     By default, the LASTport group code on InfoServer systems and VXT 2000
     windowing terminals is set to 0. If the InfoServer system’s group code is not 0,
     you or your system manager must change the terminal’s default group code to
     match the InfoServer’s group code.
     The LASTport Group Code dialog box lets you change the terminal’s group
     code setting to match the servers that you want to access. Ask your system
     manager for your server’s group code. New group code settings take effect
     when you restart the terminal.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 71
Customizing Communications
4.4 Changing Your LASTport Group Code Settings (InfoServer Systems)

        If you cannot boot your terminal from an InfoServer system because your
        terminal has a different group code:
        1. Quickly press and release the halt button on the rear of the terminal.
               •   If your terminal has a system box, the halt button is next to the
                   indicator lights on the rear of the system box.
               •   If your terminal does not have a system box, the halt button is below
                   the keyboard connector on the rear of the monitor.
        2. At the >>> prompt, enter the command b/100000.
        3. At the LASTport group code (0-1023)> prompt, enter the group code of the
           server you want to connect to. See your system manager for the correct
           group code.
        4. After the Terminal Manager window appears, enter the group code in the
           Customize LASTport dialog box.
        To enter or change LASTport group code address settings, choose the
        Communications submenu from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize
        menu. Then choose LASTport... to display the Customize LASTport dialog box:




                                                   LJ−01117−RAGS

        To enter a LASTport group code:
        1. Enter the LASTport group code (from 0 to 1023) in the text-entry box.
               Examples: 34 or 567.
        2. Press Return or click on OK or Apply.
        3. Restart the terminal.




72 Chapter 4
                                              Customizing Communications
                               4.5 Changing Your TCP/IP IP Address Settings

4.5 Changing Your TCP/IP IP Address Settings
     UNIX, ULTRIX, and DEC OSF/1 AXP systems typically use the TCP/IP
     transport to connect to the terminal. To communicate with systems using
     TCP/IP, you must enter an IP address and subnet mask for the terminal. You
     use the Customize TCP/IP dialog box to enable or disable TCP/IP and enter
     the terminal’s IP address and subnet mask. After you enter and save the IP
     address, it appears at the bottom of the Terminal Manager window.
     To enter or change TCP/IP address settings, choose the Communications
     submenu from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. Then choose
     TCP/IP... to display the Customize TCP/IP dialog box:




                                            LJ−01170C−RAGS

     From the Customize TCP/IP dialog box, you can change the following settings:
        TCPIP
     You can choose to enter an IP address yourself or to have the terminal
     automatically determine its address from a file set up by your system manager.
     Normally, the User Specified IP Address button is on. You can disable the use
     of TCP/IP by clicking on the Disable button.



                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 73
Customizing Communications
4.5 Changing Your TCP/IP IP Address Settings

        Determine IP Address Use this setting if you want the terminal to
        automatically determine its IP address, subnet mask, and the IP address
        of an optional name server by reading a host system file created by your
        system manager.
        After you reboot the terminal, the terminal’s IP address appears in the
        Terminal Manager window.

                                              Note
               Your system manager must enter your terminal’s information in the
               BOOTP daemon’s configuration file.


        User Specified IP Address Use this setting if you want to enter your
        terminal’s IP address in this dialog box. After you enter the address and reboot
        the terminal, the terminal’s IP address appears in the Terminal Manager
        window.
        Disable Use this setting to disable TCP/IP.
           Terminal’s IP Address
        After you click on the User Specified Address button, you can enter an IP
        address for your terminal. See your system manager for an address to use.
        After you enter the IP address and subnet mask, click on OK to save the
        address and dismiss the dialog box. Then reboot the terminal.
           IP Subnet Mask
        After you click on the User Specified Address button, you can enter the IP
        subnet mask for your terminal. An IP subnet mask acts as a filter for your
        TCP/IP network. Using the subnet mask makes the terminal ignore certain
        traffic on the network.
        See your system manager for a subnet mask to use. After you enter the IP
        subnet mask, click on the OK button to save the setting and dismiss the dialog
        box. Then reboot the terminal.

4.6 Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings
        If your network has a name server, you can specify host systems by their
        names instead of addresses when making entries in the Create and Customize
        AutoStart dialog boxes. A name server stores host names and addresses, so it
        can determine a host’s address from the name you enter.
        You can specify a primary and secondary name server. See your system
        manager for your name server’s IP address.


74 Chapter 4
                                         Customizing Communications
                         4.6 Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings

To enter your name server, choose the Communications submenu from the
Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. Then choose TCP/IP Name
Server... to display the Customize TCP/IP Name Server dialog box:




                                          LJ−01171B−RAGS

From the Customize TCP/IP Name Server dialog box, you can change the
following settings:
   Primary Name Server IP Address
The terminal first attempts to use the primary name server to resolve names
entered into fields requiring a host name or IP address. If the terminal cannot
find the primary name server specified, you need to enter your terminal’s
domain name.
To enter or change the primary name server, click on the Primary Name Server
IP Address box and enter the primary name server’s IP address.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 75
Customizing Communications
4.6 Changing Your TCP/IP Name Server Settings

            Secondary Name Server IP Address
        If the terminal cannot resolve a host name or IP address with the primary
        name server, the terminal queries the secondary name server.
        If the Automatic button for Determine Domain Name is selected and the
        primary name server is unavailable, the terminal uses the secondary name
        server to provide translations from names to IP addresses for connections.
        However, the secondary name server does not return the terminal’s domain
        name, because it customarily resides within a second domain.
        To enter or change the secondary name server, click on the Secondary Name
        Server IP Address box and enter the secondary name server’s IP address.
           Determine Domain Name
        The terminal displays its domain name in the Domain Name box if the primary
        name server finds it available on the network. The terminal attempts to
        resolve a domain name only if a primary name server is specified.
        To enter a domain name:
        1. Click on the User Specified button in the Determine Domain Name box.
        2. Enter a domain name in the Domain Name box.
        3. Click on Apply or OK.
        If you choose the System Defaults button or clear the name server fields and
        choose OK or Apply, the terminal’s Name Server capability is turned off and
        the terminal no longer has a domain name. The Domain Name field is not
        cleared, even though there is no domain name.
        When you reboot the terminal, the domain name is determined and maintained
        in the name server. If you change your primary name server, the domain of the
        terminal does not change unless you change the domain name for the subnet
        and reboot the terminal.
        If the primary name server is on a different subnet than the terminal, the
        domain name may not be available when you reboot the terminal. In this case,
        the domain name is resolved the next time it is needed.

4.7 Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings
        You can enter TCP/IP routes from your network to hosts on other networks.
        You can also enable or disable dynamic routing to automatically update the
        network routing table. After you save your settings, you can view these and
        other TCP/IP routes in the TCP/IP Routes dialog box (Section 6.3).




76 Chapter 4
                                         Customizing Communications
                       4.7 Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings

To enter your routes, choose the Communications submenu from the Terminal
Manager window’s Customize menu. Then choose TCP/IP Routing Tables... to
display the TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog box:




                                           LJ−01172A−RAGS

From the Customize TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog box, you can change the
following settings:
   Dynamic Routing button
The Dynamic Routing button lets you enable or disable the VXT software’s
routing daemon. This daemon listens for routing information protocol (RIP)
packets and uses the packets to automatically enter, update, or delete TCP/IP
routes in the TCP/IP Routes dialog box (Section 6.3).




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 77
Customizing Communications
4.7 Changing Your TCP/IP Routing Table Settings

          User Defined Routes scroll box
        The User Defined Routes scroll box lists the route destination for each entry.
        The gateway for each entry is stored, but not displayed.
        To add a route to the User Defined Routes scroll box:
        1. Specify whether the route applies to either a host or a network, by clicking
           on the Host, Network, or Default button. If you click on the Default button,
           the terminal tries to determine if the route is for a host or a network.
        2. Click on the Destination box and enter the route’s destination.
        3. Click on the Gateway box and enter the route’s gateway.
        4. Click on the     button to add your route to the Routes scroll box.
        To remove a route:
        1. In the Routes scroll box, click on the route you want to remove.
        2. Click on the trash can button.
           Metric button
        RIP packets contain a metric that helps to determine which gateway to use.
        Metric values range from 1 to 15, with smaller metrics indicating preferred
        paths. A 0 metric affects only the system routing table and tells the system the
        route is locally reachable.

4.8 Changing Your NFS Settings
        You can use the NFS transport to load fonts or read your customized terminal
        resource files from host systems that use an NFS server.
        The NFS transport uses mount points to identify locations where files can
        be accessed. You can define up to 10 mount points in the Customize NFS
        dialog box. You use these mount points when making entries in the Customize
        Font Path dialog box (Section 5.3) or Customize Resource Files dialog box
        (Section 5.9).
        To enter your mount points, choose the Communications submenu from the
        Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. Then choose NFS... to display
        the Customize NFS dialog box:




78 Chapter 4
                                             Customizing Communications
                                           4.8 Changing Your NFS Settings




                                                          LJ−03534−RAGS

From the Customize NFS dialog box, you can change the following settings:
   NFS Mount Points
The NFS Mount Points scroll box lists the currently entered mount points.
Each entry lists the full mount point name on the host and an equivalent name
that you define for local use on the terminal.
   Host:RemoteName LocalName
You use the Host:RemoteName LocalName box to add a new mount point in
the scroll box.
To add a mount point to the NFS Mount Points scroll box:
1. Click on the Host:RemoteName LocalName box. Enter the mount point in
   the following format:
   Host:RemoteName LocalName
   •   Host is the name or IP address of the host with the NFS server.
   •   RemoteName is the directory path for the NFS server to export.



                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 79
Customizing Communications
4.8 Changing Your NFS Settings

               •   LocalName is a local name you want to use for this mount point. You
                   use the local name when making entries in the Customize Font Path or
                   Customize Resource Files dialog box.
               Examples

               Host:RemoteName                                  LocalName
               16.122.128.224:/usr/lib/X11/fonts/decwin/75dpi   nfs_fonts
               mynode:/usr/users/resource                       resource

               To load fonts from the first sample mount point, you would use the local
               name nfs_fonts when entering the font path in the Customize Font Paths
               dialog box.
               To load a terminal resource file from the second sample mount point, you
               would use the local name resource when entering the path to the file in
               the Customize Resource Files dialog box.
        2. Click on the          button to add your mount point to the NFS Mount Points
           scroll box.
        To apply your mount points:
        Click on OK or Apply. The terminal saves the listed mount points and tries to
        mount any remote file systems you added.
        To remove a mount point:
        1. In the NFS Mount Points scroll box, click on the mount point you want to
           remove.
        2. Click on the trash can button.
        Notes on Using NFS
        For more information about using NFS, refer to your host system’s NFS
        documentation.
        •      If an error occurs when mounting or accessing file systems, the VXT
               Message Box displays an NFS error code. See Section A.1.1 for a list of
               error codes.
        •      Some NFS mount daemons require name service to honor mount requests
               that use an address instead of a name.
        •      Files on the NFS server must be world-readable. The terminal implements
               NFS for clients only, so the NFS server must provide open file access.




80 Chapter 4
                                                  Customizing Communications
                                                4.8 Changing Your NFS Settings

     •   The NFS server must export remote file systems before the terminal can
         mount them. The exported file system should include the areas holding the
         desired fonts or terminal resource files.

4.9 Changing Your DECnet Address Settings
     To communicate with other DECnet nodes, your terminal must have a unique
     DECnet address. From the Customize DECnet dialog box, you can enable
     or disable the use of the DECnet transport and enter the terminal’s DECnet
     address.
     See your system manager for your terminal’s DECnet address. The new setting
     takes effect when you reboot the terminal.
     To enter or change your terminal’s DECnet address settings, choose the
     Communications submenu from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize
     menu. Then choose DECnet... to display the Customize DECnet dialog box:




                                             LJ−01118−RAGS

     From the Customize DECnet dialog box, you can change the following settings:
        DECnet
     Before you can enter an address, you must click on the User Specified DECnet
     Address button. You can disable the use of the DECnet transport by clicking
     on the Disable button.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 81
Customizing Communications
4.9 Changing Your DECnet Address Settings

           Terminal’s DECnet Address
        After you click on the User Specified DECnet address button, you can enter
        your terminal’s DECnet address in the Terminal’s DECnet Address box. Click
        on OK to save the address and dismiss the dialog box.
        You can enter your DECnet address in the long or short form:
        •      The long form uses a period to separate the area number and node number.
               Example: 61.513.
        •      The short form collapses the area number and node number into a single
               decimal value, using the formula (area_number 1024) + node_number.
                                                            




               Example: (61      1024) + 513) = 62977.
           Network Buffer Size
        The system manager chooses a DECnet network buffer size to optimize the
        traffic flow on a wide area network, minimizing retransmission costs while
        maximizing throughput. The default network buffer size 576 bytes.
        You enter your network buffer size in the Network Buffer Size box. See your
        VXT manager for the correct size. The buffer size value must be consistent
        throughout your network. Click on OK to save the size and dismiss the dialog
        box.

4.10 Changing Your DECnet Name Translator Settings
        You can use DECnet node names instead of DECnet addresses to specify host
        systems in the Create and Customize AutoStart dialog boxes.
        The terminal can check the DECnet node names you use without maintaining
        a local node name database. To do this, the terminal uses the DECnet Network
        Management Listener (NML) object (object 19) on a host system as its name
        translator. You specify the host system in the Customize DECnet Name
        Translator dialog box.
        When resolving a DECnet address, the terminal connects to the NML object
        and issues a Network Information and Control Exchange (NICE) protocol
        message. This message conveys the NCP command SHOW NODE nodename
        to the host. The host responds with the DECnet address associated with the
        supplied node name.
        Your terminal first attempts to connect to the primary name translator. If
        the primary name translator is unavailable, the terminal attempts to use the
        secondary name translator.
        See your system manager for the addresses of primary and secondary DECnet
        name translator nodes. Settings take effect immediately.


82 Chapter 4
                                       Customizing Communications
                  4.10 Changing Your DECnet Name Translator Settings

To enter or change DECnet name translator addresses, choose the
Communications submenu from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize
menu. Then choose DECnet Name Translator... to display the Customize
DECnet Name Translator dialog box:




                                       LJ−01119−RAGS

From the Customize DECnet Name Translator dialog box, you can change the
following settings:
   Primary Name Translator’s DECnet Address
Use this box to enter the address of the host that serves as the primary name
translator for DECnet addresses. Click on OK to save the address and dismiss
the dialog box. You can enter your DECnet address in the long or short form
(Section 4.9).
   Secondary Name Translator’s DECnet Address
Use this box to enter the address of a secondary host for DECnet name
translation, if you have one. Click on OK to save the address and dismiss
the dialog box.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 83
                                                                              5
                                                                                  5
     Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings


        This chapter describes how you can customize more advanced system settings
        to autostart sessions and applications, change font paths, boot VXT software,
        and load or unload VXT software features. To customize these settings, you
        use the bottom half of the Customize menu in the Terminal Manager window.
        Initially, the terminal uses factory-default settings that work with many
        host systems. You can make changes to suit your personal preference and
        computing environment. After you make changes, you can save your settings
        for all future sessions.
        The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •      Changing Your Font Path Settings
        •      Changing Your X Server Settings
        •      Specifying Your AutoStart Settings
        •      Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software
        •      Changing Your Software Options Settings




84 Chapter 5
                                         Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                             5.1 Displaying the Customize Menu

5.1 Displaying the Customize Menu
     To display the Customize menu, click on Customize in the Terminal Manager
     window’s menu bar. This chapter describes the menu items highlighted in
     gray:

                            VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                              LJ−03541−RAGS



                                             Note
        A VXT manager can customize settings for terminals and work groups.
        The VXT manager can also lock or unlock access to one or more of the
        Customize menu items. Locked menu items are dimmed.



5.2 Changing Your Configuration Manager Settings
     The configuration manager lets you centrally manage and customize the
     VXT 2000 windowing terminals on your local network from a single terminal.
     You also have the alternative of creating your own terminal resource files
     and storing them on a host system. Typically, these are system management
     functions. The VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management
     guide describes the configuration manager, host-based resource files, and how
     to use them.


                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 85
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.2 Changing Your Configuration Manager Settings

        From the configuration manager, a system manager can access the Customize
        dialog boxes for each terminal and lock or unlock customized settings. If you
        customize settings at your terminal, they override terminal or work group
        settings entered in the configuration manager.
        For host-based terminals, the system manager can customize individual
        terminals in the configuration manager. The customized settings are written
        directly to your terminal. The settings take effect the next time you reboot
        your terminal.
        For server-based terminals, the system manager can customize individual
        terminals or set up terminal work groups to share the same settings. Your
        terminal stores its customized settings on an InfoServer system rather than in
        the terminal. The system manager can also set up font sets on an InfoServer
        system for work groups to share.
        To display the Configuration submenu, choose Configuration... from the
        Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu.

5.3 Changing Your Font Path Settings
        VXT software provides 23 local fonts for use with the terminal. If you have
        a server-based terminal, the VXT software on an InfoServer system provides
        1166 fonts. You can also access fonts on host systems or font servers in your
        network. To access fonts from network devices, you enter a font path in the
        Customize Font Path dialog box.
        A font is a set of character images in a particular typeface and style. The
        font defines how characters look. The terminal displays characters as they are
        defined in the selected font. A font path points to the network location of a
        set of fonts residing on a host or server.
        Font Formats and Communication Protocols
        The terminal supports the industry-standard X11R5 server for accessing fonts.
        You can access fonts from multiple sources, in any supported format, using
        different communication methods. For each font source you want to use, you
        enter a font path element in the Customize Font Path dialog box. The terminal
        can use any fonts in the active font path, plus the 23 local fonts.




86 Chapter 5
                                  Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                    5.3 Changing Your Font Path Settings

The terminal can access fonts from the following systems:

System                          Communication Method
X11R5 font server               TCP/IP
InfoServer system               LASTport
UNIX host                       NFS or TFTP
OpenVMS host                    LAT

Fonts can be in any of the following formats:
•   Portable compiled format (PCF) (compressed and uncompressed)
•   Server natural format (SNF) (Version 1 and Version 4)
•   Bitmap distribution format (BDF)
•   Speedo outline format
•   PostScript Type 1 format (ASCII or binary form)
VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management also provides
information on converting fonts for use on your terminal.
Activating the Font Path
The terminal tries to set a font path when you
•   Turn on the terminal
•   Reset or Reboot the terminal from the Session menu
•   Click on OK, Apply, or System Defaults in the Customize Font Path dialog
    box
You can make changes to the font path while you are using the terminal.
After you apply your changes in the Customize Font Path dialog box, any
applications you start use the fonts from the new font path. Applications that
were already running continue to use the same fonts; one exception is VXT
DECterm windows, which use the new fonts. See Section 8.3.1 for information
on using fonts in VXT DECterm windows.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 87
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.3 Changing Your Font Path Settings

        Customize Font Path Dialog Box
        To customize the font path, choose Font Path... from the Terminal Manager
        window’s Customize menu. The Customize Font Path dialog box looks like this:




                                                                            LJ−01175B−RAGS



5.3.1 Entering a Font Path
        The Active Font Path Elements scroll box lists the font paths the terminal uses
        to find fonts. The font server searches for font paths in the order listed in the
        scroll box.
        To enter a font path into the Active Font Path Elements scroll box:
        1. In the Font Source box, choose the type of device supplying your fonts:
           InfoServer, host, or font server.




88 Chapter 5
                                    Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                      5.3 Changing Your Font Path Settings

2. In the Transport box, choose the protocol used to communicate with the
   font source. The choices available depend on the font source you chose.
   The titles of the two text-entry boxes also depend on the type of font source
   you chose.

   Font Source    Transport      Server/Host/Mountpoint    Font Sets/Path/Catalogs
   InfoServer     LASTport       Server                   Font Sets
   Host           NFS            Mount Point              Path
   Host           TFTP           Host                     Path
   Host           LAT            Host                     Path
   Font Server    TCP/IP         Host                     Catalogs

3. In the Server/Mount Point/Host box, enter the host name or address of
   the font source (font server, InfoServer system, host, or NFS mount point)
   where the fonts reside.
4. In the Font Sets/Path/Catalogs box, enter the path to the directory where
   the fonts reside.
5. Click on the     button to add the font path to the Active Font Path
   Elements scroll box.
6. Click on Apply or OK. The terminal tries to set a new font path to each
   element listed in the scroll box.
To remove a font path:
1. In the Font Paths scroll box, click on the font path element you want to
   remove.
2. Click on the trash can button.
The following sections provide more detailed examples for each type of font
source and transport.
InfoServer Font Path
To enter a font path to fonts on an InfoServer system:
1. Click on the InfoServer button in the Font Source box. The LASTport
   transport is automatically selected.
2. In the Server box, click on Any if you want to use any InfoServer on your
   network.
   Click on Other if you want to specify a particular InfoServer. Enter the
   name of the InfoServer in the Server box.



                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 89
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.3 Changing Your Font Path Settings

        3. In the Font Sets box, click on Default if you want to use the default font
           set on the InfoServer.
               Click on Other if you want to specify a particular font set. Enter the font
               set name in the Font Sets box.
        4. Click on the         button to add your font path to the scroll box.
               Examples
//lastport                            Solicits any InfoServer and its default font set.
//lastport/InfoServer_1               Solicits for InfoServer_1 and its default font set.
//lastport//v2_1                      Solicits for any InfoServer with font set V2_1.
//lastport/InfoServer_1/V2_1          Solicits for InfoServer_1 and font set V2_1.

        Host System Font Path (NFS)
        To set an NFS font path, you must first enter the NFS mount point in the
        Customize NFS dialog box (Section 4.8).
        To enter a font path to a host system using NFS:
        1. In the Font Source box, click on the Host button. The NFS transport is
           automatically selected.
        2. In the Host box, enter the local name of the NFS mount point. You define
           the local name in the Customize NFS dialog box.
               Example: fonts
        3. In the Path box, click on Default if you want to use the default path.
               Click on Other if you want to specify a particular font path. Enter the path
               in the Path box.
               Example: /vxt/fonts/vxt-decwin/100dpi
        4. Click on the         button to add your path to the scroll box.
               Example: //nfs/fonts/vxt/fonts/vxt-decwin/100dpi
        Host System Font Path (TFTP)
        To enter a font path to a host system using TFTP:
        1. In the Font Source box, click on the Host button.
        2. In the Transport box, click on the TFTP button.
        3. In the Host box, enter the name or IP address of the host where the fonts
           reside.
               Example: market or 12.345.678.901
        4. In the Path Box, enter the path to the fonts.


90 Chapter 5
                                           Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                             5.3 Changing Your Font Path Settings

             Example: /usr/lib/fonts/100dpi
       5. Click on the       button to add your font path to the scroll box.
             Example
             //tftp/12.123.123.122/usr/lib/fonts/100dpi
       Host System Font Path (LAT)
       To enter a font path to a host system using the LAT transport:
       1. In the Font Source box, click on the Host button.
       2. In the Transport box, click on the LAT button.
       3. In the Host box, enter the name of the host where the fonts reside.
             Example: MARKET
       4. In the Path Box, click on Default if you want to use the default font
          directory search list on the host.
             Click on Other if you want to specify a particular font path. Enter the path
             into the Path text entry box.
             Example: fonts$disk:[user_fonts.100dpi]
       5. Click on the       button to add your font path to the scroll box.
             Examples
lat/market                                        Specifies the default font directory search list
                                                  on host MARKET.
lat/market/fonts$disk:[user_fonts.100dpi]         Specifies a particular font path on host
                                                  MARKET.

       Font Server Font Path (TCP/IP)
       To enter a font path to a font server using TCP/IP:
       1. In the Font Source box, click on the Font Server button. The TCP/IP
          transport is automatically selected.
       2. In the Host box, enter the name or IP address of the host where the fonts
          reside.
             Example: expo
       3. If you want to specify a particular port, click on the Port box and enter a
          port address. The default port address is 7000.
       4. In the Catalogs box, click on Default if you want to use the default font
          catalog on the font server.




                                VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 91
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.3 Changing Your Font Path Settings

               Click on Other if you want to specify a catalog. Enter the catalog name in
               the Catalogs box.
               Example: available
        5. Click on the        button to add your font path to the scroll box.
               Examples
               tcp/expo:7000/available
               tcp/18.30.0.212:7890
        Font Path Errors
        If a font source is unavailable: The VXT Message Box displays a message
        indicating the terminal could not set a font path to that source.
        Backup font services: If a font source fails while in use, the terminal can
        automatically access the same font from a second source if available. The
        second source must be listed somewhere after the first source in the Active
        Font Path Elements scroll box. If the terminal does not find the font on
        another font source, the terminal sends an error to the client that was using
        the font.
        If no fonts are found in a valid LAT font path: The VXT Message box
        displays a message indicating that the set font path action succeeded and the
        number of fonts which are available.
        Tips on Setting Font Paths
        •      If host applications need fonts, use the fonts from the host supplying the
               application.
        •      Include backup font sources in your font path. If the primary font source is
               unavailable, the terminal can find the same fonts on the backup source.
        •      Use an InfoServer system to supply fonts, if available. If your network has
               multiple InfoServers, the terminal provides automiatic font failover service
               to backup InfoServers. You can also use the Font Management dialog
               box to create and manage font sets on an InfoServer; you can copy fonts
               from host systems. VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System
               Management describes how to use the Font Management dialog box.
        •      To reduce the time for setting the font path, make sure your font path
               includes only fonts required for your applications.




92 Chapter 5
                                        Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                           5.4 Changing Your X Server Settings

5.4 Changing Your X Server Settings
     The Customize X Server dialog box lets you
     •   Choose whether or not to reset the X server or reboot the terminal’s
         software when you end an X session.
     •   Scale display fonts to emulate a 75/dots inch display on a 100 dots/inch
         monitor, or a 100 dots/inch display on a 75 dots/inch monitor
     •   Set an 8-plane terminal to use color or gray scale settings.
     When you end an X session on an OpenVMS system, resetting the server will
     end all open sessions on the terminal. If you do not reset the server, you can
     end an X session without affecting other open sessions.
     To change your X server settings, choose X Server... from the Terminal
     Manager window’s Customize menu. The Customize X Server dialog box looks
     like this:




                                                   LJ−01174B−RAGS

        Backing Store
     The backing store function improves the time needed to restore a window from
     an icon, by having the terminal perform the restore instead of the remote




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 93
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.4 Changing Your X Server Settings

        application. The Graphics Option dialog box in VXT DECterm windows also
        has a Backing Store button (Section 8.8).
        The Disabled setting causes the terminal to ignore application requests for
        backing store, and not to save the contents of an obscured window. The
        terminal informs the client when its window is uncovered, and should be
        redrawn. Use this setting to conserve the terminal’s memory.
        The When Requested setting causes the terminal to save the contents of an
        obscured window, or a portion of that window, when requested by the client.
        If you select When Requested, the terminal can display an iconified or covered
        window without waiting for the client to redraw it.
           Display Scaling
        The display scaling option lets you adjust the font size displayed on your
        terminal to resemble a 75 dots/inch or 100 dots/inch display. Use the 75%
        button if you have a 100 dots/inch monitor and want your display to look like
        a 75 dots/inch monitor. Use the 133% button to make a 75 dots/inch monitor
        display look like a 100 dots/inch monitor display. Your new setting takes effect
        when you restart the terminal.
            X Session Reset Server Action
        Normally, the terminal restarts the X server when you quit from an X session.
        If you end an X session on an OpenVMS system, restarting the X server causes
        the terminal to end all open sessions.
        If you click on the Ignore Reset Server button, you can end an OpenVMS X
        session without ending other open sessions.
        If you click on the Reboot Terminal button, the terminal reloads the VXT
        software when you end an X session.
        Your new setting takes effect when you click on Apply or OK.
           Monitor
        You can choose a gray scale or color setting for an 8-plane terminal. These
        buttons are dimmed on monochrome terminals. Your new setting takes effect
        when you restart the terminal.

5.5 Changing Your Startup Settings
        You can customize the terminal to automatically start up the applications you
        frequently use. You can also customize the terminal to load a particular VXT
        system image or turn off individual VXT software options.




94 Chapter 5
                                        Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                            5.5 Changing Your Startup Settings

      To customize startup settings, you use the Startup submenu on the Terminal
      Manager window’s Customize menu. The following sections describe the
      functions you can perform from the Startup submenu:
      •   Specifying Your AutoStart Settings
          The AutoStart dialog box lets you enter a list of host sessions and VXT
          applications to automatically start each time you turn on, autostart, or
          reboot the terminal.
      •   Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software
          The Customize Boot dialog box lets you customize the VXT software
          loading process to match your system environment.
      •   Changing Your Software Options Settings
          The Customize Software Options dialog box lets you turn VXT software
          options options on or off. Host-based terminals can use this feature to
          improve memory use.

5.6 Specifying Your AutoStart Settings
      The AutoStart dialog box lets you enter a list of host sessions and VXT
      applications to automatically start each time you
      •   Turn on the terminal
      •   Choose the AutoStart menu item from the Session menu
      •   Choose the Reset, Reboot, or Shutdown menu item from the Session menu
      By default, the terminal autostarts the Terminal Manager window, VXT
      Message Box, and local Motif window manager.
      The format of the AutoStart dialog box is the same as the Create dialog box.
      To display the AutoStart dialog box, choose AutoStart... from the Terminal
      Manager window’s Customize menu. The Customize AutoStart dialog box looks
      like this:




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 95
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.6 Specifying Your AutoStart Settings




                                                                      LJ−01167D−RAGS


           AutoStart List
        The terminal starts applications in the order you list them in the AutoStart
        List. The default entries in the Customize AutoStart dialog box are
        •      Terminal Manager window and VXT Message Box
        •      Motif Window Manager
        By default, the terminal starts the Terminal Manager window and VXT
        Message Box as a single application. You can choose to start them as separate
        applications.
        To add a session or application to the AutoStart list:




96 Chapter 5
                                   Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                    5.6 Specifying Your AutoStart Settings

Use the following steps. The AutoStart dialog box controls operate the same as
the Create dialog box controls. See Section 2.2 for syntax rules and details on
buttons.
1. In the Application box, click on the type of session (X Session, DECterm,
   3270) or VXT application you want to autostart. For VXT applications, skip
   steps 2 and 3.
2. In the Transport box, click on the communication method to use for the
   session. If you choose Serial, skip step 3.
3. In the Host Name or Address box, enter the name or address of the host
   system. If you make a typing mistake, you can use the Clear button to
   clear the box.
   For IP sessions:
   •   Use the Any Host button if you want to use the first available IP host.
   •   Use the Any Host Indirect button to specify a host that will act as a
       pathway to find the first available IP host.
   •   Use the Comment box to enter optional text comments. For example,
       if you entered a host name, you may want to enter the IP address as a
       comment.
   •   Use the List Known Hosts... button to display a dialog box that lets
       you list available IP hosts.
4. Click on     to add your entry to the AutoStart List.
   To delete entries, select the entry in the list and click on the trash can
   button.
   To move entries, select the entry in the list and click on the   or      button.
5. Click on the OK button to save your settings.
The AutoStart dialog box saves your settings when you click on the OK button.
The Create dialog box contains a Save button for saving settings.
Reenter AutoStart Settings After Changing the Display Language
If you change your display language, you must reenter your AutoStart settings.
User Tip: Remove Unused Applications to Start the Terminal Faster
Normally, the terminal autostarts the local Motif window manager and the
combined Terminal Manager window + VXT Message Box applications. If you
no longer need to use an application, you should remove it from your AutoStart
list. The fewer applications listed in the AutoStart List, the faster the terminal
can start up and connect to your host sessions.



                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 97
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.6 Specifying Your AutoStart Settings

        If you use the remote window manager on a host system, you may want to
        remove the local Motif window manager application from the AutoStart list.
        You can enable the use of remote window managers in the Customize Terminal
        manager dialog box (Section 3.10).
        If you remove the combined Terminal Manager window + VXT Message Box
        applications, you can restart them from the VXT Create pop-up menu. To
        display the pop-up menu, click MB2 anywhere on the screen workspace.

                                              Caution
               If you remove the combined Terminal Manager window + VXT Message
               Box applications from the Preferred Services list in the Create dialog
               box, they will not appear on the VXT Create pop-up menu the next
               time you reset the terminal.



5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software
        The Customize Boot dialog box lets you specify a VXT software image and how
        to load it. You can specify
        •      VXT software or VXT EX software
        •      Host-based or server-based mode of operation
        You can also turn the following options on or off:
        •      X image extension, for working with XIE software to display graphics
        •      MOP trigger feature, for booting the terminal from a remote system
        Your new Customize Boot settings take effect when you reboot the terminal.
        When a loading process succeeds, the terminal saves the successful method in
        local memory. The next time you reboot the terminal, it attempts to use the
        same method. When you save your settings in the Customize Boot dialog box,
        they override any previously saved settings.
        Your booting options depend on what type of systems in your network have
        VXT software and how your system manager has configured them to work with
        VXT 2000 windowing terminals. For example, your system manager can enter
        boot settings for your terminal in a file stored on a host system.




98 Chapter 5
                                      Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                             5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

      You can also enter boot commands at the terminal’s >>> prompt. See
      Section 5.7.5.

                                          Caution
          Before you change settings in the Customize Boot box, you should
          understand how and when the terminal loads its software.



5.7.1 Overview
      How Does the Terminal Load VXT Software?
      Your terminal operates in a computer network. The terminal loads its VXT
      software from a host computer system or InfoServer system in the network.
      To begin the loading process, the terminal sends out a sequence of requests on
      the network for the first available host system or InfoServer system that has
      VXT software or the VXT loader file. The VXT loader file is for server-based
      operation only.
      The terminal sends each request by using a communication transport. The
      terminal can communicate with systems that use the maintenance operations
      protocol (MOP) or the Internet protocol (IP) transport.
      By default, the terminal loads its software from one of these systems:
      •   A host system that your system manager has preconfigured
          VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management provides
          instructions to configure systems.
      •   An InfoServer system
          If your network has an InfoServer system with VXT software, you can use
          your terminal without a system manager having to configure a host system.
      When Does the Terminal Load VXT Software?
      Booting is the process of loading a system’s software and bringing it to an
      operable state. The terminal tries to boot after you
      •   Turn on the terminal and the terminal’s self-test succeeds
      •   Restart the terminal by choosing the Reboot or Shutdown menu item from
          the Session menu
      •   Press one of these key sequences to reboot the terminal:
          ANSI (LK401) keyboard                     Ctrl +left Alt +keypad .




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 99
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

            PC (LK443/LK444) keyboard                     Ctrl + Alt +keypad .
            Short ANSI (LK421) keyboard                   Ctrl     Alt Function    Extend   .

5.7.2 Using Host-Based Operation
        The terminal can load a VXT or VXT EX software image directly from a host
        system, using the MOP or IP protocol. You can also load a VXT or VXT EX
        software image in host-based mode from an InfoServer system; however, the
        terminal does not make use of the InfoServer’s memory services in host-based
        mode.
        When you load a VXT or VXT EX software image in host-based mode, the
        terminal stores all of your customizations in its nonvolatile memory. For
        host-based operation, the terminal needs at least 10 megabytes of memory
        installed.

                Host System                                           InfoServer

                VXT or VXT EX                                        VXT or VXT EX
                Software Image                                       Software Image




                VXT                  VXT              VXT                         VXT

          Customizations         Customizations   Customizations          Customizations
          10 MB                  10 MB            10 MB                    10 MB


                                                                            LJ−03032−RAGS

        Setting Up a Host System
        Your system manager can preconfigure a host system that uses MOP or IP
        to load a host-based VXT software image into your terminal. VXT Software
        Version 2.1 Installation and System Management describes how to preconfigure
        systems.
        If you use IP The system manager must preconfigure the host system.
        VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management describes how
        to add a line item to the /etc/bootptab file listing each terminal’s Ethernet
        address, IP address, and the VXT software image file or VXT loader file (for
        server-based operation).
        If you use MOP The system manager can preconfigure the host system or
        InfoServer system, or you can enter the name of a VXT software image file in
        the Customize Boot dialog box.


100 Chapter 5
                                   Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                          5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

Specifying a Host-Based Image in the Customize Boot Dialog Box
If your system manager has not preconfigured a host system or InfoServer
system to load your terminal, you can specify a host-based VXT or VXT EX
software image in the Customize Boot dialog box. Your system must support
the MOP transport. To specify a host-based image:
1. Display the Customize Boot dialog box (Section 5.7.4).
2. In the Primary Boot box, click on the MOP button.
3. In the MOP Boot File box, click on the Other button. Enter the name of
   the VXT or VXT EX software image file.

   Enter...                 To load this image...
   VXT Version 2.1 software provides two VXT software image files:
    VXT                     VXT software image
    VXTEX                   VXT EX software image
   VXT Version 2.0 software included version numbers in the software image files:
    VXT020                  VXT software image
    VXTEX020                VXT EX software image
   Earlier versions of VXT software used separate software images to support
   monochrome and color/gray scale terminals:
    VXTMP00nn0              VXT host-based, monochrome image
    VXTSP00nn0              VXT host-based, color or gray scale image
    VXTMPI0nn0              VXT host-based, monochrome image with XIE support
    VXTSPI0nn0              VXT host-based, color or gray scale image with XIE support

   nn is the version number. For example, 12 is Version 1.2.


4. Click on the OK button to save your setting and dismiss the dialog box.
5. In the Terminal Manager window, click on the Session menu.
6. In the Session menu, click on the Reboot menu item to reboot the terminal.
   The terminal loads the specified VXT or VXT EX software image from the
   first available host system or InfoServer system that has the software.




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 101
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

5.7.3 Using Server-Based Operation
        When you load a VXT software image file from an InfoServer system, you can
        choose to operate in server-based mode or host-based mode (Section 5.7.2).
        In server-based mode, the terminal stores its customizations on an InfoServer
        system. The InfoServer system also performs certain memory functions for the
        terminal, so the terminal needs only 4 megabytes of installed memory.
        In server-based mode, the terminal takes two steps to load a VXT or VXT EX
        software image:
        1. The terminal loads a VXT loader file from an InfoServer system or host
           system, using the MOP or IP protocol.
        2. The VXT loader file loads the VXT software image file from an InfoServer
           system, using the LASTport Version 3.1 protocol.

                 InfoServer                                 InfoServer

                VXT Loader                                 VXT Loader
                VXT or VXT EX                              VXT or VXT EX
                Software Image                             Software Image
                Customizations                             Customizations




                VXT               VXT              VXT               VXT

                4 MB              4 MB            4 MB              4 MB



                                                                  LJ−03325−RAGS

        Plug and Play Operation
        If you have an InfoServer with VXT software, the terminal can normally load
        the software without any need to configure a host system or use the Customize
        Boot dialog box. By default, the terminal looks for a VXT loader file named
        VXTLDR, which is supplied with VXT software kits for InfoServer systems.
        By default, the VXT loader first solicits the network for the full-function VXT
        software image; if the VXT software image is not available, the VXT loader
        solicits for the VXT EX image.

                              Network Bridges May Affect the VXT Loader
            If your InfoServer system is on the other side of a network bridge that
            filters MOP messages, your system manager must install the VXT


102 Chapter 5
                               Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                      5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

   loader file on a host system. Your system manager can preconfigure the
   host to load the file into the terminal. After the terminal loads the VXT
   loader file, the VXT loader file loads the VXT software image from the
   InfoServer system.


Specifying a Server-Based Image in the Customize Boot Dialog Box
If you want to load a particular VXT or VXT EX software version in server-
based mode, you can use the Customize Boot dialog box.
1. Display the Customize Boot dialog box (Section 5.7.4).
2. In the Primary Boot box, click on the MOP button.
3. In the MOP Boot File box, click on the Other button.
   Enter the name of the VXT loader file. The default name is VXTLDR.
   If needed, you can specify the loader supplied with a particular VXT
   software version. Normally you do not need to specify a version, unless
   you are loading a new version of VXT software that has not been made the
   default on your network yet. For example, if VXT Version 1.3 is the default
   version and you want to load VXT Version 2.1, you would specify the loader
   for VXT Version 2.1.

   Enter...                 To use this loader...
   VXTLDR                   Default version on your network
   VXTLDR_NODENAME          Default version on nodename
   VXTLDR021                VXT Version 2.1 loader
   VXTLDR020                VXT Version 2.0 loader
   VXTLDR0130               VXT Version 1.3 loader
   VXTLDR1                  VXT Version 1.3 loader (for VXT 2000+ terminals)
   VXTLDR0120               VXT Version 1.2 loader


                         VXT Loader Requirements
   To load the VXT Version 2.1 software image, you must use the VXT
   Version 2.1 loader file.
   To load the VXT EX software image, you must use the VXT Version 2.0
   or 2.1 loader file.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 103
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

        4. In the Secondary Boot box, choose the type of VXT software you want to
           use. Click on the VXT Software button or the VXT EX button.
        5. In the Version box, click on the Default button if you want to load the
           default version of VXT or VXT EX software on your network.
            Click on the Other button if you want to specify a VXT or VXT EX version
            other than the default. The terminal displays the letters VXT or VXT EX
            in front of the box. Enter the value for the version number (three digits for
            Version 2.0 and Version 2.1, four digits for earlier versions).

            Enter...        To load this version...
                            VXT        VXT EX
            021             2.1        2.0
            020             2.0        2.0
            0130            1.3        –
            0120            1.2        –
            0110            1.1        –
            0100            1.0        –

        6. Click on the OK button to save your setting and dismiss the dialog box.
        7. In the Terminal Manager window, click on the Session menu.
        8. In the Session menu, click on the Reboot menu item to reboot the terminal.
            The terminal loads the VXT loader file from the first available system.

                          Server-Based Customizations and Loading
            If you have several InfoServer systems with VXT software, your
            terminal always loads the VXT software from the first available
            InfoServer system that has the same LASTport group code. However,
            your terminal’s customized settings are always stored on a specific
            InfoServer system; therefore, your terminal does not necessarily use
            the same system to load software and store customizations.




104 Chapter 5
                                     Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                            5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

5.7.4 Customize Boot Dialog Box Description
      To view or change your boot settings, choose Boot... from the Terminal
      Manager window’s Customize menu. The Customize Boot dialog box looks like
      this:




                                                    LJ−00176D−RAGS

      From the Customize Boot dialog box, you can change the following settings:




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 105
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

           Primary Boot
        Normally, the terminal alternates between using MOP and IP on attempts to
        boot the VXT software image file (host-based mode) or VXT loader file (server-
        based mode). To use IP only, click on the IP button. To use MOP only, click on
        the MOP button.
            MOP Boot File
        If you use MOP, the MOP Boot File box lets you specify a host-based VXT
        software image file (from a host or InfoServer system) or a VXT loader file.
        The VXT loader file is for loading a server-based VXT software image.
        Default By default, the terminal looks for the VXT loader file on an InfoServer
        system or host. The terminal repeats this sequence using different versions of
        the MOP protocol.
        Host Preconfigured The terminal first looks for any host system using MOP
        that has been preconfigured to load the terminal with VXT software. If it does
        not find a host, the terminal looks for the VXT loader file on an InfoServer
        system or host. The terminal repeats this sequence using different versions of
        the MOP protocol.
        VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management describes how
        your system manager can add your terminal’s Ethernet address and the desired
        host-based VXT software image file or VXT loader file to a system database.
        If you use MOP: OpenVMS system managers use the Network Control Program
        (NCP), and ULTRIX system managers use the addnode utility.
        Other This setting lets you specify a host-based VXT software image file or
        VXT loader file. The image or loader file can be on a host or InfoServer system.
        Omit the .SYS file extension.
        The file should be in a default MOP directory. For example:
        •   OpenVMS systems—Use VXT$LIBRARY or MOM$SYSTEM. To use
            VXT$LIBRARY, the system manager must add it to the MOM$LOAD
            search list. See the OpenVMS section in VXT Software Version 2.1
            Installation and System Management.
        •   ULTRIX systems—Use /usr/lib/mop on the local subnet.
        VXTLDR is the default name of the VXT loader file. If you enter the file name
        VXTLDR, any MOP service with the load file can respond and supply the file to
        the terminal. The VXT loader uses the LASTport Version 3.1 protocol to load
        the system image specified in the Secondary Boot and Version fields.




106 Chapter 5
                               Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                      5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

Typically, the terminal uses the VXT loader file from the InfoServer system
that supplies the VXT software image. However, if there is a bridge that
filters MOP requests between the terminal and InfoServer system, the system
manager should make sure the VXT loader file is available on a host system in
the same network segment as the terminal.
   Secondary Boot
When you load a server-based VXT software image from an InfoServer system,
you use the Secondary Boot box to choose VXT software or VXT EX software.
Version You can use the default version of your Secondary Boot choice (VXT
Software or VXT EX) or specify a version in the Other box. If you specify a
version, make sure a VXT software image file with that name is available on
an InfoServer system.
   Options: X Image Extension
VXT software images include an X image extension (XIE) capability that allows
server-based and host-based terminals to work with XIE software. The VXT
EX software image does not include XIE capability.
Normally, the terminal’s XIE capability is turned on. If you turn this feature
off and on, you must reboot the terminal before your new setting takes effect.
Appendix C describes how to use the terminal with XIE.
VXT 2000 terminals with a system box and 17-inch VX227 models without a
system box can use an optional image accelerator board to increase the speed
at which the terminal displays XIE bitonal images. However, you do not need
the image accelerator board to use the terminal’s XIE capability.
    Reboot Options
The MOP protocol provides a trigger mechanism for rebooting a remote node.
If you enable the MOP trigger feature, your terminal can be rebooted from a
remote node.
Allow MOP Trigger Normally, the terminal ignores MOP trigger messages. To
enable MOP triggering, click on the Allow MOP Trigger button.
Trigger Password You can also supply a password to restrict rebooting from
a remote node. The MOP trigger password can be from 1 to 16 hexadecimal
characters (0–9 and A–F characters). If you do not supply a password, a
default value of 0 is used (equivalent to no password).
See your host system’s network control program (NCP) manual or online help
for more information on the syntax for triggering remote nodes.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 107
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

5.7.5 Entering Boot Commands to Load VXT Software
        In addition to the Customize Boot dialog box, you can load VXT software from
        the terminal’s >>> prompt.
        Displaying the >>> Prompt
        To display the >>> prompt, you must halt your terminal. There are two ways
        to halt the terminal; you can use the keyboard, or you can use the halt button.

                                            Caution
            Halting the terminal closes any currently open sessions.


        To display the >>> prompt from the keyboard:
        Press Ctrl +left Alt +keypad . . The terminal ends all sessions and begins to
        boot VXT software. Immediately press Ctrl C to halt the booting sequence and
        display the >>> prompt.
        To display the >>> prompt using the halt button:
        Quickly press and release the halt button on the rear of the terminal. The
        terminal halts all activity and displays a >>> prompt.
        •   For terminals with a system box: The halt button is next to the indicator
            lights on the rear of the system box.
        •   For terminals without a system box: The halt button is below the keyboard
            connector on the rear of the monitor.
        Loading VXT Version 2.0 or 2.1 Software
        To load VXT Version 2.0 or 2.1 software, enter the command sequence for
        host-based or server-based operation.

        To load...    In this mode...   Enter...
        VXT Version   Host
        2.1
                                        >>> B/100 Return
                                        Bootfile: VXT Return
                      Server
                                        >>> B/101 Return
                                        Bootfile: VXTLDR Return
                                        VXTLDR> VXT.SYS or VXT021.SYS   Return




108 Chapter 5
                                     Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                            5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

To load...       In this mode...       Enter...
VXT EX           Host
                                       >>> B/100 Return
                                       Bootfile: VXTEX or VXTEX020       Return

                 Server
                                       >>> B/101 Return
                                       Bootfile: VXTLDR Return
                                       VXTLDR> VXTEX020.SYS Return
VXT Version      Host
2.0
                                       >>> B/100 Return
                                       Bootfile: VXT020     Return

                 Server
                                       >>> B/101 Return
                                       Bootfile: VXTLDR Return
                                       VXTLDR> VXT020.SYS Return
 If you have VXT Version 2.1 software, you can omit the version number when specifying VXT EX
software.


Loading Earlier VXT Software Versions
Earlier versions of VXT software used separate software images to support
monochrome and color/gray scale terminals. Enter the command sequence for
host-based or server-based operation.
Host-Based Mode
>>> B/100 Return
Bootfile: host_image        Return




Enter host_image...         To load this image...
VXTMP00nn0                  VXT host-based, monochrome image
VXTSP00nn0                  VXT host-based, color or gray scale image
VXTMPI0nn0                  VXT host-based, monochrome image with XIE support
VXTSPI0nn0                  VXT host-based, color or gray scale image with XIE support

nn is the version number. For example, 12 is Version 1.2.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 109
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.7 Changing Your Boot Settings for VXT Software

        Server-Based Mode
        >>> B/101 Return
        Bootfile: VXTLDR Return
        VXTLDR> server_image Return


        Enter server_image...       To load this image...
        VXTMV00nn0.SYS              VXT server-based, monochrome image
        VXTSV00nn0.SYS              VXT server-based, color or gray scale image

        nn is the version number. For example, 12 is Version 1.2.



5.8 Changing Your Software Options Settings
        The Customize Software Options dialog box lets you turn certain VXT software
        features on or off at startup. By default all options are turned on.
        If you have a host-based terminal, you can conserve memory by selecting only
        those options you need to use. You can monitor your terminal’s memory use
        by checking the Memory Remaining scale in the System Monitor dialog box
        (Section 6.5).
        The following table lists the approximate memory saved for each option
        unloaded.

        If You Unload This Option...               You Save This Much Memory (Kilobytes)...
        DECterm                                      235 KB
        Motif WM                                     617 KB
        Terminal Manager                           1422 KB
        Print Screen                                  19 KB
        Message Box                                  116 KB
        Net Print                                      8 KB
        3270                                         233 KB
        X Image Extension                            194 KB
        Font Manager                                  37 KB
        InfoReader                                    33 KB

        Total                                      2914 KB




110 Chapter 5
                                 Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                            5.8 Changing Your Software Options Settings

If you try to use a disabled option, the VXT Message Box displays the following
message:
Software option is disabled.
To view or change your software option settings, choose the Startup submenu
from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. Then choose Software
Options... to display the Customize Software Options dialog box:




                                          LJ−03539−RAGS

From the Customize Software Options dialog box, you can turn the following
options on or off as startup:
  DECterm Terminal Windows
This setting affects your ability to create VXT DECterm windows.
    Motif Window Manager
This setting affects your ability to use the terminal’s Motif window manager.
If you disable this option, you cannot restart the window manager using the
Create dialog box or any other method.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 111
Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
5.8 Changing Your Software Options Settings

           Terminal Manager
        This setting affects your ability to use the Terminal Manager window. This
        setting also affects the VXT Message Box, unless you autostart the message
        box as a separate application from the the Terminal Manager window.

                                            Caution
            The Software Options dialog box is part of the Terminal Manager
            window. If you turn off the Terminal Manager window and reboot the
            terminal, you cannot access the Software Option dialog box to enable
            the Terminal Manager window again. See your system manager to
            reenable the Terminal Manager window.


           Print Screen
        This setting affects your ability to use the Print Screen menu item in the VXT’s
        Terminal Manager window.
          Message Box
        This setting affects your ability to use the VXT Message Box.
           Network Printing
        This setting affects your ability to print from a host system to a local printer
        attached to the terminal. If this setting is disabled, you cannot use the Host
        Accessible Printer Port setting in the Customize Serial and Parallel Ports
        dialog box.
           VXT 3270 Terminal Windows
        This setting affects your ability to create VXT 3270 terminal windows. VXT
        3270 terminal windows also require a separate software license and access to a
        DECnet/SNA gateway.
           X Image Extension
        This setting affects the terminal’s ability to work with X image extension (XIE)
        software (Appendix C). VXT EX software does not include XIE capability.
           Font Manager
        This setting affects your ability to use the Font Management dialog box for
        server-based terminals, described in VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and
        System Management.
           InfoReader
        This setting affects your ability to display the InfoReader library of VXT
        documentation from the Getting Started menu.



112 Chapter 5
                                       Customizing Fonts and Startup Settings
                                         5.9 Using Customized Resource Files

5.9 Using Customized Resource Files
     VXT software provides two methods for remotely managing terminal settings—
     the configuration manager or your own host-based resource files. If you use
     your own host-based resource files, you can create individual terminal resource
     files and group resource files. You enter the network location of a terminal’s
     individual and group resource file in the Customize Resource Files dialog box.
     To display the Customize Resource Files dialog box, choose Resource Files...
     from the Terminal Manager window’s Customize menu. VXT Software
     Version 2.1 Installation and System Management describes the configuration
     manager, resource files, and how to use the Customize Resource Files dialog
     box.
     You can use the TFTP or NFS transport to access your resource files on
     the host. If you use NFS, you must first enter the NFS mount point in the
     Customize NFS dialog box.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 113
                                                                             66
                       Checking the Terminal’s Status


        This chapter describes how to monitor the operating status of your terminal
        and of network communication. To monitor the terminal’s status, you use the
        Status submenu accessed from the Session menu in the Terminal Manager
        window. This chapter covers the following topics:
        •   Displaying the Status Submenu
        •   Checking a TCP/IP Host System
        •   TCP/IP Routes Dialog Box
        •   Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters
        •   Monitoring the Terminal’s Memory and Network Use
        •   Checking the Terminal’s System Configuration




114 Chapter 6
                                                 Checking the Terminal’s Status
                                             6.1 Displaying the Status Submenu

6.1 Displaying the Status Submenu
     To display the Status submenu, choose the Status menu item from the Session
     menu in the Terminal Manager window.

                        VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                          LJ−01154D−RAGS


     When you choose a menu item from the Status submenu, the terminal displays
     a dialog box for that topic.

6.2 Checking a TCP/IP Host System
     You can check if a TCP/IP host is available by using the TCP/IP Network Test
     (ping) dialog box. You specify a host name or IP address and a timeout period
     for the test. The terminal sends a ping (Packet InterNet Groper) packet once
     every second for the time you enter in the Timeout box. If you are testing the
     availability of a remote host on another network, you may want to increase the
     timeout value.
     To display the TCP/IP Network Test (ping) dialog box, choose TCP/IP Network
     Test (ping)... from the Status submenu.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 115
Checking the Terminal’s Status
6.2 Checking a TCP/IP Host System




                                       LJ−01112−RAGS

        To run the test:
        1. Click on the Host Name or IP Address box and enter a host name or
           address. Use the < x key if you make a mistake.
            Examples
            market
            12.212.231.22
        2. Click on the Test button. The terminal displays the status of the host on
           the Status line:
            •   Host name or IP Address is alive
            •   No answer from Host name or IP Address
            •   Trying...
        To change the timeout period for performing the test:
        Click on the Timeout (seconds) box and enter a new timeout value from 1 to 99
        seconds. Use the < x key if you make a mistake.
        To dismiss the dialog box:
        Click on the Close button.




116 Chapter 6
                                                  Checking the Terminal’s Status
                                                   6.3 TCP/IP Routes Dialog Box

6.3 TCP/IP Routes Dialog Box
     You can display a list of TCP/IP routes from your network to hosts on other
     networks. To display the TCP/IP Routes dialog box, choose TCP/IP Routes...
     from the Status menu.




                                                  LJ−01113−RAGS


     The dialog box lists routes from four sources:
     •   Static routes you enter in the Customize TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog box
     •   Interface routes added by interface initialization (NID startup)
     •   Internet control message protocol (ICMP) redirects
     •   Dynamic routes added by RIP packets (Normally dynamic routing is
         enabled. See Section 4.7 to enable or disable.)
     To enter your own routes into the TCP/IP Routes dialog box:
     See Section 4.7.
     To update the list:
     Click on the Update Routes button. The terminal displays the current list of
     static and dynamic routes.
     To dismiss the dialog box:
     Click on the Close button.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 117
Checking the Terminal’s Status
6.4 Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters

6.4 Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters
        You can check the status of the terminal’s LAT and Ethernet counters.
        Normally, the terminal updates the information in these dialog boxes every 5
        seconds. You can set the update frequency time from 1 to 60 seconds, using the
        Customize Terminal Manager dialog box (Section 3.10).
        LAT Counters Dialog Box
        To display the LAT Counters dialog box, choose LAT Counters... from the
        Status submenu. Table 6–1 describes each counter.




                                                                      LJ−01155A−RAGS

        To set all counters to 0:
        Click on the Zero Counters button. All counters in the list are set to 0.
        To dismiss the dialog box:
        Click on the Close button.

        Table 6–1 LAT Counters Display Fields
        Field                    Description
        Seconds Since Zeroed     The number of seconds since these counters were set to 0.
                                                                    (continued on next page)




118 Chapter 6
                                                Checking the Terminal’s Status
                                     6.4 Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters


Table 6–1 (Cont.) LAT Counters Display Fields
Field                        Description

Messages Received            The number of LAT protocol messages successfully received
                             by the terminal.
Messages Transmitted         The number of LAT protocol messages successfully
                             transmitted by the terminal.
Slots Received               The number of LAT slots received by the terminal. A slot
                             represents a message segment for a particular LAT session.
Slots Transmitted            The number of LAT slots transmitted by the terminal. A
                             slot represents a message segment for a particular LAT
                             session.
Bytes Received               The number of data bytes received by the terminal over the
                             LAT protocol.
Bytes Transmitted            The number of data bytes sent by the terminal over the LAT
                             protocol.
Duplicates Received          The number of virtual circuit messages the terminal
                             received that were not in the correct sequence.
Messages Retransmitted       The number of virtual circuit messages that the terminal
                             resent to remote nodes.
Illegal Messages             The number of incorrectly formatted LAT messages the
                             terminal has received.
Illegal Slots                The number of incorrectly formatted slots of data in a LAT
                             message that the terminal has received.
Virtual Circuit Timeouts     The number of times that the terminal terminated a LAT
                             connection because the remote node did not respond within
                             the time allowed by the LAT protocol.
Protocol Errors              The number of times that the terminal determined that the
                             LAT protocol has been violated by a remote node. See the
                             Protocol Error Mask field for more information.
Protocol Error Mask          A bit mask providing information about the LAT protocol
                             errors detected by the terminal. The bits in the mask are
                             numbered from right to left, starting with bit 0 on the right.
                             The following bits are defined in the mask:
                              0       An unknown LAT message type was received.
                              1       An invalid LAT START message was received.
                              2       A zero-valued virtual circuit reference was
                                      received.
                                                                 (continued on next page)




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 119
Checking the Terminal’s Status
6.4 Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters


        Table 6–1 (Cont.) LAT Counters Display Fields
        Field                   Description

                                 3      An out-of-range virtual circuit reference was
                                        received.
                                 4      A reference to a nonexistent virtual circuit was
                                        received.
                                 5      A reference to a virtual circuit no longer in use
                                        was received.
                                 6      An invalid LAT STOP message was received.
                                 7      An invalid reference to a remote slot was received.
                                 8      A reference to a nonexistent slot was received.
                                 9      A credit violation was detected.
                                10      A repeated creation of a slot was detected.
                                11      An invalid sequence number was received.
                                12      A repeated disconnect of a slot was detected.


        Ethernet Counters Dialog Box
        To display the Ethernet Counters dialog box, choose Ethernet Counters... from
        the Status submenu. Table 6–2 describes each counter.




                                                                  LJ−01156A−RAGS




120 Chapter 6
                                                Checking the Terminal’s Status
                                     6.4 Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters

To set all counters to 0:
Click on the Zero Counters button. All counters in the list are set to 0.
To dismiss the dialog box:
Click on the Close button.

Table 6–2 Ethernet Counters Display Fields
Field                           Description
Seconds Since Zeroed            The number of seconds since these counters were set to
                                0.
Bytes Received                  The number of bytes contained in datagrams successfully
                                received by the terminal, excluding Ethernet header and
                                CRC data.
Bytes Sent                      The number of bytes contained in datagrams successfully
                                sent by the terminal, excluding Ethernet header and
                                CRC data.
Frames Received                 The number of datagrams successfully received by the
                                terminal, including multicast frames.
Frames Sent                     The number of datagrams successfully sent by the
                                terminal, including multicast frames.
Multicast Bytes Received        The number of bytes received by the terminal in
                                multicast frames, excluding Ethernet header and CRC
                                data.
Multicast Bytes Sent            The number of bytes sent by the terminal in multicast
                                frames, excluding Ethernet header and CRC data.
Multicast Frames Received       The number of multicast frames received by the
                                terminal.
Multicast Frames Sent           The number of multicast frames sent by the terminal.
Frames Sent, Deferred           The number of times that the terminal deferred a frame
                                transmission because the datalink was in use.
Frames Sent, 1 Collision        The number of times the terminal sent a frame on the
                                second attempt after a collision occurred on the first
                                attempt.
Frames Sent, 2+ Collisions      The number of times the terminal successfully sent
                                a frame after collisions during the first two or more
                                attempts.
                                                                (continued on next page)




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 121
Checking the Terminal’s Status
6.4 Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters


        Table 6–2 (Cont.) Ethernet Counters Display Fields
        Field                      Description

        Send Failures              The number of times the Ethernet interface aborted a
                                   transmission request. If this count is not 0, see the Send
                                   Failure Reasons field for more information.
        Send Failure Reasons       A bit mask providing information about the reason for
                                   a send failure if the Send Failures counter is not 0.
                                   The bits in the mask are numbered from right to left,
                                   starting with bit 0 on the right. The following bits are
                                   defined in the mask:
                                   0     A transmission failed to complete after 16 retries,
                                         usually due to excessive collisions.
                                   1     A loss of carrier occurred on the Ethernet during a
                                         transmission.
                                   2     A short circuit occurred on the Ethernet during a
                                         transmission.
                                   3     An open circuit occurred on the Ethernet during a
                                         transmission.
                                   4     Heartbeat error.
                                   5     Data underflow.
        Receive Failures           The number of frames received with an error condition.
                                   For more information, see the Receive Failure Reasons
                                   field.
        Receive Failure Reasons    A bit mask providing information about the type of
                                   receive failures encountered if the Receive Failures
                                   counter is not 0. The bits in the mask are numbered
                                   from right to left, starting with bit 0 on the right. The
                                   following bits are defined in the mask:
                                   0     A block check error. The received frame did not
                                         pass the cyclical redundancy check (CRC).
                                   1     A framing error. The received packet did not
                                         contain an integral number of 8-bit bytes.
        Unrecognized Destination   The number of frames received by the terminal that
                                   did not contain a multicast address or protocol type
                                   recognized by the terminal. These frames are discarded.
        Data Overrun               The number of times that the terminal’s hardware lost
                                   an incoming frame because it was unable to keep up
                                   with the data rate.
                                                                    (continued on next page)




122 Chapter 6
                                                    Checking the Terminal’s Status
                                         6.4 Displaying LAT and Ethernet Counters


     Table 6–2 (Cont.) Ethernet Counters Display Fields
     Field                          Description

     User Buffer Unavailable        Currently unused. Should always be 0.
     System Buffer Unavailable      The number of times that the terminal’s software did
                                    not have a buffer available to receive an incoming frame
                                    (MISS error).



6.5 Monitoring the Terminal’s Memory and Network Use
     You can use the System Monitor dialog box to monitor the amount of local
     memory available for use by the terminal. You can also monitor the percent of
     the terminal’s network capacity currently being used. Normally, the terminal
     updates this information every 5 seconds. You can set the update frequency
     time from 1 to 60 seconds, using the Customize Terminal Manager dialog
     box (Section 3.10). To display the System Monitor dialog box, choose System
     Monitor from the Status submenu.




                        LJ−0111A−RAGS

     Memory Remaining: Indicates how much of the local memory installed in
     the terminal is currently available for use.
     Network Utilization: Indicates what percent of the network capacity of the
     terminal is currently being used.
     Uptime: Indicates how long the terminal has been running since being booted.


                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 123
Checking the Terminal’s Status
6.5 Monitoring the Terminal’s Memory and Network Use

        Pagefile Reads: Indicates the number of blocks of memory read by the
        terminal since being booted.
        Pagefile Writes: Indicates the number of blocks of memory written by the
        terminal since being booted.
        To dismiss the dialog box:
        Click on the Close button.

6.6 Checking the Terminal’s System Configuration
        You can use the System Configuration dialog box to check the terminal’s
        software version, network addresses, work group, active font path, installed
        options, and amount of installed memory.
        To display the System Configuration dialog box, choose System Configuration...
        from the Status submenu.

                                                System Configuration

           VXT Software:                 Monochrome Host Based VXT V2.1
           System Image:                 VXT.SYS on server ROM
           Pagefile:                     N/A
           Active Font Path:             Local Fonts
           Software Options:             Terminal Manager, Message Box, Motif WM, DECterm, Print Screen,
                                         X Image Extension, Net Print

           Ethernet Hardware Address: 08−00−2B−25−3C−36
           Ethernet Active Address:      08−00−2B−25−3C−36
           IP Address:                   16.122.123.122
           DECnet Address:               55.123
           Total Memory:                 10 Megabytes
           Hardware Options:             None
           Diagnostic Revision:          V1.4

           Terminal 08002B253C36 on server Local Terminals
           Work Group Local on server Local Terminals


           Resource files currently in use



                                      Update                           Close


                                                                                                LJ−0110C−RAGS


        Table 6–3 describes the System Configuration fields:




124 Chapter 6
                                       Checking the Terminal’s Status
                     6.6 Checking the Terminal’s System Configuration


Table 6–3 System Configuration Display Fields
Field               Description
VXT Software:       Lists the VXT software version and type:
                    {Monochrome, Color} {Host-Based, Server-Based} VXT Vn.n
                    A plus symbol (+) after the word Monochrome or Color indicates
                    the terminal has a VXT 2000+ video board installed.
System Image:       Lists the system image name of the VXT software in use and
                    the name of the server supplying the software. The default
                    system image name for VXT Version 2.0 software is VXT or
                    VXT021.
                    For host-based software: the displayed server name is
                    always ROM, because VXT host-based software is loaded into
                    the terminal’s ROM memory and does not use an InfoServer for
                    memory services.
                    For server-based software: the server name is the name of
                    the InfoServer system from where the software was loaded.
                    If you have several InfoServer systems with VXT software on
                    your network, the terminal may use different servers to load
                    software, provide fonts, and store terminal and work group
                    customizations.
Pagefile:           For server-based software: this field lists the name of the
                    InfoServer pagefile the terminal is using for memory paging
                    services. The pagefile resides on the InfoServer that loaded the
                    terminal’s VXT software.
                    If a pagefile has not been opened yet, this field displays No
                    Pagefile.
                    For host-based software: this field lists N/A for not
                    applicable.
                                                           (continued on next page)




                     VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 125
Checking the Terminal’s Status
6.6 Checking the Terminal’s System Configuration


        Table 6–3 (Cont.) System Configuration Display Fields
        Field               Description

        Active Font Path:   Lists the location of the fonts currently in use. Font path
                            elements are separated by commas. To change the font path,
                            use the Customize Font Path dialog box (Section 5.3). Font
                            path elements are listed in the order entered in the Customize
                            Font Path dialog box.
                            For host-based software: by default, the terminal uses the
                            Local Fonts set loaded with VXT software into the terminal’s
                            local memory.
                            Local Fonts
                            For server-based software: by default, the terminal uses the
                            Local Fonts set and the VXT fonts on an InfoServer. The font
                            path indicates the name of the InfoServer system supplying
                            fonts:
                            //lastport/server_name/VXT, Local Fonts
        Software Options:   Lists the VXT software options available for use. By default,
                            all options are available. You can turn options on and off in
                            the Customize Software Options dialog box (Section 5.8). Host-
                            based terminals can conserve memory by turning off unused
                            options.
                            Terminal Manager, Message Box, Motif WM, DECterm, Print Screen,
                            X Image Extension, Net Print, 3270, Font manager, InfoReader
        Ethernet Hardware   Lists the terminal’s Ethernet physical address, set at the
        Address:            factory.
        Ethernet Active     If you use DECnet: this field lists the terminal’s global
        Address:            network address, in the network service access point (NSAP)
                            format. DECnet derives this address from the Ethernet
                            hardware address.
                            If you use TCP/IP or LAT: this field lists the same address as
                            the Ethernet Address field.
        IP Address          Lists the terminal’s Internet protocol address, for communicat-
                            ing with systems that use the TCP/IP protocol. If you have not
                            entered an IP address in the Customize TCP/IP dialog box, this
                            field is empty.
                                                                   (continued on next page)




126 Chapter 6
                                          Checking the Terminal’s Status
                        6.6 Checking the Terminal’s System Configuration


Table 6–3 (Cont.) System Configuration Display Fields
Field                  Description

DECnet Address         Lists the terminal’s DECnet address, for communicating with
                       systems on a wide area network that use the DECnet protocol.
                       If you have not enabled the DECnet protocol and entered an
                       DECnet address in Customize DECnet dialog box, this field is
                       empty.
Total Memory:          Lists the amount of memory installed in the terminal, from 4
                       megabytes to 18 megabytes.
Hardware Options:      Lists any option boards installed in the terminal:
                       Image           VXT image accelerator board
Diagnostic Revision:   Lists the terminal’s ROM revision level.
Resource files         Lists the name and location of the terminal and work group
currently in use:      resource files that store the terminal’s customizations.
                       For host-based software: the terminal and work group
                       resource files are always listed on the Local Terminals server.
                       For server-based software: the terminal and work group
                       resource files reside on the same InfoServer system. This
                       system may be a different InfoServer system than the one that
                       loads the terminal’s VXT software.
                       The system manager may have new terminals join the
                       Unregistered Terminals work group.


To display updated information:
Click on the Update button. The terminal displays updates any information
that has changed since you opened the dialog box.
To dismiss the dialog box:
Click on the Close button.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 127
                                                                                  77
                              Using VXT DECterm Windows


        This chapter describes how to use VXT DECterm windows, also known as
        terminal windows. The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •    The VXT DECterm Window
        •    Copying and Pasting Text
        •    Clearing or Resetting the Window
        •    Printing the DECterm Window
        •    Exiting from a VXT DECterm Window

7.1 The VXT DECterm Window
        The VXT DECterm window is a VT300 series terminal emulator. You can open
        several VXT DECterm windows on the screen and run different applications in
        each window. You can use your mouse to move between windows.
        Chapter 2 describes how to create a terminal window session on your host,
        using the Create menu and dialog box. When you create the session, the
        terminal displays a VXT DECterm window.
                                           1


                              Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

            File   Edit   Commands   Options    Print                        2



                                           3




                                                                 LJ−01636C−RAGS
                                                          LJ−0163C−RAGS



128 Chapter 7
                                                 Using VXT DECterm Windows
                                                 7.1 The VXT DECterm Window

    Chapter 11 describes the basic features of windows. For VXT DECterm
    windows:
       The window title uses the following format:
           Transport VXT DECterm on Host n
       Transport is the method used to connect to the host system —Telnet, LAT,
       DECnet, or Serial. The Host system is identified by a host name, service
       name, or IP address. VXT DECterm windows are numbered sequentially
       (n) in the order you open them during a session. The name VXT DECterm
       lets you distinguish the terminal’s DECterm windows from any remote
       DECterm windows you create using a host system’s session manager. You
       can change the title by choosing the Window... menu item from the Options
       menu.
       The menu bar displays the names of the five pull-down menus available





       from the window:
       File    Edit    Commands     Options     Print
       You can use your mouse or keyboard to display menus and choose menu
       items. To display a menu from the keyboard, press the Alt key and the key
       for the underlined letter in the menu name at the same time. After that,
       you can use the arrow keys to navigate to different menu items and menus.
       You choose a menu item the same way you choose a menu: Alt + underlined
       letter.
       The work area is where you enter text and commands and interact with





       host applications, similar to a video terminal screen. By default, the size of
       this area is 24 lines by 80 columns. You can change the terminal size by
       selecting the Window... menu item from the Options menu.
       The Terminal Size setting in the Window Options dialog box should match
       the host system’s row and page settings, to ensure the proper display of
       applications such as editors and mail.
    Window Colors
    VXT DECterm windows use the same color scheme as other VXT windows. You
    choose the colors in the Terminal Manager’s Customize Window Color dialog
    box (Section 3.9). You can also use the Display Options dialog box in the VXT
    DECterm window to choose dark text on a light background or light text on a
    dark background (Section 8.4).




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 129
Using VXT DECterm Windows
7.2 Copying and Pasting Text

7.2 Copying and Pasting Text
        You can copy and paste text in a DECterm window. You can also copy text from
        one window and paste the text into another window. To copy and paste text,
        you use the DECterm window’s Edit menu. The Edit menu looks like this:




                                                       LJ−01181A−RAGS

        From the Edit menu, you can perform the following functions:
        Copy
        Choosing this item places the currently selected text into the terminal’s copy
        buffer. You can also use the Select All menu item to select the complete
        window.
        Paste
        Choosing this item sends the contents of the terminal’s copy buffer to the
        cursor location in the window as if it were typed on the keyboard.
        Select All
        Choosing this item places all of the window’s text into the terminal’s copy
        buffer. You can also use the Copy menu item to place selected text from the
        window into the copy buffer.

7.2.1 Host Synchronization Required
        To prevent loss of data when the contents of the paste buffer is sent to the host,
        set the host to send XON and XOFF synchronization characters as follows:
        On a UNIX or ULTRIX system
        % stty ixoff ixon
        On an OpenVMS system
        $ SET TERMINAL/HOSTSYNC




130 Chapter 7
                                                       Using VXT DECterm Windows
                                                       7.2 Copying and Pasting Text

7.2.2 Selecting Text to Copy
       You can select a word, a line, or a block of text at a time. A block can be a
       single character or any number of contiguous characters, up to the complete
       window. You can also use the Select All menu item in the Edit menu to select
       the complete window.
       To select a block of text:
       1. Point to the start of the block.
       2. Press and hold MB1, then drag the pointer to the end of the block.
       3. Release MB1 to indicate the end of the block. The selected text is
          highlighted.
       4. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.
       To select a single word:
       1. Point to the word.
       2. Double click MB1 to select the word. The selected word is highlighted.
       3. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.
       To select a line of text:
       1. Point to the line.
       2. Triple click MB1 to select the line. The selected line is highlighted.
       3. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.

7.2.3 Pasting Text
       After you select text and store it in the copy buffer, you can paste the text to
       the text cursor location in the same window or in a different window.
       To paste text:
       1. Place the text cursor where you want to copy the text.
       2. Choose the Paste menu item from the Edit menu of the window that will
          receive the copied text. The terminal copies the text to the cursor position.




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 131
Using VXT DECterm Windows
7.2 Copying and Pasting Text

7.2.4 Using Quick Copy
        The quick copy feature lets you paste text without storing it in the copy buffer
        or using the Edit menu. There are two ways to perform a quick copy:
        Method 1
        1. Select the text as described in Section 7.2.2.
        2. Place the text cursor where you want to paste the text.
        3. Press and release MB2. If you accidentally move the mouse before
           releasing MB2, method 2 is activated.
        You can use this method to copy text from one window to another. Move the
        input focus to the other window before clicking MB2. To paste into remote
        DECterm windows, use MB3.
        Method 2
        1. Place the text cursor where you want to paste the text.
        2. Point to the start of the text you want to copy.
        3. Press and hold MB2. Drag the pointer to the end of the text to be copied.
           Release MB2 to copy the selected text to the cursor position.
        Copy and Paste Functions Disabled by Some Applications
        If you are running an application that provides support for positioning its
        pointer or cursor from the mouse, the copy and paste functions may not work.
        See your application’s documentation.

7.2.5 Extending Your Selected Text
        After you select an area of text to copy, you may decide that you wanted to
        copy a larger area. Before you paste text, you can use the mouse or the arrow
        keys to extend the area you have selected.
        To extend your selection with the mouse:
        1. After selecting text with MB1, move the mouse cursor to the position that
           marks the boundary of the area you would like to have selected.
        2. Press the Shift key and click MB1. This extends the initially selected area
           up to the present position of your mouse cursor.
        To extend your selection with the arrow keys:
        After selecting text with MB1, press the Shift key and any arrow key to extend
        your selected text in the direction of the arrow.




132 Chapter 7
                                                     Using VXT DECterm Windows
                                              7.3 Clearing or Resetting the Window

7.3 Clearing or Resetting the Window
     The Commands menu in a VXT DECterm window lets you clear, reset, or
     resize the window. To display the Commands menu, click on Commands in the
     VXT DECterm window’s menu bar. The Commands menu looks like this:

                       Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1




                                                    LJ−01182B−RAGS



     From the Commands menu, you can perform the following functions:
     Clear Lines Off Top
     Choosing this item clears the information stored in the transcript. The
     transcript is an area of memory that contains the last saved lines of your
     screen display. You can read the transcript by using the scroll bars. The
     transcript exists as long as the Record Lines Off Top option in the Display
     dialog box is enabled. To change the size of the transcript, use the Display
     Options dialog box from the Options menu.
     Clear Display
     Choosing this item clears the contents of the current window.
     Resize Window
     Choosing this item resizes the window to match the size (number of rows and
     columns) of your DECterm terminal.
     Clear Communications
     Choosing this item performs the following actions:
     •   Cancels any print operation in progress.
     •   Cancels any escape sequence, control sequence, control string, or character
         string processing in progress.
     •   Clears the keyboard buffer.
     •   Clears the receive buffer.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 133
Using VXT DECterm Windows
7.3 Clearing or Resetting the Window

        Reset Terminal
        Choosing this item sets several terminal operating features to their default
        settings.

        Resets...                       To...
        Color map                       Default.
        Cursor mode                     Visible.
        Insert/replace mode             Replace.
        Origin mode                     Upper left of window, independent of margins.
        Autowrap mode                   Off.
        Keyboard action mode            Unlocked.
        Keypad mode                     Numeric.
        Cursor key mode                 Normal.
        Top margin                      Line 1.
        Bottom margin                   The bottom line in the window.




134 Chapter 7
                                                     Using VXT DECterm Windows
                                                                7.4 Using Options

7.4 Using Options
     The Options menu in a VXT DECterm window lets you customize the settings
     for many VXT DECterm features–from window settings to printing. Chapter 8
     describes the Options menu and how to use it.

                       Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1




                                                     LJ−01185B−RAGS



                                              Note
        Your VXT manager may choose to restrict your access to the Options
        menu or certain menu items. In this case, the items are dimmed.



7.5 Printing the DECterm Window
     You can print the contents of the DECterm window on a serial or parallel
     printer connected to the rear of the terminal. See Section 4.2 to activate the
     serial or parallel printer port. You can print all or part of the window. You can
     print the window as text, sixel graphics, or PostScript if your printer supports
     the format. To display the Print menu, click on Print in the DECterm window’s
     menu bar. The Print menu looks like this:




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 135
Using VXT DECterm Windows
7.5 Printing the DECterm Window



                          Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1




                                                       LJ−01183B−RAGS


        From the Print menu, you can perform the following functions:
        Print Text Page
        This option sends the contents of the page to the printer as text. The page
        size is set by the Terminal Size option in the Window Options dialog box. You
        can choose the Window Options dialog box from the Options menu in the VXT
        DECterm window. The default size is 24 lines.
        Print Selected Text
        This option sends text you select on the screen to the printer.
        Print All Text
        This option sends the contents of the page and the transcript to the printer as
        text. The transcript contains the lines that were saved after they were scrolled
        off the top of the screen. You can control the number of lines saved.
        Print Graphics
        This option sends the contents of the page to the printer in text, PostScript, or
        sixel format.
        Finish Printing
        This option stops the printing after the current contents of the buffer are
        printed.
        Cancel Printing
        This option stops the printing immediately.




136 Chapter 7
                                                    Using VXT DECterm Windows
                                         7.6 Exiting from a VXT DECterm Window

7.6 Exiting from a VXT DECterm Window
     There are two ways to exit from a VXT DECterm window:
     •   Log out from the window as you normally log out from your host system.
         This action closes the window and stops all applications in the window.
     •   Click on the File menu in the Terminal Manager’s menu bar and choose
         Exit.
         This action closes the window, but may leave applications running.
         Depending on your operating system, you may be able to create another
         DECterm window and reconnect to the application.


                       Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1



                                                   LJ−01184B−RAGS




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 137
                                                                            8
                                                                                8
            Customizing VXT DECterm Windows


        This chapter describes how to set many VXT DECterm window features to
        suit your personal preference, by using the Options menu in a VXT DECterm
        window. Initially, the features use factory-default settings that work with
        many host systems. You can make changes to the settings and save them for
        all future sessions.
        The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •   Displaying the Options Menu
        •   Saving and Restoring VXT DECterm Option Settings
        •   Changing Your Window Settings
        •   Changing Your Display Settings
        •   Changing Your General Operating Features
        •   Changing Your Keyboard Features
        •   Choosing National Replacement Character Sets
        •   Changing Your Graphics Display Settings
        •   Changing Your Printer Settings




138 Chapter 8
                                              Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                                                 8.1 Displaying the Options Menu

8.1 Displaying the Options Menu
     To display the Options menu, click on Options in the VXT DECterm window’s
     menu bar. The Options menu looks like this:

                      Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1




                                                    LJ−01185B−RAGS


     When you choose a menu item from the Options menu, the terminal displays
     a dialog box with the feature settings for that topic. In dialog boxes, shaded
     buttons indicate the current settings. You can examine the settings and change
     them if desired. You can use the last three menu items to save your settings,
     restore your last saved settings, or restore the system-default settings.

                                             Note
        A system manager can customize settings for terminals and work
        groups. The system manager can also lock or unlock access to menu
        items on the Options menu.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 139
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.2 Saving and Restoring VXT DECterm Option Settings

8.2 Saving and Restoring VXT DECterm Option Settings
        Initially, the terminal uses the system-default settings for each VXT DECterm
        window you create. If you make changes to option settings and save them, the
        terminal applies your saved settings to each new VXT DECterm window you
        create. To make changes to VXT DECterm settings and save them:
        1. Make your changes in a VXT DECterm Options dialog box, then click
           on the OK or Apply button. The changes are applied to the current VXT
           DECterm window.
        2. Click on Save Options in the Options menu. The settings are saved for
           future VXT DECterm windows.
        Applying Changes in a Dialog Box
        Each VXT DECterm Options dialog box has three push buttons for applying or
        dismissing new settings in that box:

        Click
        on . . .    To . . .
        OK          Apply new settings for the current session and dismiss the dialog box.
        Apply       Apply new settings for the current session without dismissing the dialog
                    box.
        Cancel      Dismiss the dialog box without changing any settings. If you made any
                    changes without applying them, clicking on the Cancel button cancels
                    those changes.

        Some option settings do not take effect until you open a new VXT DECterm
        window.
        OK and Apply Do Not Save VXT DECterm Options
        Note that the OK and Apply buttons work differently in VXT DECterm Options
        dialog boxes than in the Terminal Manager window’s Customize dialog boxes.
        In the Customize dialog boxes, the OK and Apply buttons save the feature
        settings for future use.




140 Chapter 8
                                    Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                  8.2 Saving and Restoring VXT DECterm Option Settings

Saving or Restoring Option Settings
To save or restore settings for future sessions, choose from the following menu
items on the Options menu:

Choose . . .               To . . .
Save Options               Save your current option settings for use in all future
                           sessions.
Restore Options            Recall the last option settings you saved with the Save
                           Options menu item. Choose the Restore Options menu item
                           if you want to reset any option settings that you changed
                           temporarily, but did not save. To see changes to specific
                           settings, display the dialog box for those settings.
Restore System Options     Restore the terminal’s default option settings. To see
                           changes to specific settings, display the dialog box for
                           those settings.

If you have changed some settings and want to use or view the factory-default
settings for your VXT DECterm Option dialog boxes, click on Restore System
Options in the Options menu. If you saved some customized settings but decide
you want to return to the factory-default settings for future sessions, click on
Restore System Options and Save Options; remember that this clears the
customized settings you saved.
Applications May Customize Some Settings
Some application software that you use may also set certain window features.
Programmers can use control sequences in their applications to customize
most DECwindows features from the host system. This provides the individual
application with more control.
ReGIS and Sixel Graphics
VXT DECterm windows emulate the VT300 series terminal, so you can display
ReGIS and sixel graphics on the terminal. You can also use the remote
DECterm application available under a host session manager to display ReGIS
and sixel graphics.




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 141
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.3 Changing Your Window Settings

8.3 Changing Your Window Settings
        You can use the Window Options dialog box to control the size of the VXT
        DECterm window, by choosing the number of rows and columns displayed.
        You can also control such features as the window title and the font size (big or
        small) used to display characters. You can use an alternative font on your host
        system or InfoServer system, if the font meets certain requirements.
        Before your resize a VXT DECterm window in the Window Options dialog box,
        you should understand how host system and window manager settings also
        affect the window’s operation.
        Factors Affecting the VXT DECterm Window Size
        Three factors affect the display of a VXT DECterm window:
        •   The Terminal Size setting in the Window Options dialog box
        •   The host’s settings for the DECterm terminal size
        •   Any adjustments you make to the window size, using a local or remote
            window manager (such as maximizing the window or using the window
            border to stretch the window)
        The normal Terminal Size in the Window Options dialog box is 24 rows by
        80 columns. Keeping the Terminal Size matched with the host’s setting
        ensures the proper display of applications such as editors and mail. If you
        use unmatched settings, be aware that some application displays may be
        affected.
        If you change the Terminal Size, you can make the same adjustments on the
        host. The commands for setting the DECterm window size on the host depend
        on the operating system.
        For example, on OpenVMS hosts you can enter the SHOW TERMINAL
        command to check the Page and Width settings. These settings should match
        the Terminal Size row and column settings. You can adjust the host settings
        with the SET TERM/PAGE=n and SET TERM/WIDTH=n commands.
        The Auto Resize Terminal feature in the Window Options dialog box
        determines whether or not the Terminal Size automatically changes when
        you adjust the window with a window manager. Normally this feature is off,
        so the Terminal Size remains matched with the host’s settings. For example,
        when you click on the window border and stretch the window, the number of
        rows and columns within the window does not change.




142 Chapter 8
                                     Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                                     8.3 Changing Your Window Settings

Using the Window Options Dialog Box
To view or change your VXT DECterm window settings, choose Window... from
the Options menu. The terminal displays the Window Options dialog box:




                                                        LJ−01186B−RAGS


From the Window Options dialog box, you can change the following features:




                     VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 143
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.3 Changing Your Window Settings

           Auto Resize Terminal
        Normally, changing the window size does not change the number of rows
        and columns displayed. If you click on Auto Resize Terminal, the terminal
        automatically adjusts the number of display rows and columns when you or
        your application software changes the window size.
           Auto Resize Window
        Normally, the terminal automatically resizes the window when the number of
        rows and columns changes. You can turn this feature on or off by clicking on
        Auto Resize Window. If you display a large number of rows and columns when
        this feature is off, some information may be outside the window boundary.
           Terminal Size
        The default size of the VXT DECterm window is 24 rows and 80 columns. You
        can choose from standard values or enter your own value:
        •   Standard values: Choose 24, 48, or 72 rows and 80 or 132 columns.
        •   Your own value: Click on the Rows box and enter a number from 1 to 99.
            Click on the Columns box and enter a number from 9 to 254.
            Normal Font, Condensed Font
        Normally, the terminal displays characters in a font suitable for the display
        width—a normal font for 80 columns, a condensed font for 132 columns. You
        can also choose to use the normal font or condensed font at all times, by
        clicking on the Normal Font (80 Columns) button or Condensed Font (132
        Columns) button. The condensed font lets you display more characters in a
        small window.
          Window Title
        You can choose a window title of up to 30 characters for each window you open.
        The default title is
            Host Transport VXT DECterm n
        •   Host is the host name, service name, or IP address of the host system.
        •   Transport is the method used to connect to the host system —Telnet, LAT,
            DECnet, or Serial.
        •   n is the number of the window. VXT DECterm windows are numbered
            sequentially in the order you open them during a session.
        Programmers can change the title by using the following command:
        <OSC>21;title_string<ST>




144 Chapter 8
                                       Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                                       8.3 Changing Your Window Settings

If you change the title, the terminal stops numbering windows in the session.
The only way to restart numbering is to choose Restore Systems Options from
the Options menu. In doing so, all VXT DECterm settings are restored to their
system-default settings.
  Icon Name
You can choose an icon name to identify each window you reduce to an icon.
This option works the same as the Window Title option.
Programmers can change the icon name with the following command:
<OSC>2L;icon_string<ST>
   Big Font, Little Font, German Standard Font
You can display characters in a little font, big font, or German standard font.
Normally, the terminal displays characters in its little font, which is a 14-point
font (10-point font on 100 dots/inch monitors). The big font is an 18-point font.
As an alternative, you can specify a suitable font on your host system or
InfoServer system. In any case, you can display only one font in a window at a
time. You may use a different font in each VXT DECterm window.
To choose one of the terminal’s default fonts:
1. Click on the Big Font, Little Font, or German Standard Font button.
2. Click on the Default button next to the font you chose.
3. Click on OK or Apply to see the new font in the VXT DECterm window.
To save a font selection for future use:
Click on Save Options in the Options menu.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 145
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.3 Changing Your Window Settings

8.3.1 Using Fonts on Your Host System or InfoServer
        If you have suitable fonts on your host or InfoServer system, you can use those
        fonts instead of the terminal’s fonts in your VXT DECterm windows. In each
        VXT DECterm window, you can specify an alternative big font, little font, and
        German standard font. You can specify fonts from different hosts or InfoServer
        systems.
        To use alternative fonts on a host or InfoServer system, you must specify a font
        path and font name.

                                             Note
            VXT DECterm windows require specific fonts and sizes to run and
            display properly. Most fonts do not meet these requirements. Problems
            and error messages will occur if VXT DECterm cannot find the proper
            fonts.


        Step 1: Specify a Font Path
        Use the Customize Font Path dialog box in the Terminal Manager window
        (Section 5.3).
        You can set only one font path at a time. You can change font paths while a
        VXT DECterm window is running. Applications currently running continue to
        use the old font path.
        Step 2: Enter the Font Name in the Window Options Dialog Box
        You can specify an alternative font for each of the standard font choices: big
        font, little font, and German standard font. You can specify different fonts in
        each VXT DECterm window you create. You can also change fonts while a VXT
        DECterm window is displayed.
        To save your font settings, click on Save Options in the Options menu. New
        applications will use the new font. Applications currently running will continue
        to use the same font.
        1. Click on the Big Font, Little Font, or German Standard Font button.
        2. Click on the Other button next to font you chose in step 1.
        3. Clear the text in the box next to the Other button. Double-click on the box.
           All text in the box is highlighted. Press the Remove key to erase all the
           text.
        4. Enter the name of your font in the box. See your system manager if you
           need help.



146 Chapter 8
                                      Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                                      8.3 Changing Your Window Settings

   Use the following steps if your font is on an InfoServer system.
To use a font on an InfoServer system:
After you set the font path, you can use the terminal’s Configuration Manager:
Font Management dialog box to list the available fonts on your InfoServer
system. You can cut and paste the font name into the DECterm Window
Options dialog box.
1. In the Terminal Manager window, click on Customize in the menu bar to
   display the Customize menu.
2. In the Customize menu, click on Configuration... to display the
   Configuration submenu.
3. Click on the Font Management... menu item to display the Configuration
   Manger: Font Management dialog box.
4. Click on the name of the font set you want. The font set name appears
   highlighted in the scroll box.
5. Click on the List Contents... button to display the List Font Set Contents
   box.
6. In the List Font Set Contents scroll box, find the font you want. Triple
   click on the font.
7. Click on the DECterm Window Options dialog box. The input cursor should
   be blinking in the Other box that you cleared. If not, click on the Other
   box.
8. Click on MB2. The font name is copied to the Other box.
9. Click on Apply or OK. The terminal applies the new font to the VXT
   DECterm window.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 147
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.4 Changing Your Display Settings

8.4 Changing Your Display Settings
        You can control display features such as the type of cursor, use of scroll bars,
        and appearance of text (light or dark). You can also specify how many lines to
        save when text is scrolled off the top of the window. To view or change your
        display settings, choose Display... in the Options menu. The terminal displays
        the Display Options dialog box:




                                                           LJ−01187A−RAGS

        From the Display Options dialog box, you can change the following settings:
           Record Lines Off Top
        Normally, the terminal saves lines that are scrolled off the top of the VXT
        DECterm window. To view these lines, use the vertical scroll bar. If you do not
        want to save lines that are scrolled from the display, click on the Record Lines
        Off Top button to turn it off. To specify the number of lines to save, use the
        Record 100 Lines Off Top box in this display box.
           Vertical Scroll Bar
        Normally, the VXT DECterm window has a vertical scroll bar. To remove the
        scroll bar, click on the Vertical Scroll Bar button to turn it off.




148 Chapter 8
                                       Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                                        8.4 Changing Your Display Settings

   Horizontal Scroll Bar
Normally, the VXT DECterm window does not have a horizontal scroll bar. To
add a horizontal scroll bar to the bottom of the window, click on the Horizontal
Scroll Bar button.
   Vertical Cursor Coupling
Normally, the cursor automatically returns to the cursor position in the
DECterm window to display text when it comes from your host system. For
example, if you scroll back into transcript and output from the host occurs, the
cursor returns to display the output text. Click on the Vertical Cursor Coupling
button if you wish to turn vertical cursor coupling off.
   Horizontal Cursor Coupling
Normally, the cursor does not return to display text from a host system if you
are scrolling horizontally. For example, if you scroll horizontally into transcript
and output from the host occurs, the cursor will not return to display the
output text. Click on the Horizontal Cursor Coupling button if you wish to
turn horizontal cursor coupling on.
   Auto Wrap
Normally, text does not automatically wrap to the next line when the cursor
reaches the right margin in the window. To have text automatically wrap to
the next line, click on the Auto Wrap button.
   Display Cursor
Normally, the terminal displays the text cursor, which is a block or underline
character. To turn the text cursor off, click on the Display Cursor button.
   Cursor Blink
Normally, the text cursor blinks. To have the cursor appear steady, click on the
Cursor Blink button. The terminal manager also has a Cursor Blink feature,
in the Customize Keyboard dialog box. The two settings have no effect upon
each other.
   Text and Window Background
VXT DECterm windows use the same color scheme as other VXT windows. You
choose the colors in the Terminal Manager’s Customize Window Color dialog
box (Section 3.9). To swap the text and background colors, you can use the
Dark Text, Light Background or Light Text, Dark Background buttons.
    Status Display
If you want to display a host status line, click on the Host Status Display
button. The host status line is a line at the bottom of the window where your
host application software can display messages.



                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 149
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.4 Changing Your Display Settings

           Cursor Style
        Normally, the terminal uses a solid block cursor to indicate the active position.
        To use an underline character for the cursor, click on the Underline Cursor
        button.
           Batch Scroll 0 Lines
        You can specify the speed at which the terminal displays text from your
        host during scrolling. The slowest settings of 0 or 1 line display every line
        during scrolling. Faster settings greater than 1 line cause multiple lines to be
        displayed quickly from the host.
           Record 100 Lines Off Top
        Normally, the terminal saves up to 100 lines that are scrolled off the top of the
        display. You can specify the number of lines to save (0 to 999) by using the
        Record 500 Lines Off Top box. Increasing the number of lines saved increases
        the terminal’s memory usage.

8.5 Changing Your General Operating Features
        You can set general operating features to match your computing environment
        and application software. For example, you choose which of the terminal’s
        character sets to use. To view or change general operating settings, click on
        General... in the Options menu. The terminal displays the General Options
        dialog box:




150 Chapter 8
                                    Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                           8.5 Changing Your General Operating Features




                                                        LJ−01188−RAGS

From the General Options dialog box, you can change the following settings:
   Newline
Normally when you press the Return key, the cursor moves to a new line
because the terminal sends a carriage return (CR) character and a line feed
(LF) character. Similarly, when the terminal receives a line feed, form feed
(FF), or vertical tab (VT) character, the cursor moves to the first column of the
next line.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 151
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.5 Changing Your General Operating Features

        If you click on the Newline button, pressing Return sends only a carriage
        return, so the cursor does not move to a new line. When the terminal receives
        a LF, FF, or VT character, the cursor moves to the current column of the next
        line.
           Lock UDKs
        Your keyboard contains keys you can define for your own use (Chapter 15).
        Normally, the host system can change the function of these user-defined keys
        (UDKs). If you click on the Lock UDKs button, the host system cannot change
        your definitions.
           Lock User Features
        There is a set of VXT DECterm option features that users often set to their
        own preference, including the terminal size (in Window Options), text and
        background color (in Display Options), and auto repeat feature for keys (in
        Keyboard Options). Your host applications can override these option settings
        unless you click on the Lock User Features button.
           Local Echo
        Normally, the terminal sends data entered at the keyboard to your host system,
        which may send it back to the terminal for display after processing. This is
        called a remote echo.
        If you want to send keyboard data to both the host system and the terminal
        (local echo), click on the Local Echo button.
           Cursor Keys
        Normally, the arrow keys move the cursor by sending standard ANSI cursor
        control sequences. Clicking on the Application Cursor Keys button lets the
        arrow keys send application-specific control sequences.
           Keypad
        Normally, numeric keypad keys send the character shown on the key (using
        ASCII codes). If you click on the Application Keypad button, the numeric
        keypad keys send control sequences used with some applications.
            User-Preferred Supplemental Set (UPSS)
        If you click on the 8-Bit Multinational Characters button in this dialog box, you
        can choose one of two supplemental character sets to use—DEC Supplemental
        or ISO Latin 1 Supplemental. Both character sets feature special characters
        used in the major Western European languages. The ISO Latin-1 set includes
        a few more characters that are not included in the DEC Supplemental set.
        Normally, the terminal uses the UPSS DEC Supplemental set. Click on the
        UPSS ISO Latin 1 button to use the UPSS ISO Latin 1 Supplemental set.



152 Chapter 8
                                    Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                           8.5 Changing Your General Operating Features

   8-Bit Multinational or 7-Bit NRCS Characters
You can select the type of characters the terminal uses, 8-bit multinational or
7-bit national replacement characters.
Normally, the terminal uses 8-bit multinational characters. This setting
supports most of today’s computing environments. There are two multinational
character sets available—the DEC Multinational character set and the ISO
Latin Alphabet No. 1 character set. Both sets consist of the ASCII character
set and their own supplemental set. To choose one of the multinational
character sets, you choose their supplemental set by using the UPSS buttons
in this dialog box.
Clicking on the 7-Bit NRCS Characters button lets the terminal use one
of several national replacement character sets. This setting is useful in
computing environments that are restricted to 7 bits. The 7-bit NRC character
sets are for the major Western European languages. When you choose this
setting, the terminal uses the NRC set that matches the current Keyboard
Type chosen in the Terminal Manager’s Customize Keyboard dialog box
(Section 3.3). You can also choose the individual NRC set by using the 7-Bit
NRCS Selection menu item from the Options menu.
   VT Emulation Mode
The terminal can emulate the responses of VT300 series, VT200 series, VT100
series, or VT52 text terminals to text and control functions sent from the host
system. If you have application software developed for one of these terminals,
you can choose the appropriate operating mode to run that software.
Normally, the terminal uses VT300 7-bit controls. In 7-bit controls mode, the
terminal sends 7-bit controls and 8-bit character codes to the host. Use this
mode with VT300 and VT200 applications that use 7-bit control characters.
In 8-bit controls mode, the terminal can send 8-bit controls and 8-bit character
codes to the host. This mode supports VT300 and VT200 8-bit text applications.
In either VT300 mode, the terminal accepts both 7-bit and 8-bit controls from
the host.
VT100 mode lets the terminal run applications that require VT100
compatibility.
VT52 mode lets the terminal run VT52 applications.
    Terminal ID
The terminal sends the host system a terminal identification (ID) message to
let the system know the terminal’s specific operating characteristics. You can
choose another terminal ID if needed. The terminal ID is also called the device
attributes response.


                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 153
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.5 Changing Your General Operating Features

           Answerback Message
        The terminal sends an answerback message to the host system when (1)
        you press Ctrl F5 , or (2) the host requests the message by sending an ENQ
        character. Host requests do not affect screen data or require a user response.
        To enter an answerback message, click on the Answerback Message box. Your
        message can have up to 30 characters.
           Conceal Answerback Message
        You can conceal your answerback message by clicking on the Conceal
        Answerback Message button. Your answerback message is replaced with
        the text <concealed> in the Answerback Message box.
        If you conceal the message, you can never redisplay it. If you click on the
        Answerback Message box, your concealed message is erased; you can enter a
        new message and conceal it by clicking on the Conceal button.

8.6 Changing Your Keyboard Features
        You can turn the keyboard’s warning bell and margin bell on and off. You can
        also control the function of the <x , tilde, angle bracket, and comma keys to
        suit your working environment. To view or change these and other keyboard
        settings, choose the Keyboard... menu item from the Options menu. The
        terminal displays the Keyboard Options dialog box:




                                                      LJ−01189−RAGS




154 Chapter 8
                                      Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                                     8.6 Changing Your Keyboard Features

From the Keyboard Options dialog box, you can change any of the following
settings:
   Warning Bell
Normally, a warning bell sounds whenever the terminal receives a bell (BEL)
character from the host system. To turn this feature off, click on the Warning
Bell button.
   Margin Bell
The terminal can sound a bell when the cursor approaches the right margin.
Normally, the margin bell feature is turned off. To turn this feature on, click
on the Margin Bell button.
    Tilde Key Sends
North American, British, and Dutch keyboards only: You can use the
tilde key ~ ` to send the escape (ESC) character for control sequences.
Normally, the tilde key sends an accent mark ( ` ) when unshifted and a
tilde ( ~ ) when shifted. To use the tilde key as an ESC key, choose the Tilde
Key Sends ESC button. To type an ESC character, press the tilde key twice.
    Angle Brackets Key
North American, British, and Dutch keyboards only: If you use the tilde
key as an ESC key, you may want to use the < > key to send the accent mark
( ` ) and tilde ( ~ ) characters. If you click on the Angle Brackets Key Sends `~
button, the < > key sends the accent mark ( ` ) when unshifted and the tilde (
~ ) when shifted.
   Auto Repeat
Most keys on the keyboard automatically repeat when you hold them down.
You can turn this feature off or on by clicking on the Auto Repeat button. The
Return and Help keys never autorepeat.

The Terminal Manager window’s Customize Keyboard dialog box also has an
Auto Repeat feature. The two settings do not affect each other. To disable
autorepeating in both the Terminal Manager and VXT DECterm windows,
disable both settings.
   Ctrl-Q, Ctrl-S = Hold
Normally, pressing Ctrl S prevents data from the host appearing on the
screen. Pressing Ctrl Q allows data to display.
You can turn this feature off or on by clicking on the Ctrl-Q, Ctrl-S = Hold
button. If you turn the feature off, pressing Ctrl S or Ctrl Q have no effect on
the display of text.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 155
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.6 Changing Your Keyboard Features

          < x Delete / Backspace Key
        Normally, pressing the <x key sends a delete (DEL) character to the host
        application.
        When you click on the <x Backspace button, the <x key sends a backspace
        (BS) character.
           Comma Key
        North American, British, and Dutch keyboards only: Normally, the , <
        key sends a comma whether shifted or unshifted, and the . > key sends a
        period. If you want to use these keys to send angle brackets in the shifted
        position, click on the Comma Key Sends ,< button.

8.7 Choosing National Replacement Character Sets
        You can use 8-bit multinational character sets or 7-bit national replacement
        character (NRC) sets with VXT DECterm windows. You should use the type of
        character set that matches your computing environment. To choose the type of
        character set, select the General... menu item from the Options menu.
        When you choose to use 7-bit character sets, the terminal automatically uses
        the NRC set that matches the current Keyboard Type chosen in the Terminal
        Manager’s Customize Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3). You can also choose
        an NRC set by using the Options menu. Choose 7-Bit NRCS Selection... to
        display the 7-Bit NRCS Selection Options dialog box:




                               LJ−01190−RAGS




156 Chapter 8
                                        Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                           8.7 Choosing National Replacement Character Sets

     The scroll box lists the available NRC sets. To choose an NRC set for the
     current window, click on a set in the scroll box. Then click on the OK button.

8.8 Changing Your Graphics Display Settings
     You can control some features that affect the display of graphics, such as color
     map entries. To view or change the graphic settings used with VXT DECterm
     windows, choose Graphics... from the Options menu. The terminal displays the
     Graphics Options dialog box:




                                           LJ−01191−RAGS


     From the Graphics Options dialog box, you can change the following settings:
        Share Color Map Entries
     Normally, color map entries are shared. This prevents the VXT DECterm
     window from allocating color map entries for its exclusive use. Instead,
     DECterm allocates shared, read-only colors out of a default color map. This
     means that DECterm does not need to create a private color map, which would
     prevent the windows from displaying in their true colors. However, it also
     means that DECterm colors may not match the colors used on a VT terminal.
        Enable Backing Store
     The backing store feature enables the terminal to redisplay DECterm graphics
     after they are covered by another window or iconified. The Customize X Server
     dialog box in the Terminal Manager window also has a Backing Store button
     (Section 5.4).
        Report Macrograph Contents
     The VXT DECterm window does not respond to a request by an application to
     report macrograph contents. Clicking on this option enables ReGIS commands
     to report macrograph contents. When reporting is complete, disable this
     feature to reduce any security risks.



                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 157
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.8 Changing Your Graphics Display Settings

           Number of Bit Planes
        The number of bit planes supported by your system determines the number of
        colors available for ReGIS and sixel graphics. With 2-bit planes, the DECterm
        emulator can display four different colors at the same time. With 4-bit planes,
        the DECterm emulator can display 16 colors.
        The DECterm emulator uses 2-bit planes on 4-plane systems; it uses 4-bit
        planes on all other systems. This reduces the probability that the DECterm
        emulator must create a private color map. You can choose the number of
        colors available in ReGIS and sixel graphics by entering the number of planes
        supported by your system.

8.9 Changing Your Printer Settings
        You can control print settings used with VXT DECterm windows, such as
        what area of the window to print. To view or change printer settings, choose
        Printer... from the Options menu. The terminal displays the Printer Options
        dialog box:




                                                         LJ−01192A−RAGS

        From the Printer Options dialog box, you can change the following settings:
           Form Feed Terminator
        Normally, the terminal sends a form feed (FF) character to the printer port
        at the end of any printing operation started from the VXT DECterm window’s
        Print menu.


158 Chapter 8
                                       Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
                                        8.9 Changing Your Printer Settings

    Printer to Host
If you use a serial input device connected to the terminal’s serial port, the
terminal can accept input data from the device and send the data to the host
application. By default, the serial port does not work as a printer port, so the
Printer to Host button is dimmed. To use the serial port to receive data, change
the Port Usage setting to Serial Port: Printer (Section 4.2). Then choose the
Printer to Host button.
   Graphics Printing
Normally the terminal supports graphics printing operations in addition to text
printing.
Printing Modes
You can choose from three printing modes:
•   Normal Print Mode
•   Auto Print Mode
•   Printer Controller Mode
   Normal Print Mode
Normally, you can send all or part of the text displayed in a window to a local
printer. To print the window’s text, press the F2 (Print) key.
   Auto Print Mode
Auto print mode immediately sends each line of text received from the host
system to your local printer. The terminal sends the current display line to
the printer when the cursor moves to the next line after a line feed, form feed,
vertical tab, or autowrap.
To turn auto print mode on or off, press Alt   A . You return to normal print
mode when you leave auto print mode.
You can perform normal printing functions in auto print mode.
   Print Controller Mode
Printer controller mode lets a host system send text directly to the local printer,
without displaying the text in the VXT DECterm window. You cannot select
this mode from the keyboard. Applications select this mode by using VT320
programming functions.
The F2 (Print) key does not work in printer controller mode.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 159
Customizing VXT DECterm Windows
8.9 Changing Your Printer Settings

        Printing All or Part of the Window
        You can print all or part of the VXT DECterm window. You can also choose to
        print selected characters. To print the window’s text, press the F2 (Print) key.
        You can choose from the following options.
           Print Full Page
        Normally when you print a VXT DECterm window, the terminal sends the text
        in the main display to the printer.
           Print Full Page + Transcript
        This option prints the text in the transcript (the lines saved off the top of the
        scrolling region), followed by the text in the main display. You can specify the
        number of lines saved by using the Display Options dialog box.
          Print Scroll Region Only
        This option prints the text in the scrolling region of the main display.
          Print Selection Only
        This option prints text that you have selected in the main display.
        Matching Your Printer’s Capabilities
        You can print from character sets that match the capability of your printer.
           Print National Characters Only
        This option prints national replacement characters (NRC) only. Other
        characters are converted to the corresponding national characters, if any;
        otherwise they are not sent.
           Print National + Line Drawing
        This option prints national replacement characters and line-drawing
        characters.
           Print All Characters
        This option prints all characters, including multinational and technical
        characters.




160 Chapter 8
                                                                              99
                                Using VXT 3270 Windows


     This chapter describes how to create and use VXT 3270 windows. The chapter
     covers the following major topics:
     •   VXT 3270 Windows
     •   Before You Start
     •   Creating a VXT 3270 Session
     •   Entering 3270 TE Connection Parameters
     •   Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.1 VXT 3270 Windows
     VXT 3270 windows emulate IBM graphic display terminals. The windows let
     you access application programs on an IBM Systems Network Architecture
     (SNA) host system through a DECnet/SNA gateway. You can have several VXT
     3270 windows displayed at the same time, running different applications. You
     can use your mouse to move between windows.
     All VXT 3270 terminal emulation tasks are performed by the VXT 2000
     windowing terminal, significantly decreasing the load on the host system and
     on the network.
     VXT 3270 windows provide functions similar to the following IBM terminal
     models:
         IBM 3178
         IBM 3179–G and 3192–G
         IBM 3180 models 1–5
         IBM 3270
         IBM 3270–S3G
         IBM 3278 models 1–5



                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 161
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.1 VXT 3270 Windows

            IBM 3279–S3G
        Common features supported by the VXT 3270 include
        •   Active and passive connects
        •   Protected and unprotected fields
        •   Alphanumeric and numeric data
        •   Audible alarm
        •   Intensified display, normal display, and nondisplay characters
        •   Alphanumeric cursor (block cursor)

9.2 Before You Start
        Before you create a VXT 3270 window, you need the following:
            A VXT 3270 software license
            A DECnet address for your terminal, displayed in the Terminal Manager
            window (Section 4.9)
            A DECnet name server address entered in the DECnet Name Translator
            dialog box (Section 4.10)
            A gateway name to enter in the Connection Parameters dialog box
            An access name to enter in the Connection Parameters dialog box

9.3 Creating a VXT 3270 Session
        To create a VXT 3270 session:
        1. Display the Create dialog box (Section 2.2.1).
            a. In the Application box, click on the 3270 button.
            b. In the Transport box, click on the DECnet button.
            c.   In the Host Name or Address box, enter the name or address of the
                 DECnet host to use for the connection.
            d. Click on the       button to save your settings in the Preferred Services
               list.
            e.   Click on Start to start the session.
        2. Enter connection information in the 3270 TE Enter Connection Parameters
           dialog box (Section 9.4).



162 Chapter 9
                                                    Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                 9.4 Entering 3270 TE Connection Parameters

9.4 Entering 3270 TE Connection Parameters
     When you create a VXT 3270 session from the Create dialog box, the terminal
     displays a Connection Parameters dialog box for establishing a connection with
     an IBM host:




                                               TI−03014−RAGS

     To connect to an IBM host, you need to specify a gateway name and one of the
     following:
     •   An access name
     •   A PU name and the Wait button
     •   A PU name and an application name
     For example:
     1. Click on the Gateway box and enter your gateway name.
     2. Click on the Access Name box and enter your access name.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 163
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.4 Entering 3270 TE Connection Parameters

        3. Click on the Save button to save your connection parameters for future
           sessions.
        4. Click on the OK button to establish connection with your host.
        5. A login box appears. Log in to your host system.
        From the Connection Parameters dialog box, you can enter the following
        settings:

           Gateway
        Identifies the name of the DECnet node that is defined as the host node for the
        gateway.
        Example: MARKET

           Access Name
        Identifies the name of the entry in the gateway access name table to use when
        connecting to the SNA network. Access names are set up on the host DECnet
        node for the gateway. The name can be 1 to 16 characters from the set of A to
        Z, 0 to 9, period (.), dollar sign ($), at sign (@), and pound sign (#).
        Example: PAYROLL
        An access name can provide values for the following parameters:
            Application name
            Data
            Logon mode
            PU
            Session address
        If you specify these parameters with the Access Name parameter, they override
        any existing values in the access name table you specified.

           PU Name
        Identifies the name of a particular physical link from the gateway to the IBM
        host. Ask the gateway manager for the appropriate PU value.
        Example: SNA-1

           Session Address
        Identifies the IBM session address used to communicate with the IBM host.
        The gateway manager receives this value from the IBM systems programmer.
        The value is defined by the LOCADDR operand on the ACF/NCP LU macro or
        the VTAM LU macro.
        The address is a decimal number from 0 to 255. You can specify 0 to let the
        gateway select the next available session address.


164 Chapter 9
                                                  Using VXT 3270 Windows
                               9.4 Entering 3270 TE Connection Parameters

Example: 42

   Application Name
Identifies the IBM application that will be the primary logical unit (PLU). The
gateway manager receives this value from the IBM VTAM programmer. The
value is defined in the VTAM APPL statement. The application name can be 1
to 8 characters from the set of A to Z, 0 to 9, period (.), dollar sign ($), at sign
(@), and pound sign (#).
Example: CICS

   Logon Mode
Identifies the name of an entry in the logon mode table defined by the host
IBM system. This entry specifies a selected set of SNA protocol parameters.
The gateway manager receives this value from the IBM VTAM programmer.
The value is defined in the VTAM MODEENT macro. The Logon Mode entry
can be 1 to 8 characters from the set of A to Z, 0 to 9, period (.), dollar sign ($),
at sign (@), and pound sign (#).
Example: T3279M3

   Data
Identifies user data to send to the IBM system as part of the logon request.
The data can be a string of up to 110 ASCII characters.
Some IBM subsystems use values for the Data parameter at VXT 3270 window
startup time to speed the logon process.
Example: JOE

    Authorization Password
Allows access to secured logical units (LUs). Ask your gateway manager for
the value of an authorization password if you need to specify this parameter.
It is relevant only if your version of the DECnet/SNA gateway or VMS/SNA
Gateway supports LU security. The value can be 1 to 32 characters from the
set of A to Z, 0 to 9, period (.), dollar sign ($), at sign (@), and pound sign (#).
Example: 645312

   Terminal Type
Identifies the IBM display station to emulate. The value can be 3192G
(default), 3279S3G, or 3270.
If you specify 3270, the VXT 3270 window emulates a generic 3270 display
station. Graphics will not be displayed, and a smaller font and window size
may be used. Use 3270 to emulate an IBM Model 4 (43 80 window) terminal
                                                            




or an IBM Model 5 (27 132 window) terminal.
                         




                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 165
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.4 Entering 3270 TE Connection Parameters

        Example: 3192G

            [No]Wait
        Causes the VXT 3270 window to wait for an IBM application (PLU) to initiate
        a session. Nowait is the default. The Unformatted Systems Services (USS)
        window may appear when the session is established, depending on the version
        of the gateway or VMS/SNA gateway you are using.
        Wait does not have a value as the other parameters do. If you use the Wait
        parameter, you cannot specify values for the following parameters:
            Application Name
            Data
            Logon Mode

9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window
        After you establish a session establish a session with the IBM host, the
        terminal displays a VXT 3270 TE dialog box. The dialog box provides the
        work area for your session. This section describes how to use the work area to
        perform different tasks. The section covers the following major topics:
        •   Using the VXT 3270 Window Work Area
        •   Entering Data
        •   Editing Data
        •   Printing Text
        •   Copying and Pasting Text
        •   Recording and Playing Back Key Sequences
        •   Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Numbers
        •   Saving Current Settings
        •   Viewing Your Connection Parameters
        •   Using the MB3 Pop-Up Menu
        Chapter 11 describes the basic features of windows and how to use menus.




166 Chapter 9
                                                      Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                                9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.1 Using the VXT 3270 Window Work Area
      The VXT 3270 work area has two sections — the display area and the operator
      information area.




                                                                      TI−03015−RAGS




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 167
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.2 Working in the Display Area
        The display area is where you perform most application-related duties, such as
        entering data and receiving output. The following sections explain some of the
        characteristics of the display area.
        The window
        The VXT 3270 window lets you display different window sizes, which are
        controlled by the IBM host.
        The VXT 3270 window can be unformatted or formatted. An unformatted
        window has no fields. How you enter data in an unformatted window depends
        on the application program you are using. Your IBM application program
        user’s guide gives you instructions for using an unformatted window.
        A formatted window contains two types of fields:
        •   Protected fields prompt you for required data. You cannot alter or add
            to the text in a protected field. If you try to enter data in a protected field,
            the keyboard locks, the terminal bell rings, and the word Inhib appears on
            the status line. To free the keyboard, press Reset.
        •   Unprotected fields are the spaces where you can enter data. When
            displaying a formatted window, the program normally places the cursor
            under the first empty position in an unprotected field. You can enter data
            until the field is full or use the Tab function to move to the start of the next
            unprotected field.
        The Cursor
        The cursor in the display area can take three forms:
        •   The default text cursor is a blinking block. You can use the CrBlnk
            (Cursor Blinking) parameter to select a nonblinking cursor. See
            Section 10.2 to use VXT 3270 parameters.
        •   The selector mouse cursor is a small hand with a pointing finger that
            appears when you use the Selector Mouse function (Section 10.1.4).
        •   A small cross cursor appears for certain graphics applications.




168 Chapter 9
                                                             Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                                       9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.3 Understanding Operator Information
       The operator information area displays status indicators that let you monitor
       the current status of your session. Table 9–1 lists possible status indicators.

       Table 9–1 Status Indicators
       Status
       Indicator   Meaning
       Appl        You are in a session with an application program (an LU–LU session).
       Ext         You are using the Ext function.
       Insert      You are in insert mode.
       Inhib       The software suspended input from your keyboard. This occurs when
                       You try to enter data in a protected field
                       You enter the wrong type of data in a field
                       The VXT 3270 window is communicating with the IBM software after
                       you press a key such as Enter

       O           You are using the numeric lock override function. This indicator is turned
                   off when you press the NumOvr function again.
       P           You are in play mode. A key sequence is being recalled by the Play
                   function.
       Print       The contents of your window are being copied to the printer you specified
                   at startup. The indicator remains displayed until the process is complete.
                   The window is refreshed when the process is complete.
       R           You are in record mode. A key sequence is being recorded.
       SSCP        You are in a session with the IBM control program (an SSCP–LU session).
       SysAvl      You are successfully communicating with the IBM system and can initiate
                   transmission. SysAvl turns off while the VXT 3270 window transmits data
                   to the IBM host.
       Wait        The IBM system is not available for input.


9.5.4 Entering Data
       Unformatted windows
       If your IBM application displays an unformatted window, use the FM key to
       separate entries. Your application guide explains how and when to use this
       key.




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 169
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

        Improper use of some keys causes the keyboard to lock in order to prevent
        input to protected fields. If the keyboard locks, the Inhib status indicator
        appears and you cannot use any keys to enter data. Use the Reset function to
        unlock the keyboard and continue entering data.
        Formatted windows
        When the IBM application displays a formatted window, enter and edit data
        in the unprotected fields only. After you fill an unprotected field with data,
        the application may move the cursor to the start of the next protected or
        unprotected field. You can also move the cursor by using the arrow keys or the
        Tab, BckTab, Home, and Newlin functions (Section 10.2).

9.5.5 Editing Data
        You can edit data in unprotected fields by typing new data over the old data
        (normal mode) or inserting new data into partially filled fields (insert mode).
        You can also use the Delete, ErEof, ErInp, and RubOut functions to change the
        contents of unprotected fields (Section 10.2).
        Using Normal Mode
        Normal mode lets you enter new data or edit existing data. When you enter
        data, the character you type either fills in an empty position or replaces a
        character previously displayed in that position. The cursor then moves to the
        next position. Remember that a space or a blank is a character.
        Using Insert Mode
        Insert mode lets you enter new characters between existing characters in an
        unprotected field.
        Use the Insert function to activate insert mode. Place the cursor under the
        character where you want to insert text. When you insert text, characters
        starting from the cursor position move right.
        You can insert characters in an unprotected field until it is full. If you try to
        insert text after the field is full, the keyboard locks, and Inhib is displayed
        on the Status line. Use the Reset function to exit insert mode and return
        to normal mode. Insert mode is also ended by any Enter, Clear, PA, or PF
        function.

                                               Note
            Some fields that appear to have room for more data may contain one or
            more trailing blank characters that cause the field to fill.




170 Chapter 9
                                                         Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                                   9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.6 Printing Text
       The VXT 3270 Print... function lets you print text from the VXT 3270 window
       to a printer connected to the terminal’s printer port.
       To Print from the File Menu
       To print the contents of an application window, pull down the File Menu and
       choose Print. The VXT 3270 window send the text from the active window to
       the terminal’s printer.

9.5.7 Copying and Pasting Text
       You can copy and paste text in a VXT 3270 window. You can also copy text
       from one window and paste the text into another window. To copy and paste
       text, you use the VXT 3270 window’s Edit menu.
       From the Edit menu, you can perform the following functions:
       Copy
       Choosing this item places the currently selected text into the terminal’s copy
       buffer. You can also use the Select All menu item to select the complete
       window.
       Paste
       Choosing this item sends the contents of the terminal’s copy buffer to the
       cursor location in the window as if it were typed on the keyboard.
       Select All
       Choosing this item places all of the window’s text into the terminal’s copy
       buffer. You can also use the Copy menu item to place selected text from the
       window into the copy buffer.

9.5.8 Selecting Text to Copy
       You can select text a word, a line, or a block at a time. A block can be a single
       character or any number of contiguous characters, up to the complete window.
       You can also use the Select All menu item in the Edit menu to select the
       complete window.
       To select a block of text:
       1. Point to the start of the block.
       2. Press and hold MB1, then drag the pointer to the end of the block.
       3. Release MB1 to indicate the end of the block. The selected text is
          highlighted.
       4. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.


                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 171
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

        To select a single word:
        1. Point to the word.
        2. Double click MB1 to select the word. The selected word is highlighted.
        3. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.
        To select a line of text:
        1. Point to the line.
        2. Triple click MB1 to select the line. The selected line is highlighted.
        3. In the Edit menu, click on the Copy menu item.

9.5.9 Pasting Text
        After you select text and store it in the copy buffer, you can paste the text to
        the text cursor location in the same window or in a different window.
        To paste text:
        1. Place the text cursor where you want to copy the text.
        2. Choose the Paste menu item from the Edit menu of the window that will
           receive the copied text. The terminal copies the text to the cursor position.

9.5.10 Using Quick Copy
        The quick copy feature lets you paste text without storing it in the copy buffer
        or using the Edit menu. There are two ways to perform a quick copy:
        Method 1
        1. Select the text as described in Section 9.5.8.
        2. Place the text cursor where you want to paste the text.
        3. Press and release MB2. If you accidentally move the mouse before
           releasing MB2, method 2 is activated.
        You can use this method to copy text from one window to another. Move the
        input focus to the other window before clicking MB2. To paste into remote
        DECterm windows, use MB3.
        Method 2
        1. Place the text cursor where you want to paste the text.
        2. Point to the start of the text you want to copy.
        3. Press and hold MB2. Drag the pointer to the end of the text to be copied.
           Release MB2 to copy the selected text to the cursor position.


172 Chapter 9
                                                                  Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                                            9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.11 Extending Your Selected Text
      After you select an area of text to copy, you may decide that you wanted to
      copy a larger area. Before you paste text, you can use the mouse or the arrow
      keys to extend the area you have selected.
      To extend your selection with the mouse:
      1. After selecting text with MB1, move the mouse cursor to the position that
         marks the boundary of the area you would like to have selected.
      2. Press the Shift key and click MB1. This extends the initially selected area
         up to the present position of your mouse cursor.
      To extend your selection with the arrow keys:
      After selecting text with MB1, press the Shift key and any arrow key to extend
      your selected text in the direction of the arrow.

9.5.12 Copying and Pasting With the Keyboard Only
      If your mouse is not operating, you can use the keyboard to copy and paste
      text. Table 9–2 lists the keys to use.

      Table 9–2 Keyboard Copy and Paste Keys
      Press...                       To...
       Select                        Define the starting point for selected text.
       Shift Select                  Select the range between the starting point and the current
                                     cursor position. This sequence also deselects any previous
                                     selection.
       Shift F8                      Toggle between add mode and normal mode. The default
                                     mode is normal.
       Shift     , ,
                         ,        Extend the current selection.
       Ctrl /                        Select all.
       Ctrl \                        Deselect all.
       F14                           Paste.
       Ctrl     Insert Here          Do a clipboard copy.
       Shift     Insert Here         Do a clipboard paste.




                                   VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 173
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.13 Recording and Playing Back Key Sequences
        You can save frequently used text and commands, then recall them when
        needed. The VXT 3270 lets you record up to 127 keystrokes on a PF key, then
        play them back using the Playback... function.
        Recording Key Sequences
        To record a key sequence:
        1. Pull down the Commands menu and choose Record... to display the Record
           dialog box.




                           TI−03016−RAGS

        2. Click on the PF key that you want to store your key sequence.
        3. Click on OK. The window displays an R in the operator information area,
           and a message box pops up requesting the key sequence.
        4. Click on OK to dismiss the message box.
        5. Enter the key sequence you want to save.
        6. To record your keystrokes, pull down the Commands menu and choose
           Record... again. Click on OK.



174 Chapter 9
                                                       Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                                 9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

      Canceling a Key Sequence While Recording
      You can cancel a key recording in progress at any time up until you choose
      Record Key a second time. To cancel a recording in progress:
      1. Pull down the Commands menu and choose Cancel Recording. The Cancel
         Recording dialog box appears.
      2. Click on Yes to cancel the Record function.
      Viewing Recorded Key Sequences
      To view currently recorded keystrokes:
      1. Pull down the View menu and choose Recorded Key Sequences. The
         Recorded Key Sequences dialog box appears.
      2. Click on the PF key that contains the keystrokes you want to see. The key
         sequence appears. Items enclosed in angle brackets are function keys.
      3. Click on the Dismiss button to close the dialog box.
      Playing Back Recorded Key Sequences
      Before playing back a recorded key sequence, be sure your cursor is at the
      right place on the application window. If your cursor was in a specific field
      when you recorded a sequence of text and commands, you must be in the same
      field for the playback sequence to work properly. To play back a recorded key
      sequence:
      1. Pull down the Commands menu and choose Playback... to see which PF
         keys have key sequences. The VXT 3270 displays the Playback dialog box.
      2. Click on the PF key that stores the keystrokes you want to play back.
         Then click on OK. The letter P appears in the operator information area
         while the VXT 3270 plays back the key sequence you have chosen.

9.5.14 Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Numbers
      When you use a VXT 3270 window, the numeric keypad keys have default
      functions assigned. If you want to use the keypad to enter numbers, pull down
      the Options menu and select Numeric Keypad. This menu selection is a toggle
      that lets you switch back and forth between entering numbers and functions.
      The toggle indicator next to the Numeric Keypad selection is darkened when
      the keypad’s numeric values are in effect.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 175
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.15 Saving Current Settings
        To save your current settings, choose Save Current Settings from the Options
        pull-down menu.
        When you save the current settings, the terminal saves the settings in your
        terminal’s resource file for future sessions.

9.5.16 Viewing Settings
        The following sections describe how to view
        •   Keyboard layout maps
        •   Function list
        •   Connection parameters
        •   Field attributes

9.5.17 Viewing Keyboard Layout Maps
        Supported Keyboards
        The VXT 3270 supports key function definitions and keyboard layout maps for
        the LK401 keyboard. By default, the VXT 3270 functions map to the LK401-
        style keyboard, and the LK401 layout is the default keyboard map. This
        section explains how to enable key function definitions and access keyboard
        layout maps.
        Interpreting Keyboard Layout Maps
        The left half of the layout map lists function keys and their functions.
        •   A shaded key means you press the Ext key then the character key. The Ext
            key is the period key on the numeric keypad.
        •   The caret (^) symbol in front of a key means you must press the Ctrl key
            along with that key to access the associated function.
        The top and right area of the layout map shows the functions assigned to
        keypad keys. For shaded functions, press the Ext key first.
        Viewing Your Keyboard Layout Map
        To view the keyboard layout map for your LK401 keyboard, pull down the View
        menu and choose Key Definitions.




176 Chapter 9
                                                         Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                                   9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.18 Viewing the Function List
       Many of the VXT 3270’s keys have default function definitions. Section 10.2
       provides detailed explanations of VXT 3270 functions and their default
       mappings. You can redefine these functions so that they more closely match
       your particular needs. To see how VXT 3270 functions are mapped, you can
       check the VXT 3270 Function List.
       To view the Function List, pull down the View menu and choose the Function
       List menu item. The 3270 TE Function List dialog box appears. The Function
       List dialog box displays how functions map to the keys on your keyboard.
       If you change any key definitions during a session, those changes are
       automatically reflected in the function list when you click on the Update
       button.
       The Dismiss button closes the dialog box.

9.5.19 Viewing Your Connection Parameters
       You can check current connection parameters at any time by pulling down the
       View menu and choosing Connection Parameters. The Connection Parameters
       dialog box appears, showing the parameters as they are currently set. Click on
       Dismiss when you finish viewing the parameters.

9.5.20 Viewing Field Attributes
       Field attributes are characters that appear at the start of a field to indicate
       how the field displays on the window: at normal intensity, at high intensity, or
       invisibly. You can display field attributes three ways:
       •   Choose the Field Attributes menu item from the View menu.
       •   Choose the View Attributes menu item from the MB3 pop-up menu.
       •   Define a key to enable or disable the DspAtt function.
       Table 9–3 describes the attribute characters.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 177
Using VXT 3270 Windows
9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window


        Table 9–3 Field Attributes
        Field Attribute    Meaning
        n                  Unprotected field with normal intensity
        N                  Protected field with normal intensity
        d                  Unprotected field, detectable with a light pen
        D                  Protected field, detectable with a light pen
        h                  Unprotected field with high intensity
        H                  Protected field with high intensity
        i                  Unprotected nondisplay field
        I                  Protected nondisplay field


        To remove the field attributes from your window, display the MB3 pop-up menu
        again. The View Attributes selection has a toggle indicator next to it, showing
        that field attributes are turned on. Choose View Attributes again to turn them
        off.

9.5.21 Using the MB3 Pop-Up Menu
        The MB3 pop-up menu provides you with quick access to certain functions also
        found on pull-down menus. Table 9–4 lists the MB3 pop-up menu items and
        their corresponding location on the main menus:

        Table 9–4 Quick Access to Functions: MB3 Pop-Up Menu
        MB3 Pop-Up Menu            Main Menu
        Key Definitions            View menu
        View Attributes            View menu
        Numeric Keypad             Options menu
        Print                      File menu
        Record...                  Commands menu
        Playback...                Commands menu
        Cancel Recording           Commands menu




178 Chapter 9
                                                      Using VXT 3270 Windows
                                                9.5 Using the VXT 3270 Window

9.5.22 Exiting from a VXT 3270 Window
      To exit the VXT 3270 window, pull down the File menu and choose Exit. You
      can also press Ctrl Z to exit your session.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 179
                                                                              10
                                                                                10
                     Customizing VXT 3270 Windows


        This chapter describes how to customize VXT 3270 windows and use keyboard
        functions. The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •   Customizing the VXT 3270 Window
        •   Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions
        •   Translation Table

10.1 Customizing the VXT 3270 Window
        The VXT 3270 window lets you define keys and customize certain display
        features such as the font size and window title. You can also set the mouse to
        perform certain light pen functions. This section describes the following topics:
        •   Customizing Key Definitions
        •   Saving and Loading Custom Key Definitions
        •   Modifying VXT 3270 Window Options
        •   Using the Selector Mouse Function

10.1.1 Customizing Key Definitions
        When you use a VXT 3270 window, certain keys perform specific IBM 3270
        functions. You can customize key definitions to suit your needs. This section
        describes how to assign and delete custom key definitions.




180 Chapter 10
                                          Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
                                   10.1 Customizing the VXT 3270 Window

Assigning Custom Key Definitions
To assign your own key definitions, pull down the Options menu and choose
the Define Key... menu item. The Define Key dialog box looks like this:




                                                    TI−03017−RAGS

This figure shows an example of the Dup function being assigned to the Ctrl   Y
key sequence.
To Assign a Key Definitions
1. In the Key Name list box, click on the key you want to define. To define Ctrl
   key or extend+ key sequences, click on the Extend or Control option button
   first.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 181
Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
10.1 Customizing the VXT 3270 Window

        2. The Function or Character box contains a list of functions (left) and
           characters (right). Click on the name of the function or character that
           you want to assign to the key you just selected. Click on Apply to assign
           the function or character to the key.
        3. Repeat this procedure to create as many custom key definitions as you
           want.
        4. Click on OK to dismiss the dialog box.
        Your new key definitions remain in effect for the current session. to create a
        permanent file of your key definitions, choose the Save Key Definitions... menu
        item from the File menu.
        Deleting Custom Key Definitions
        To delete custom key definitions:
        1. Pull down the Options menu and choose Delete Key... to display the Delete
           Key dialog box.
        2. Click on the key whose function you want to delete. Click on the Extend or
           Control button if you are deleting a Ctrl key or extend+ key function.
        3. Click on Apply to delete the key definition.
        4. Repeat this procedure for each key function you want to delete.
        5. Click on OK to dismiss the dialog box.

10.1.2 Saving and Loading Custom Key Definitions
        You can save your customized key definitions for future sessions. The terminal
        loads your saved key definitions when you start a new VXT 3270 window or
        choose the Last Saved Key Definitions menu item from the File menu. You can
        also return to the default key definitions at any time.
        Saving Key Definitions
        To save your customized key definitions:
        From the VXT 3270 window, pull down the File menu and choose the Save
        Key Definitions menu item. Your customized key definitions are saved in the
        terminal’s resource file.
        Loading Customized or Default Key Definitions
        You can recall the last set of key definitions you saved whenever you need
        them. You can also recall the system-default key definitions when needed. For
        example, you may want to use the default key definitions for some tasks, then
        switch to your customized definitions for other tasks.


182 Chapter 10
                                                Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
                                         10.1 Customizing the VXT 3270 Window

      To load customized or default key definitions:
      1. In the VXT 3270 dialog box, pull down the File menu and choose Load Key
         Definitions.
      2. To use customized keys, choose Last Saved Key Definitions.
         To use system-default keys, choose Default Key Definitions.
         If the definitions cannot be loaded, the session continues with the previous
         definitions still in use.

10.1.3 Modifying VXT 3270 Window Options
      The Window Options dialog box lets you change the font size used in
      application windows. You can also change the window title and icon name
      of the VXT 3270 dialog box.
      To view the Window Options dialog box, pull down the Options menu and
      choose the Window... menu item. The Window Options dialog box looks like
      this:




                                                 TI−03018−RAGS

      If you are running in 3270 emulation mode, you can change any of the settings
      listed in the dialog box. You cannot change the font height in 3279S3G or
      3192G emulation mode.
      To change the font height or width:
      Click on the button in the Font Height or Font Width box to display a pop-up
      menu of choices.
      To change the Window Title or Icon Name:
      Click on the Window Title or Icon Name box and enter your text.
      To apply your changes, click on Apply.


                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 183
Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
10.1 Customizing the VXT 3270 Window

        To apply your choices and dismiss the dialog box, click on OK.

10.1.4 Using the Selector Mouse Function
        The Selector Mouse function lets you use your mouse to perform selection and
        attention operations provided by a selector light pen. When you use Selector
        Mouse, the mouse pointer appears as a small hand with a pointing finger.
        To use the Selector Mouse function, pull down the Options menu and choose
        Selector Mouse. This menu selection is a toggle switch that lets you go back
        and forth between Selector Mouse and normal mouse operation. A toggle
        indicator appears next to the Selector Mouse selection when it is in use.

                                                      Note
            You cannot access the MB3 pop-up menu within the display area while
            you are using the Selector Mouse function. To access the MB3 pop-up
            menu, move the mouse pointer to the operator information area.



10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions
        This section describes available VXT 3270 keyboard functions and the
        default keys that perform these functions. To customize key functions, see
        Section 10.1.
        The VXT Terminal Manager’s Customize Keyboard dialog box contains a
        Keyboard Type scroll box. The Keyboard Type setting has no effect on the key
        definitions used in the VXT 3270 window.
        Table 10–1 lists default key functions on the standard LK401 ANSI keyboard.

        Table 10–1 VXT 3270 Window — Default Key Functions
        Function                Default Key or Key Combination
        Attn                    F19 or Ext+ A
        BckTab                  F12 or Ctrl   H
        Clear                   Ext+ F20 or Ext+ Enter
        CrBlnk                  F17


        Ext = the period key on the numeric keypad.
        KP = keypad.

                                                                 (continued on next page)



184 Chapter 10
                                                       Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
                                              10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions


Table 10–1 (Cont.) VXT 3270 Window — Default Key Functions
Function                Default Key or Key Combination
Defkey                  Ctrl      K
Delete                      Next Screen
DspAtt                  Ext+ F17 or Ctrl V
DUP                     Ext+ F12 or Ext+ *
DvCncl                  Ext+ Remove
Enter                   Do or Enter
ErEof                       F18
ErInp                   Ext+ F18 or Ext+KP -
Exit                        F10 or Ctrl   Z
Ext                     KP .
FM                      Ext+ F13 or Ext+ ;
Help                        Help or Ext+ H
Home                        F13 or Ext+ B
Horizontal Control            and    




Insert                  Ext+ PF4
Logical NOT             Ext+ N
Logical OR              Ext+ O
Newlin                      Return or Ctrl    M
NumOvr                      Remove or Ext+ J
PA1                         PF4
PA2                     KP -
PA3                     KP ,
PF1                         PF1
PF2                         PF2
PF3                         PF3
PF4                     KP 7
PF5                     KP 8
PF6                     KP 9

Ext = the period key on the numeric keypad.
KP = keypad.

                                                                 (continued on next page)



                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 185
Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions


        Table 10–1 (Cont.) VXT 3270 Window — Default Key Functions
        Function                Default Key or Key Combination
        PF7                     KP 4
        PF8                     KP 5
        PF9                     KP 6
        PF10                    KP 1
        PF11                    KP 2
        PF12                    KP 3
        PF13                    Ext+ PF1
        PF14                    Ext+ PF2
        PF15                    Ext+ PF3
        PF16                    Ext+KP 7
        PF17                    Ext+KP 8
        PF18                    Ext+KP 9
        PF19                    Ext+KP 4
        PF20                    Ext+KP 5
        PF21                    Ext+KP 6
        PF22                    Ext+KP 1
        PF23                    Ext+KP 2
        PF24                    Ext+KP 3
        Play                     Insert Here
        Print                   F11 or Ext+ P
        Record                  Ext+ Insert Here
        Reset                   KP 0
        RubOut                  <x
        Save                    Ext+ V
        Select                  Ext+ Select
        SelTab                   Prev Screen
        SysReq                  Ext+ F19
        Tab                     Tab


        Ext = the period key on the numeric keypad.
        KP = keypad.

                                                                 (continued on next page)



186 Chapter 10
                                                      Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
                                             10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions


      Table 10–1 (Cont.) VXT 3270 Window — Default Key Functions
      Function                Default Key or Key Combination
      Vertical Control             and
      Warp                    Ext+ w

      Ext = the period key on the numeric keypad.
      KP = keypad.


      If the Keyboard Is Locked
      Improper use of some keys causes the keyboard to lock. For example, if you try
      to enter data in a protected field, the keyboard may lock. If the keyboard locks,
      the status indicator Inhib appears, and you cannot use any keys to enter data.
      Use the Reset function to unlock the keyboard and resume using it.
      If you need additional information about the VXT 3270 window key functions,
      refer to these IBM documents:
      •   IBM 3270 Information Display System
      •   IBM 3270 Information Display System: Operator’s Guide
      •   IBM 3270 Information Display System: 3278 Display Station Operator’s
          Guide
      •   IBM 3179-G/3192-G Color Graphics Display Station Description

10.2.1 Key Functions Defined
      Attn
      The Attn function requests the attention of the IBM application program
      that you are running. Attn sends an SNA SIGNAL command to the IBM
      application. See your application’s user guide to determine the program’s
      response.
      BckTab
      The BckTab function moves the cursor backward.
      In a formatted window, the cursor moves to the beginning of the unprotected
      field it is in or to the beginning of the preceding unprotected field. If the cursor
      is in the first position of the first unprotected field, the cursor moves to the first
      position of the last unprotected field in the window.
      In an unformatted window, the cursor returns to the first position on the
      window.




                                   VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 187
Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions

        Clear
        The Clear function clears the window contents and moves the cursor to the
        first position in the window. When you use Clear, the software notifies the
        application that this function is being used.
        Crblnk
        The CrBlnk function lets you turn cursor blinking on and off. By default, the
        cursor blinks.
        Defkey
        The Defkey function lets you define keys during an active session. When you
        use Defkey, the terminal displays the Define Key dialog box.
        Delete
        The Delete function deletes the character at the cursor position. The cursor
        remains where it is, and characters to the right of the cursor in the same field
        move one position to the left. The end of the field fills with null characters.
        DspAtt
        The DspAtt (display attributes) function turns visible attribute mode on and
        off. You use this mode of operation to display the field attribute characters at
        the beginning of fields (Table 9–3).
        DUP
        The DUP (duplicate) function lets you enter the same value in the same field
        on different forms without having to repeat the entry for each form. After
        entering the value in the first form, use DUP when you come to the same field
        on other forms. The application fills these fields with the same value. See your
        application’s user guide for details on using the DUP function.
        When you use the DUP function, the window displays an asterisk ( ).
        DvCncl
        The DvCncl (device cancel) function lets you cancel a Record function at any
        point.
        Enter
        The Enter function sends the data you type to the application running on
        the IBM host. While data is being sent, the keyboard locks and the window
        displays the Inhib status indicator Inhib. Usually, the application releases the
        keyboard after it finishes processing your data.
        ErEof
        The ErEof (erase to end of field) function erases the contents of the current
        field, from the cursor to the end of the field. The cursor remains in the same
        location.


188 Chapter 10
                                          Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
                                 10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions

ErInp
In formatted windows, the ErInp (erase input) function clears all data in
unprotected fields and moves the cursor to the first position in the first
unprotected field.
In unformatted windows, ErInp clear all data and moves the cursor to the first
position in the window.
You can use Record + ErInp to remove all recorded key sequences.
Exit
The Exit function exits the VXT 3270 window. Communications with the IBM
host ends, including any data exchange in progress.
Ext
The Ext (extended function) key lets you access the second function of another
key. You press Ext, then press the other key. The Ext key is the period key on
the numeric keypad.
When you press Ext, the window displays the Ext status indicator.

                                     Note
   If you press Ext accidentally, you can press Reset to cancel its effect.


FM
The FM (field mark) function marks the end of a field on an unformatted
window or the end of part of an unprotected field on a formatted window. See
your application’s user guide for specific uses.
When you use FM, your window displays a semicolon (;).
Help
The Help function displays your current keyboard layout. This function is
identical to the Keyboard Layout selection on the View menu.
Home
The Home function repositions the cursor to the first position in the first
unprotected field on the window.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 189
Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions

        Left and Right Arrow Keys
        The     and    keys let you move the cursor to the left or right without
        changing data you have already entered.
        If you use the   key when the cursor is at the end of a line, the cursor
        automatically moves down to the start of the next line.
        If you use the  key when the cursor is at the beginning of a line, the cursor
        automatically moves up to the end of the previous line.
        Insert
        The Insert function enables Insert mode, which lets you edit data by
        entering new characters between existing characters in an unprotected field
        (Section 9.5.4). When you use Insert, the window displays the Insert status
        indicator.
        Use Reset to return your window to Normal mode. Using any Clear, Enter, PA,
        or PF function also returns your window to Normal mode.
        If the keyboard locks when you try to insert characters into a field that looks
        empty, there may be trailing spaces in that field. Use the ErEof function to
        erase these spaces.
        Logical NOT
        The use of the Logical NOT function is controlled by the IBM application.
        Logical OR
        The vertical bar ( ) represents the IBM symbol for a Logical OR. The use of the
                         




        Logical OR is controlled by the IBM application.
        Newlin
        The Newlin (new line) function moves the cursor to the first unprotected
        position on the next line of your window. If there are no unprotected fields on
        the window, the cursor moves to the first location in the window. If the window
        has no fields, the cursor moves to the beginning of the next line.
        NumOvr
        The NumOvr (numeric lock override) function is a toggle switch that lets you
        enter nonnumeric characters into numeric fields. When you use NumOvr, the
        window displays the O status indicator.
        PA1 to PA3
        The program access keys PA1 to PA3 are defined by the application you are
        using. These keys request attention from the IBM application without sending
        any data. See your application’s user guide for the function of these keys.




190 Chapter 10
                                          Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
                                 10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions

PF1 to PF24
The program function keys PF1 to PF24 are defined by the application you
are using. They request attention from the application and send the data
entered to the host. The PF keys are coded by the application to perform
related application functions. See your application’s user guide for PF key
assignments.
Play
The Play function lets you recall text and commands that you stored in a PF
key by using the Record function. To recall a sequence, press the Play key
followed by the PF key that stores the sequence. The Play function executes
any commands included in the sequence.
When you use the Play function, the window displays the P status indicator.
Print
Use Print to send the contents of your window to the terminal’s printer. For
more information, see Section 9.5.6. When you use Print, the window displays
the Print status indicator.
Record
Use Record to store a keystroke sequence in a specific PF key. Press Record,
choose a PF key, enter the keystroke sequence, then press Record again.
You can save a up to 127 keystrokes on a PF key. When you use the Record
function, the window displays the R status indicator R.
You cannot record the following functions as a part of your keystroke sequence:
•   Defkey
•   DvCncl
•   Play
•   Record
•   Save
•   SysReq
To recall the keystroke sequence, use the Play function.
To cancel a Record function in progress, use the DvCncl function.
To erase all previously recorded sequences, use Record + ErInp.
You can also record keystrokes by using the Record Keys selection from the
MB3 pop-up menu (Section 9.5.13).




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 191
Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions

        Reset
        Use Reset to return your keyboard to Normal mode after using Insert mode.
        Also,
        You can also use Reset to unlock the keyboard if you tried to enter data into a
        protected or a full field, or you tried to enter the wrong type of data into a field.
        Reset removes the Inhib status indicator. The cursor remains where it is and
        the window remains unchanged.
        RubOut
        The RubOut function erases the character to the left of the cursor and moves
        the cursor to that position.
        Save
        The Save function lets you save any key definitions you have redefined during
        a session.
        Select
        The Select function lets you choose items from a menu, table, or list, then
        notify the application of your selection. Use the vertical and horizontal control
        keys to place the cursor on the field designator character, then use Select. See
        the appropriate IBM manual for more information.
        SelTab
        The SelTab function repositions the cursor to the first character position of the
        next select-key detectable field (protected or unprotected) with a designator
        character. SelTab works the same as the IBM Selectable Field Tab key. See
        the appropriate IBM manual for more information.
        SysReq
        The SysReq (System Request) function lets you shift between the application
        program (LU-LU session) and the control program (SSCP-LU session). When
        you are in an LU–LU session, the window displays the Appl indicator. When
        you are in the SSCP–LU session, the window displays an SSCP indicator. The
        window in your LU-LU session is refreshed when you return to it by using
        SysReq.
        Tab
        The Tab function moves the cursor to the first character location of the next
        unprotected field on your window. If the window has no fields, Tab moves the
        cursor to the first location on the window.
        If you press Tab when the cursor is within the last unprotected field in the
        window, the cursor moves to the first position of the first unprotected field on
        the window.


192 Chapter 10
                                                Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
                                       10.2 Using VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions

      Up and Down Arrow Keys
      The     and      keys let you move the cursor up or down on your window
      without altering data already entered.
      If you use the   key when the cursor is at the top of the window, the cursor
      moves to the same column at the bottom of the window.
      If you use the    key when the cursor is at the bottom of the window, the
      cursor moves to the same column at the top of the window.
      Warp
      By default, the VXT 3270 supports warping. When using certain applications,
      the mouse pointer shifts (or warps) to a new position on the window. You can
      use the Warp function to turn warping on or off.

10.3 Translation Table
      The VXT 3270’s built-in translation table contains a modified version of
      the ISO-Latin character set, meant mainly for use in North America. The
      ISO-Latin to Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code (EBCDIC)
      table translates the ISO-Latin characters you generate to the EBCDIC
      characters that your IBM application uses. The EBCDIC to ISO-Latin table
      then translates the EBCDIC characters generated by the IBM application back
      into the appropriate ISO-Latin characters.
      The following figure shows the left and right halves of the 8-bit code table for
      the modified ISO-Latin character set. To determine the hexadecimal code for
      the character you want, locate the character and then combine the number
      or letter in its row with the number or letter in its column. For example, the
      letter A is represented by the hexadecimal code 41.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 193
Customizing VXT 3270 Windows
10.3 Translation Table




                       TI−03019−RAGS




194 Chapter 10
                                                                             11
                                                                            11
                                                      Using Windows


     This chapter describes how to use windows, menus, dialog boxes, and window
     icons on your terminal.
     The chapter covers the following major topics:
     •   Using the Mouse
     •   Working with Windows
     •   The Window Menu
     •   Choosing Items from Pull-Down Menus
     •   Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes
     •   Using Scroll Bars

11.1 Using the Mouse
     When you work with windowing applications, you use your mouse to perform
     many operations—from making menu selections to manipulating windows on
     the screen. Your mouse lets you move quickly through windowing applications.
     When you roll the mouse across your mouse pad, you move the pointer on
     the screen. If you run out of space on the pad, you can pick up and move the
     mouse without moving the pointer.
     The mouse has three buttons:
         MB1 (mouse button 1) on the left
         MB2 in the middle
         MB3 on the right




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 195
Using Windows
11.1 Using the Mouse

        This button arrangement normally suits right-handed users. If you are left-
        handed, you can reverse the position of MB1 and MB3 by changing the Button
        Arrangement setting in the Customize Pointer dialog box (Chapter 3).




                                                    MB1
                                         MB2
                             MB3




                                                                    LJ-01641-TI0


        You can perform six basic actions with the mouse.
        Point            Move the mouse across the mouse pad until the pointer is where you
                         want the next action to occur.
        Click            Quickly press and release MB1. You should hear and feel a faint
                         click.
        Press            Point to a menu name, scroll bar, or other action item that you want
                         to perform. Without moving the mouse, press and hold MB1.
        Drag             Point to an object, such as a window outline. Press and hold MB1
                         (or MB2), move the pointer to drag the object, then release MB1.
        Double click     Point to an object and click MB1 twice in quick succession.
        Shift click      Point to an object. Press and hold the Shift key and click MB1. Then
                         release the Shift key.
        You will get a chance to practice these movements when you open your first
        session.
        Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse
        If you prefer, you can use your keyboard to navigate through windows, display
        menus, and make selections from menus and dialog boxes. See Section 15.5 for
        a list of keyboard commands.



196 Chapter 11
                                                                    Using Windows
                                                              11.1 Using the Mouse

11.1.1 Pointer Shapes
      Usually the pointer is an arrow, but you can choose a different shape. (See
      Section 3.5.) The pointer also changes shape when you perform certain actions,
      to reflect the type of action or state of the action. For example, the pointer
      may become an hourglass or a wristwatch to indicate a working action is in
      progress.


                    Pointing



                    Working


                    Moving

                ZK−3573A−GE



11.2 Working with Windows
      This section describes the basic techniques for manipulating windows:
      •   What Are Windows?
      •   Selecting the Active Window
      •   Moving Windows
      •   Changing the Size of Windows
      •   Reducing Windows to Icons
      •   Raising and Lowering Stacked Windows
      You can also perform many of these functions from the window menu. See
      Section 11.3.

11.2.1 What Are Windows?
      A window is an area on your screen that represents all or part of an
      application. You can use windows to view several applications at once. You can
      move windows on the screen, organizing information for easier use. The VXT
      DECterm window is one of several windows available on your terminal.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 197
Using Windows
11.2 Working with Windows



                    1                                2              3       4   5


                                        Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

                        File   Edit   Commands   Options    Print                   6



                                                    10                              7

                                                                        8
            11




                                                     9                  LJ−01180C−RAGS


                 The window menu button displays a window menu that lets you perform
                 common window management functions.
                 The window title identifies the function of a window. For a main window,
        




                 it usually contains the name of the application. For a dialog box, it may
                 also contain specific information about the use of the window.
                 The title bar includes the window title and is used for moving the window
        




                 on the screen.
                 The minimize button lets you shrink a window to an icon. An icon is a
                 small graphic representation of the window.
        
                 The maximize button is a toggle button that lets you enlarge a window to
                 its maximum size or return it to its normal size.
        
                 The menu bar contains pull-down menus for the application’s commands.
                 You can display the menus and choose menu items.
        
                 The scroll bar at the right allows you to view text or graphics that do not
                 fit in the window.
        
                 The resize border surrounds an application window and lets you resize
                 the application’s window.
        
                 The window frame includes the resize border and title bar.
        
                 The work area displays the application’s text and graphics.
        
                 The matte is an optional decorative border between the window frame and
                 the work area.



198 Chapter 11
                                                                       Using Windows
                                                            11.2 Working with Windows

11.2.2 Selecting the Active Window
      The terminal lets you open several windows on the screen. When you have
      several windows open at one time, you give input focus to a window by
      selecting it. Only one window can have input focus at a time. Input focus
      activates the window, allowing you to enter information in the window from
      your keyboard or mouse.
      To select a window:
      1. Point to any location in the window or its title bar.
      2. Click MB1.
      The window’s title bar and frame is highlighted to indicate it has input focus.
      Any text you type appears in this window, if your application allows text entry.
      When you select another window, the first window’s title bar and frame is no
      longer highlighted.

        Window With Input Focus

                            Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

          File   Edit   Commands    Options   Print



        Window Without Input Focus
                              Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

          File   Edit   Commands    Options    Print

                                                          LJ−01221C−RAGS


      Optional Method: You can also set the terminal to make a window active
      simply by moving the pointer into the window. See Section 12.3.

11.2.3 Moving Windows
      When you display several windows, they may overlap one another on the
      screen. You can rearrange the windows to make them visible.




                                VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 199
Using Windows
11.2 Working with Windows


                   Title Bar

                                    Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

            File     Edit      Commands     Options   Print

                                                                LJ−01122C−RAGS


        To move a window by the title bar:
        1. Point to the window’s title bar.
        2. Press and hold MB1. The pointer changes to a cross, and an outline of the
           window is displayed.
        3. While holding MB1, drag the outline to the new location.
        4. Release MB1. The window moves to the new location.

11.2.4 Changing the Size of Windows
        You can make windows larger, to display more information. You can also make
        windows smaller, so you can view more applications.
        There are three ways to change the size of your windows.
        •    Window frame
        •    Maximize button
        •    Window menu
        To use the window menu, see Section 11.3.
            Window Frame                                        Maximize Button

                                   Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

            File    Edit       Commands    Options    Print
                                                                LJ−01123C−RAGS


        To make a window larger or smaller:
        1. Point to a location on the window’s frame. Depending on the location
           chosen, the pointer changes to a resize cursor.




200 Chapter 11
                                                                        Using Windows
                                                             11.2 Working with Windows




                  ZK−3572A−GE

      2. Press and hold MB1. An outline of the window is displayed.
      3. While holding MB1, drag the window outline to make the window the size
         you want. You can move vertically, horizontally, or diagonally to change
         one or both dimensions of the window in any direction. The window outline
         changes size as you move.
      4. Release MB1. The size of the window changes to the outline size.
      To maximize the size of a window:
      You can enlarge a window to cover the entire screen by using the maximize
      button.
      1. Point to the window’s maximize button.
      2. Click MB1. The window expands to fill the entire screen.
      Pressing the maximize button again returns the window to its normal size.

11.2.5 Reducing Windows to Icons
      You can reduce a window to an icon by using the minimize button. Minimizing
      a window frees up space on your screen to run other applications. The
      application represented by the icon continues to run in memory and remains
      easily accessible.
                                                          Minimize Button

                           Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

         File   Edit   Commands     Options   Print
                                                         LJ−01639C−RAGS


      To reduce a window to an icon:
      1. Point to the window’s minimize button.
      2. Click MB1. The window closes, and its icon is displayed at the lower right
         of the screen.



                                  VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 201
Using Windows
11.2 Working with Windows

        To restore a window from an icon:
        1. Point to the icon on the screen.
        2. Double click MB1. The window is restored at the position where it was
           minimized.
        To rearrange icons in the lower-right portion of the screen:
        1. Point to the icon.
        2. Press and hold MB1. A moving pointer and outline is displayed.
        3. While holding MB1, drag the icon to the new location. The outline follows
           the moving pointer, showing where the icon will be repositioned.
        4. Release MB1. The icon moves to the new location.

11.2.6 Raising and Lowering Stacked Windows
        When windows overlap, you can view partially concealed windows by changing
        their stacking order rather than moving windows around on the screen.
        You can raise a window to the top of the stack by clicking on any visible portion
        of the lower window. Clicking on the window also gives it input focus.
        You can also lower the top window to the bottom of the stack by using the
        window menu.

11.3 The Window Menu
        The window menu provides another method for performing window
        management commands, such as sizing, moving, and stacking windows.
        To display the window menu, click on the window menu button at the left
        corner of the title bar.
        You can also display the window menu by clicking on MB3 in the window
        border.




202 Chapter 11
                                                                 Using Windows
                                                          11.3 The Window Menu


Window Menu Button

                     Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1

                             Options   Print
  Move         Alt+F7
  Size         Alt+F8
  Minimize     Alt+F9
  Maximize     Alt+F10
  Lower        Alt+F3
  Workspace
  Close        Alt+F4
                                                  LJ−01124C−RAGS


From the window menu, you can choose the following menu items. Some items
may not apply to a particular window.
Restore
To restore a window from an icon:
1. Point to the window’s icon at the lower right of the screen.
2. Click MB1. The window menu is displayed.
3. Choose the Restore menu item. The window is restored at the position
   where it was minimized.
Move
When you choose the Move menu item, a moving pointer and outline of the
window is displayed. To move the window:
1. Move the window outline to the new location.
2. Click MB1. The window moves to the new location.
Size
When you choose the Size menu item, a moving pointer and window outline
are displayed. To resize the window:
1. Move the pointer vertically, horizontally, or diagonally until the window
   outline is the desired size.
2. Click MB1. The window size changes to the new size.
Minimize
When you choose the Minimize menu item, the window closes and its icon
appears at the lower right of the screen.



                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 203
Using Windows
11.3 The Window Menu

        Maximize
        When you choose the Maximize menu item, the window expands to fill the
        entire screen.
        Lower
        When you choose the Lower menu item, you lower the top window to the
        bottom of the stack.
        Workspace
        The Workspace menu item provides access to a submenu with more choices for
        stacking windows and icons. See Section 11.3.1.
        Close
        When you choose the Close menu item, the window closes.

11.3.1 Using the Workspace Submenu
        The workspace submenu lets you control the stacking order of your windows
        and icons. You can also access the Options submenu to customize window
        features. After you customize features, you can save your settings by restarting
        the window manager from the workspace submenu.
        To view the workspace submenu:
        1. Click on the window menu button to display the window menu.
        2. Click on the Workspace menu item to display the workspace submenu.

                          Host Telnet VXT DECterm 1




                                                      LJ−01125B−RAGS




204 Chapter 11
                                                             Using Windows
                                                      11.3 The Window Menu

You can also display this menu as a pop-up menu, by clicking on MB1 (for left-
handed buttons) or MB3 (for right-handed buttons) in the screen background.
From the workspace submenu you can choose any of the following menu items:
Shuffle Up
The Shuffle Up menu item lets you move the bottom window to the top of the
stack, giving that window input focus.
Shuffle Down
The Shuffle Down menu item lets you move the top window to the bottom of
the stack.
Shuffle Up and Shuffle Down are useful for uncovering small windows that are
completely concealed by larger windows.
Next Window
The Next Window menu item gives input focus to the next window in the stack.

Previous Window
The Previous Window menu item gives input focus to the previous window in
the stack.
Pack Icons
The Pack Icons menu item lets you stack the icons in order at the lower right
of the screen.
Options
The Options menu item lets you display a submenu with items for checking
and controlling the settings for many of the window manager’s features.
Chapter 12 describes the options submenu.
Restart...
The Restart... menu item lets you save your window manager settings and
restart the window manager. When you choose the Restart... menu item, the
terminal displays a confirmation box. Chapter 12 further describes the Restart
menu item.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 205
Using Windows
11.4 Working With Menus

11.4 Working With Menus
        Menus display a list of related items that you can choose from. Some menu
        items perform actions, while others display screens with more information to
        choose from, such as dialog boxes. The terminal’s windows use three types of
        menus:
        •   Pull-down menus
        •   Pop-up menus
        •   Options menus
        Using the Keyboard to Choose Menus and Menu Items
        If you prefer, you can perform menu actions from the keyboard, without using
        a mouse. There are three methods:
        •   Each menu name and menu item has an underlined letter, called a
            mnemonic. To display a menu or activate a menu item, you can press
            the Alt key and the underlined letter on the keyboard at the same time. A
            menu remains displayed after you release the keys. You can then use the
            arrow keys to move to different menu items and menus.
        •   Some menu items in the Window Manager window menu list an
            accelerator key sequence on the right. You can use the accelerator key
            sequence to perform that menu function. You do not have to display the
            menu to perform the function.
        •   You can use the arrow keys to move the pointer around the screen. Press
            Shift Ctrl F3 to turn this feature on or off. You can use the following keys to
            perform mouse functions:
             Select   MB1
             Prev     MB2
             Next     MB3

        For more key sequences, see Section 15.5.

11.4.1 Choosing Items from Pull-Down Menus
        The menu bar of a window lists the names of menus for that application.
        To display a pull-down menu:
        Point to the menu name, then click on MB1. The menu remains displayed
        until you choose a menu item or click MB1 outside the menu.




206 Chapter 11
                                                                          Using Windows
                                                                 11.4 Working With Menus

      Here is an example    of a pull-down menu:
                   VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager



                    VXT V2.1 Terminal Manager




                                                LJ−01141C−RAGS


      Some pull-down menus list commands. Others list the names of items you can
      work with.
      If a menu item is followed by three periods (...), choosing that item displays a
      dialog box. If a menu item is followed by an arrowhead ( ) , choosing that item
      displays a submenu.
      To choose an item from a pull-down menu:
      1. On the menu bar, point to the name of the menu you want to display.
      2. Click MB1 to pull down the menu.
      3. Move the pointer to the menu item you want.
      4. Click MB1 to choose the menu item.
      If you change your mind while looking at a pull-down menu, drag the pointer
      outside the menu and release MB1. The menu disappears, and no action is
      taken.

11.4.2 Choosing Items from Pop-Up Menus
      Pop-up menus provide quick access to functions that are also available on
      pull-down menus.
      The terminal provides a pop-up Workspace menu (Chapter 12) for managing
      windows and a pop-up VXT Create menu (Section 2.2.8) for quickly starting
      sessions. To display the Workspace menu, click and hold MB1 anywhere on the
      screen background outside windows. To display the VXT Create menu, click
      and hold MB2 anywhere on the screen background. Here is a sample VXT
      Create pop-up menu:




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 207
Using Windows
11.4 Working With Menus


                 VXT Create
          DECnet 3270
          Message Box
         Terminal Manager
          LAT X Session mynode

                      LJ−03020−RAGS


        Some host applications you use may also provide pop-up menus within their
        window. In most cases, you click and hold MB1 within the window area to
        display the pop-up menu.
        To choose items from pop-up menus:
        1. While holding the designated mouse button down, drag the pointer to the
           menu item you want.
        2. Release the mouse button.
            If you decide not to choose an item, drag the pointer outside the menu
            before releasing the mouse button.

11.4.3 Choosing Items from Options Menus in Dialog Boxes
        An options menu is a type of pop-up menu used in dialog boxes. The dialog box
        displays the current selection from the menu.
        To display an options menu and choose a new setting:
        1. Press and hold MB1 on the current option, to display the menu.
        2. Drag the pointer to the setting you want.
        3. Release MB1. The dialog box now displays your new setting.
            If you decide not to make a change, drag the pointer outside the menu and
            release MB1.

11.5 Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes
        Windowing applications display a dialog box when they need more information
        from you to carry out a task. Dialog boxes are like forms, offering various ways
        to supply information. In some dialog boxes, you need to enter text. In others,
        you click MB1 on a button to change a setting. Some dialog boxes display
        settings you chose earlier.




208 Chapter 11
                                                                              Using Windows
                                                   11.5 Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes




                                          Customize Terminal Manager


                  Allow Remote Window Manager                 Message Region
                                                                      100
    2            Confirm Quit Session                                                                 3
                  Iconify on Boot                             Scroll Lines Saved

                                                              Messages Displayed

                                                                    All Messages
               Terminal Tag
                                                                    Warning and Error Messages        4

    1          Messages                                             Error Messages only

               Header Text


               Enter Password to Resume
               Pause Prompt



    7           OK              Apply             System Defaults               Cancel




        6                                                5
                                                                                          LJ−01640A−RAGS



            Text-entry              Clicking on a text-entry box allows you to enter text from the
            box                     keyboard into the box. When you click on the box, it receives input
                                    focus and displays a blinking text input cursor (I).
                                    What you type appears to the left of the cursor. When editing
                                    text entries, if you use an arrow key or other key to move the
                                    cursor back and forth in the text, a caret symbol (^ ) appears as a
                                    placemarker at the point where you started moving the cursor.
                                    Use the < x key to delete typing mistakes. Use the     and                




                                    keys to move within the text. Password text-entry boxes do not
                                    display a text cursor.
                                    If a dialog box has more than one text-entry box, you can move
                                    between boxes by
                                    •   Clicking MB1 on the box you want
                                    •   Pressing Tab to advance to the next box in the window

            Check                   Clicking on a square check button turns a setting on or off.





            buttons




                                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 209
Using Windows
11.5 Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes

            Scales         You use scales to select a numeric value from a range of settings.
        




                           You drag a slider in the scale. The arrow in the slider points to the
                           current value.
            Radio          Clicking on a diamond-shaped radio button selects that option from
            buttons        a group of options.
        
            Push buttons   Clicking on a rectangular push button (such as OK, Apply, Cancel,
                           or System Defaults) tells an application what to do with the
                           information you supplied in the dialog box.
        
            Default push   A button with a second border is the default action for a dialog
            buttons        box. On a color terminal, the border area looks recessed. Default
                           actions are those that you choose most frequently. Usually, the OK
                           button is the default action for a dialog box. You can also choose
                           the default action by pressing the Return key.
        
            Push buttons   A default button with a third border has input focus. Input focus
            with input     means that keyboard input is connected to the push button. You
            focus          can change the input focus by clicking on another element in the
                           dialog box. When you open a dialog box, the OK button usually has
                           input focus.
                           When you enter a dialog box that has a text field, the OK button
                           is the default option but does not have input focus. In some dialog
                           boxes, the default action may change from the OK button to
                           another button after you start using the dialog box.

11.5.1 Dimmed Items in Menus and Dialog Boxes
        If a menu item, button, or text-entry box is dimmed, you cannot currently use
        that item. There are several reasons why an item may be dimmed:
        •   You must perform some other action before you can choose the item.
        •   Your VXT manager has configured your terminal so that item is not
            selectable.

11.5.2 Moving and Changing Settings in a Dialog Box
        Here are the methods for moving among text-entry boxes and for changing text
        entries, button settings, and scales in a dialog box.


        Moving
        To move . . .                              Do this . . .
        Forward among text-entry boxes.            Press Tab or click MB1 on the box.
        Backward among text-entry boxes.           Press Shift Tab , or click MB1 on the box.




210 Chapter 11
                                                                   Using Windows
                                        11.5 Supplying Information in Dialog Boxes

      To move . . .                              Do this . . .

      The cursor in a text-entry box             Point to where you want to insert text and
                                                 press MB1, or use the    or      keys.

      Changing
      To . . .                                   Do this . . .
      Change a radio or check button setting.    Point to the button and click MB1.
      Change the numeric value on a scale.       Drag the slider left or right on the scale,
                                                 or point to a location on the scale and click
                                                 MB1.


11.6 Using Scroll Bars
      Some windows have scroll bars that let you view text or graphics that do
      not fit in the window. A scroll bar has stepping arrows at either end of the
      scroll region. The slider represents your relative position in the list or file.
      If the slider is at the top of the scroll region, the beginning of the list is visible.
      If the slider is at the bottom of the scroll region, the end of the list is visible.




                                                            Slider


      Scroll
      Region



                                                            Stepping
                                                            Arrow




                                                     LJ−01637−RAGS

      The size of the slider tells you how much of the list the window is displaying.
      If the slider is as large as the scroll region, the complete list is displayed. If
      the slider is small, only part of the list is displayed. The smaller the slider, the
      larger the list.




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 211
Using Windows
11.6 Using Scroll Bars

        Using scroll bars: You can scroll a line at a time, a window at a time, or to a
        selected point.

        To scroll this way . . .                   Do this . . .
        One line at a time.                        Click MB1 on the stepping arrow at either
                                                   end of the scroll bar.
        Forward one window of text at a time.      Point to the scroll region below the slider
                                                   and click MB1.
        Backward one window of text at a time.     Point to the scroll region above the slider
                                                   and click MB1.
        Continuously, one line at a time.          Press and hold MB1 on the stepping arrow
                                                   at either end of the scroll bar.
        Continuously, one window of text at a      Press and hold MB1 in the scroll region.
        time.
        To another location in the list or file.   Drag the slider to a point in the scroll
                                                   region that you think corresponds to the
                                                   location you want to see. For example, if
                                                   the slider is at the top of the scroll region,
                                                   you are viewing the beginning of the list or
                                                   file.
                                                   To cancel the drag, click another mouse
                                                   button before releasing MB1.




212 Chapter 11
                                                                      12
                                                                     12
                                  Customizing Windows


This chapter describes how to customize many of the window manager’s
features, using an Options submenu in the workspace area. The Options
submenu lets you check and control the settings for many window features—
from window borders and icons to the way windows become active on the
screen. Initially, the features use factory-default settings that work with many
host systems. You can make changes to suit your personal preference and
computing environment. After you make changes, you can save your settings
for all future sessions.
This chapter describes the tasks you can perform from the Options submenu:
•   Displaying the Options Submenu
•   Saving and Restoring Window Option Settings
•   Changing Your Workspace Settings
•   Changing Your Border Settings
•   Changing Your Border Color Settings
•   Changing Your Icon Settings
•   Changing Your Icon Color Settings
•   Changing Your Matte Settings
•   Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings
The chapter describes how to use the Options submenu from the workspace
area. You can also display the Options submenu from the window menu
button. Display the window menu and choose the Workspace menu item. Then
choose the Options menu item from the Workspace submenu.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 213
Customizing Windows
12.1 Displaying the Options Submenu

12.1 Displaying the Options Submenu
        To display the Options submenu:
        1. Click and hold MB1 anywhere on the screen’s workspace. The workspace
           submenu is displayed.
        2. Drag the pointer down to the Options menu item. The Options submenu is
           displayed.
        3. Release MB1.




                                       LJ−01130−RAGS


                                             Note
            A system manager can lock or unlock settings in the Options submenu
            by using the terminal’s configuration manager. If the settings are
            locked, the Options menu item is dimmed and you cannot view the
            Options submenu. See your system manager.


        When you choose a menu item from the Options submenu, the dialog box
        for that item is displayed. Shaded buttons in the dialog box indicate current
        settings. You can examine the settings and change them if desired.



214 Chapter 12
                                                     Customizing Windows
                          12.2 Saving and Restoring Window Option Settings

12.2 Saving and Restoring Window Option Settings
     To make changes to window settings and save them:
     1. Make your changes in a dialog box, then click on the OK button.
     2. Click on the Restart... menu item in the Workspace submenu.
        or
        Click on the Apply current settings menu item in the Options submenu.
     3. The terminal displays a box to confirm that you want to apply the current
        settings and restart the window manager.
        For example, if you modify your window settings, and click on the Restart...
        menu item, the terminal displays the following box:




                                      LJ−01126−RAGS

        Click on the OK button to close the confirmation box, save changes, and
        restart the window manager.
        To cancel the restart operation, click on the Cancel button. The Cancel
        button closes the restart confirmation box without restarting the window
        manager.




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 215
Customizing Windows
12.2 Saving and Restoring Window Option Settings

        Making Changes in a Dialog Box
        Each dialog box displayed from the Options submenu has a set of control push
        buttons:

        Click on...        To...
        OK                 Record new settings temporarily and dismiss the dialog box.
        Reset              Display the currently saved settings.
        Default            Restore the factory-default settings.
        Cancel             Dismiss the dialog box without changing any settings.

        If you make changes, you must use the Apply current settings or Restart...
        menu item to save your settings for future sessions.
        Saving or Restoring Option Settings
        To save or restore settings, use the following menu items on the Options
        submenu of the window menu:

        Choose...                           To...
        Apply current settings              Apply new settings and save them. You can also use
                                            the Reset... menu item on the Workspace submenu.
        Reset to last saved settings        Restores the last settings you saved. Choose this
                                            menu item if you want to reset any features that
                                            you changed temporarily, but do not want to save.
        Reset to default                    Restore the factory-default settings.


12.3 Changing Your Workspace Settings
        You can change how and when windows become active in your workspace. You
        can also show an entire window while it is moving instead of just the window
        outline. To change these and other workspace settings, click anywhere on the
        screen’s workspace to display the Workspace submenu. Choose the Options
        submenu, then choose Workspace... to display the Workspace: Options dialog
        box.




216 Chapter 12
                                                 Customizing Windows
                                 12.3 Changing Your Workspace Settings




                                                 LJ−01131−RAGS

From the Workspace: Options dialog box, you can change any of the following
settings:
   To make a window active,
Normally, a window becomes active when you select it with your mouse or
keyboard. If desired, you can have windows become active as soon as you move
the pointer into them. To do this, click on the select the window button and
choose move the pointer into the window from the pop-up menu.
If you use the pointer to make windows active, you cannot use the Alt Tab and
Alt F11 keyboard navigation sequences to move the input focus among windows.

   When a window becomes active,
Normally, a window is raised to the top of the stack on the screen when
activated. Click on the button if you want to turn this feature off.



                     VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 217
Customizing Windows
12.3 Changing Your Workspace Settings

           Make a window active when it is created or restored from an icon
        Normally, a window becomes active when it is created or restored from an icon.
        Click on the appropriate button if you want to change the current settings.
           When a window is removed from the screen,
        Normally when you remove a window from the screen, another window
        becomes active. Click on the button if you do not want another window to
        become active.
           When moving a window, show the outline or entire window.
        Normally when you move windows, only the window outline appears. If you
        want to display the entire window while it is moving, click on the outline
        button and choose entire window from the pop-up menu.
           Show feedback when moving or sizing windows
        Normally when you move or size a window, a box appears in the center of
        the screen. For moving, the box provides a horizontal and vertical screen
        coordinate position. For sizing, the box provides a horizontal and vertical size.
        Click on the button if you do not want the box to appear. Turning off the box
        can improve performance.
            Set Alt+Space to display the window menu
        If you choose this feature, you can press the Alt key and space bar to display
        the window menu. This is an alternative to the window menu button.
            For international keyboards, ignore the Mod keys
        If you choose this feature, the terminal ignores modifier keys such as the Ctrl
        key.
           Freeze on interactive placement and resize of window
        Normally when you move a window, its frame appears solid on the background.
        To change to a flickering frame, click on the button.

12.4 Changing Your Border Settings
        You can change the features of your window border to include or exclude
        minimize and maximize buttons, borders, a title, or menus. You can also
        change the size of borders. To change your border settings, click anywhere on
        the screen’s workspace to display the Workspace submenu. Choose the Options
        submenu, then choose Border... to display the Workspace: Border Options
        dialog box.




218 Chapter 12
                                                  Customizing Windows
                                      12.4 Changing Your Border Settings




                                              LJ−01132−RAGS


From the Workspace: Border Options dialog box, you can change any of the
following settings:
   Border Decorations
You can add or remove border decorations and buttons from all of your window
frames. To change the current setting for a border decoration, click on its
button.
   Resize Border Size
The resize border is the part of the window frame that you drag to resize
a window. To change the thickness of the border, click on the button in the
Resize Border Size box and make a choice from the pop-up menu. If you choose
Other, you can enter a specific size in the Other Resize Border Size box.
    Other Resize Border Size
If you choose Other from the pop-up menu in the Resize Border Size box, you
can enter a border width from 0 to 999 in the Other Resize Border Size box.
  Double Click on Window Menu to Close Window
When this setting is enabled, a window will close when you double click on the
window menu button.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 219
Customizing Windows
12.5 Changing Your Border Color Settings

12.5 Changing Your Border Color Settings
        You can choose distinct colors for active and inactive windows, to make it
        easy to see which window is active. To change your border color settings,
        click anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display the Workspace submenu.
        Choose the Options submenu, then choose Border Colors... to display the
        Workspace: Border Color Options dialog box.




                                               LJ−01133−RAGS

        From the Workspace: Border Color Options dialog box, you can change any of
        the following settings for active or inactive windows:




220 Chapter 12
                                                       Customizing Windows
                                     12.5 Changing Your Border Color Settings

     On Gray Scale and Color Systems
         Foreground
     The Foreground button lets you change the foreground color of the window’s
     title. When you click on the button, the window manager displays a Color
     Mixing dialog box (Appendix B).
         Background
     The Background button lets you change the color behind the title. When you
     click on the button, the window manager displays a Color Mixing dialog box.
         Top Shadow
     The Top Shadow button lets you change the color on the top and left sides of
     the border. The top and bottom shadow colors create the three-dimensional
     effect of the window display, so it is important to use well-matched colors.
     If the Automatically Set the Shadow Colors button is on, the terminal
     automatically chooses the top and bottom shadow colors when you change
     the background color.
     To choose your own top shadow color, first turn off the automatic button. Then
     click on the Top Shadow button to display the Color Mixing dialog box. You
     should use the HLS model in the dialog box to choose a color that is lighter
     and less saturated than the bottom shadow color.
        Bottom Shadow
     The Bottom Shadow button works like the Top Shadow button, but changes the
     color on the bottom and right sides of the border.
        Customize the window manager menu colors
     This button lets you change the colors of the window manager menu. Click on
     the button to display a pop-up menu of choices.
     On Monochrome Systems
     The Color Mixing dialog box is not displayed on monochrome systems. To
     change the foreground, background, or shadow colors, click on the appropriate
     button.

12.6 Changing Your Icon Settings
     You can customize the size, placement, and use of labels and images for your
     window icons. To change your icon settings, click anywhere on the screen’s
     workspace to display the Workspace submenu. Choose the Options submenu,
     then choose Icons... to display the Workspace: Icon Options dialog box.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 221
Customizing Windows
12.6 Changing Your Icon Settings




                                                      LJ−01134−RAGS


        From the Workspace: Icon Options dialog box, you can change any of the
        following settings:
           Display the Icon Box
        Click on the Display the Icon Box button to turn the display of an icon box on
        or off. The icon box contains the window icons of each session and application
        running on the terminal.
        You can save changes to the size or location of the icon box for future sessions.
        You cannot save changes to the location of icons within the icon box. To save
        the icon box, click on the Apply current settings menu item in the Options
        submenu, then click on the Restart... menu item to restart the window
        manager (Section 12.1).
           Place Icons on
        This button lets you choose the location and direction for placing icons on the
        screen. Click on the button to display a pop-up menu of choices.
           Icon Size
        The Icon Size button lets you choose the size of the icons. Click on the button
        to display a pop-up menu of choices. If you choose Other, you can enter a
        specific size in the Other Icon Height and Width boxes.




222 Chapter 12
                                                         Customizing Windows
                                               12.6 Changing Your Icon Settings

         Other Icon Height and Width
     If you choose Other from the Icon Size pop-up menu, you can enter a value
     from 0 to 999 in the Other Icon Height and Width boxes.
        Icon Decorations
     To turn the use of icon labels and images on or off, click on the appropriate
     button.

12.7 Changing Your Icon Color Settings
     You can customize the colors for icon images and boxes. To change your
     icon color settings, click anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display the
     Workspace submenu. Choose the Options submenu, then choose Icon Colors...
     to display Workspace: Icon Color Options dialog box.




                                               LJ−01135−RAGS


     From the Workspace: Icon Color Options dialog box, you can change any of the
     following settings:




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 223
Customizing Windows
12.7 Changing Your Icon Color Settings

        On Gray Scale and Color Terminals
        – Customize the icon image colors –
           Foreground
        The Foreground button lets you change the color of the icon’s title. To change
        the color, click on the Foreground button to display the Color Mixing dialog box
        (Appendix B).
           Background
        The Background button lets you change the color behind the icon’s title. To
        change the color, click on the Background button to display the Color Mixing
        dialog box.
           Top Shadow
        The Top Shadow button lets you change the color on the top and left of the
        icon border. The top and bottom shadow colors create the three-dimensional
        effect of the icon display, so it is important to use well-matched colors. If the
        Automatically Set the Shadow Colors button is on, the terminal automatically
        chooses the top and bottom shadow colors when you change the background
        color.
        To choose your own top shadow color, first turn off the automatic button. Then
        click on the Top Shadow button to display the Color Mixing dialog box. You
        should use the HLS model in the dialog box to choose a color that is lighter
        and less saturated than the bottom shadow color.
           Bottom Shadow
        The Bottom Shadow button works like the Top Shadow button, but changes the
        color on the bottom and right of the icon border.
        – Customize the icon box color –
           Background
        Normally, the background color of the icon box is set automatically. To change
        the color, turn off the Automatically Set the Color button and click on the
        Background button to display the Color Mixing dialog box.
        On Monochrome Terminals
        The Color Mixing dialog box is not displayed on monochrome terminals. To
        change the foreground, background, or shadow colors, click on the appropriate
        button.




224 Chapter 12
                                                        Customizing Windows
                                             12.8 Changing Your Matte Settings

12.8 Changing Your Matte Settings
     You can add an optional matte frame between the window border and the work
     area. You can control the matte’s size and colors. To create a matte or change
     your matte settings, click anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display the
     Workspace submenu. Choose the Options submenu, then choose Matte... to
     display the Workspace: Matte Options dialog box.




                                               LJ−01136−RAGS


     From the Workspace: Matte Options dialog box, you can change any of the
     following settings:
     On Gray Scale and Color Terminals
     – Customize the matte –
        Matte Size, Other Matte Size
     The Matte Size button lets you change the size of the matte. To change the
     size, click on the button and make a choice from the pop-up menu. To turn off
     the matte, choose None. To enter your own size, choose Other, then click on the
     Other Matte Size box and enter a size.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 225
Customizing Windows
12.8 Changing Your Matte Settings

        – Customize the matte colors –
           Foreground
        To change the matte’s foreground color, click on the Foreground button to
        display the Color Mixing dialog box (Appendix B).
           Background
        To change the color behind the matte’s title, click on the Background button to
        display the Color Mixing dialog box.
           Top Shadow
        The Top Shadow button lets you change the color on the top and left of the
        matte. The top and bottom shadow colors create the three-dimensional effect,
        so it is important to use well-matched colors. If the Automatically Set the
        Shadow Colors button is on, the terminal automatically chooses the top and
        bottom shadow colors when you change the background color.
        To choose your own top shadow color, first turn off the automatic button. Then
        click on the Top Shadow button to display the Color Mixing dialog box. You
        should use the HLS model in the dialog box to choose a color that is lighter
        and less saturated than the bottom shadow color.
           Bottom Shadow
        The Bottom Shadow button works like the Top Shadow button, but selects the
        color on the bottom and right of the matte.
        On Monochrome Terminals
        The Color Mixing dialog box is not displayed on monochrome terminals. To
        change the foreground, background, or shadow colors, click on the appropriate
        button.

12.9 Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings
                                           Caution
            This topic is for advanced users who have a thorough understanding
            of the information discussed in the OSF/Motif Programmers Guide.
            Changing menu, button, or key bindings could remove needed functions
            from menus and may disable your ability to use the window manager.
            For example, if you edit a menu or binding and leave a blank line when
            you remove a function, the items below the blank line will not work or
            may not appear on the menu following a restart.




226 Chapter 12
                                                 Customizing Windows
                          12.9 Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings

You can modify six of the window manager’s menus and the functional bindings
for certain buttons and keys.
To change your bindings, click anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display
the Workspace submenu. Choose the Options submenu, then choose Resource
configuration... to display the Workspace: Customize Resource Configuration
dialog box.




                                                                   LJ−01137A−RAGS



   Binding Set
The Workspace: Customize Resource Configuration dialog box contains a list
of six menu binding sets, one keyboard key binding set, and one mouse button
binding set. When you click on a binding set in the list, the bindings for that
set are displayed in the scroll box to the right of the list. The name of the set
is displayed in the Currently editing: field.
Here is what each binding sets does:




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 227
Customizing Windows
12.9 Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings

        Click on...                       To modify...
        Menu RootMenu                     The Workspace menu accessed by clicking MB1 in
                                          an open space.
        Menu WorkspaceMenu                The Workspace submenu accessed from the window
                                          menu.
        Menu MwmCustomizeRootMenu         The Options submenu accessed from the Workspace
                                          submenu.
        Menu MwmCustomizeMenu             The Options submenu accessed from the window
                                          menu.
        Menu DefaultWindowMenu            The window menu accessed from the window menu
                                          button.
        Menu IconBoxMenu                  The Icon Box menu.
        Keys DefaultKeyBindings           Keyboard keys associated with window manage-
                                          ment functions.
        Buttons DefaultButtonBindings     Mouse button actions associated with window
                                          management functions.

        Push Button Controls
        Below the scroll box are push buttons to control the editing process:

        Choose...        To...
        Apply            Record the setting of the currently edited binding set.
        Reset            Redisplay the current settings for the currently edited binding set, if
                         you changed the setting without applying them.
        Default          Restore the factory-default settings for the currently edited binding
                         set.
        List Window      Display a list of supported window manager functions.
        Manager
        Functions...

        To display window manager functions:
        To display the List of Window Manager Functions dialog box, click on the List
        Window Manager Functions... button in the Customize Resource Configuration
        dialog box. From this list, you can select and copy functions into the binding
        set you are editing in the scroll box. For descriptions of the window manager
        functions, see the OSF/Motif Programmers Guide.




228 Chapter 12
                                                Customizing Windows
                         12.9 Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings




                                                              LJ−01138B−RAGS


To change or add to a menu binding:
1. Click on a menu binding set in the Workspace: Customize Resource
   Configuration dialog box. The functions for the menu appear in the scroll
   box.
2. To make changes: Enter changes from your keyboard or use your mouse
   to copy a new binding from the List of Window Manager Functions.
   To add functions to the binding: Click to the right of the last function
   listed in the scroll box, then press Return .
   Each menu item entry has the following syntax:
   item [mnemonic]    [accelerator] function [argument]
   The mnemonic and accelerator are optional. The function is the action
   the window manager takes when a user chooses the menu item. Some
   functions may require arguments.
   The window manager treats blank lines as the end of the menu binding
   set. To remove blank lines, use the <x key or  Backspace key.

3. Click on Apply.
4. Click on OK.




                     VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 229
Customizing Windows
12.9 Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings

        To change or add to a key binding:
        1. Click on the Keys DefaultKeyBindings binding set. The functions for
           certain keyboard keys are displayed in the scroll box.
        2. To make changes: Enter changes from your keyboard or use your mouse
           to copy a new binding from the List of Window Manager Functions.
            To add functions to the binding: Click to the right of the last function
            listed in the scroll box, then press Return .
            Each key binding has the following syntax:
            key context[|context] function [argument]
            Each line identifies a unique key sequence, one or more contexts in which
            the sequence is valid, and the function of the sequence. The context
            indicates where the keyboard input focus must be when keys are pressed,
            in order for the sequence to work: window, icon, or root. The function is
            the action the window manager takes when a user chooses the menu item.
            Some functions may require arguments.
            The window manager treats blank lines as the end of the key binding set.
            To remove blank lines, use the <x key or   Backspace key.

        3. Click on Apply.
        4. Click on OK.
        To change or add to a button binding:
        1. Click on the Buttons DefaultButtonBindings binding set. The functions for
           the buttons are displayed in the scroll box.
        2. To make changes: Enter changes from your keyboard or use your mouse
           to copy a new binding from the List of Window Manager Functions.
            To add functions to the binding: Click to the right of the last function
            listed in the scroll box, then press Return .
            Each button binding has the following syntax:
            button context[|context] function [argument]
            Each line identifies a certain button action, one or more contexts in which
            the button action is valid, and the function to perform. The context
            indicates where the pointer must be for the button action to work: window,
            root, frame, icon, title, or border. The function is the action the window
            manager takes when a user chooses the menu item. Some functions may
            require arguments.




230 Chapter 12
                                                    Customizing Windows
                             12.9 Changing Menu, Button, and Key Bindings

     The window manager treats blank lines as the end of the button binding
     set. To remove blank lines, use the <x key or  Backspace key.

3. Click on Apply.
4. Click on OK.
To save settings:
To save the settings in the Workspace: Customize Resource Configuration
dialog box, use the push buttons at the bottom of the dialog box.

Choose...         To...
OK                Record new settings and dismiss the dialog box.
Reset All         Redisplay the current settings for the entire dialog box if you
                  changed settings without applying them.
System Defaults   Restore the factory-default settings for the entire dialog box.
Cancel            Dismiss the dialog box without changing any settings. If you made
                  changes without applying them, clicking on Cancel button cancels
                  those changes.




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 231
                                                                             13
                                                                            13
                                      Launching Applications


        This chapter describes how to launch local VXT applications and remote host
        applications on your terminal. The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •   Launching Sessions and Applications
        •   Launching Sessions and VXT Applications with the Window Manager
        •   Launching Remote Applications
        •   Launching Sessions and VXT Applications Using rsh

13.1 Launching Sessions and Applications
        Application launching refers to starting sessions, local VXT applications,
        or remote host applications on the terminal. Normally, you start sessions and
        applications from the Terminal Manager window by using
        •   The Create dialog box, Create menu, or VXT Create pop-up menu
            (Section 2.2)
        •   The Customize AutoStart dialog box or AutoStart menu item (Section 5.6)
        You can also launch sessions and applications from the terminal’s local window
        manager. This feature is provided for users who may want to run sessions
        or applications without running the Terminal Manager window or a remote
        session manager.
        To launch applications or sessions from the window manager, you define menu
        items, keys, or mouse buttons. Section 12.9 describes the general steps to
        define menu items, mouse buttons, or keys. This chapter lists the specific
        functions and arguments you can use to launch sessions and applications from
        the window manager.




232 Chapter 13
                                                              Launching Applications
                                             13.1 Launching Sessions and Applications

      Launching Remote Applications
      To launch host applications from the Terminal Manager window or window
      manager, you first must run the VXT application launcher on the host system.
      See Section 13.3.

13.2 Launching Sessions and VXT Applications with the
     Window Manager
      There are two methods to launch sessions and local VXT applications with the
      window manager:
      •   Use the VXT Create pop-up menu (Section 2.2.8).
      •   Define menu items or keys.

13.2.1 Defining Menu Items to Launch Sessions and Local VXT
       Applications
      You can add menu items to the window manager’s Workspace submenu to start
      local VXT applications or sessions.
      1. Click and hold MB1 anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display
         the Workspace submenu. Choose the Options submenu, then choose
         Resource configuration... to display the Workspace: Customize Resource
         Configuration dialog box.
      2. In the Binding Set box, click on the Menu RootMenu binding set.
      3. Enter new menu items at the bottom of the scroll box list.
          •   Use the following syntax to add a menu item for a session:
              "Menu item" f.exec "session transport host"
              Examples
              "Market DECterm"            f.exec "decterm -ip market"
              "Market X Session"          f.exec "x -ip market"
              "Serial DECterm"            f.exec "decterm -serial"
          •   Use the following syntax to start a local VXT application:
              "Menu item" f.exec "application"
              Examples
              "Terminal Manager"           f.exec "term_mgr"
              "Message Box"                f.exec "msgbox"
          Table 13–1 lists all possible session and application functions.



                                 VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 233
Launching Applications
13.2 Launching Sessions and VXT Applications with the Window Manager

        4. Click on Apply.
        5. Click on OK.
        6. Restart the window manager.
            a. Click and hold MB1 anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display the
               Workspace submenu.
            b. Click on Restart... to restart the window manager.
                  The window manager adds your new menu items to the Workspace
                  submenu.
        After you restart the window manager, you can use your new menu items to
        launch the sessions or local VXT applications you added.
        1. Click and hold MB1 anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display the
           Workspace submenu.
        2. Choose the desired menu item to launch a particular session or local VXT
           application.

        Table 13–1 Application Names and Arguments
        Application
        Name                 Arguments
        x                    [-ip],[-lat],[-dnet] <host>
        decterm              [-ip],[-lat],[-dnet] <host>
        decterm              [-serial]
        mwm                  none
        term_mgr             [-msgbox]
        msgbox               none
        font_mgr             none
        3270                 [-dnet]


        <> indicates a required argument.
        [ ] indicates an optional argument. Commas separate choices.
        IP is the default transport for DECterm and X sessions.
        DECnet is the default transport for the VXT 3270 application.
        You cannot launch the configuration manager as a separate application.




234 Chapter 13
                                                  Launching Applications
    13.2 Launching Sessions and VXT Applications with the Window Manager

13.2.2 Defining Keys to Launch Sessions and Local VXT Applications
      You can define keys to start local VXT applications or sessions.
      1. Click and hold MB1 anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display
         the Workspace submenu. Choose the Options submenu, then choose
         Resource configuration... to display the Workspace: Customize Resource
         Configuration dialog box.
      2. In the Binding Sets box, click on the Keys DefaultKeyBindings binding set.
      3. Enter your new key definitions at the bottom of the list.
         •   Use the following syntax to define a key to launch a session:
             <Key>key root | window f.exec "session transport host"
             Examples
             <Key>F18              root|window              f.exec "decterm -lat market"
             <Key>F19              root|window              f.exec "x -ip market"
             <Key>F20              root|window              f.exec "decterm -serial"
         •   Use the following syntax to define a key to launch a local VXT
             application:
             <Key>key root | window f.exec "application"
             Example
             <Key>F17 root | window f.exec "term_mgr -msgbox"
         Table 13–1 lists all possible session and application functions.
      4. Click on Apply.
      5. Click on OK.
      6. Restart the window manager.
         a. Click and hold MB1 anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display the
            Workspace submenu.
         b. Click on Restart... in the Workspace menu.
             The window manager updates your key definitions.
      After you restart the window manager, you can use your new key definitions to
      launch the sessions or local VXT applications you defined.
      1. Click and hold MB1 anywhere on the screen’s workspace to display the
         Workspace submenu.
      2. Press the key you defined to launch your session or local VXT application.



                                VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 235
Launching Applications
13.3 Launching Remote Applications

13.3 Launching Remote Applications
        You can launch applications on your host system from the terminal. For
        example, you may want to run your host’s clock or calendar program on your
        terminal.
        There are two basic steps in launching a remote application:
        1. Before you launch remote applications, you must run the VXT launcher in
           a host session on the terminal (Section 13.3.1).
        2. Launch the remote application from the Terminal Manager window or the
           window manager. This step is similar to launching sessions or local VXT
           applications.
            •    If you use the Terminal Manager window, you can enter and launch
                 applications in the Create dialog box (Section 2.2.6). After you save
                 your settings and restart the window manager, your applications are
                 also listed on the Create menu and VXT Create pop-up menu.
            •    You can also use the terminal’s local window manager to define keys
                 or menu items on the Workspace submenu for launching remote
                 applications (Section 13.3.3). This feature is provided for users who
                 may want to run sessions or applications without running the Terminal
                 Manager window or a remote session manager.
        Launching Remote Applications from Several Systems
        You can launch remote applications from several systems and display those
        applications concurrently on your terminal. However, you must define a unique
        name for the launcher on each system.
        One VXT Application Launcher Connection
                               TCP/IP, DECnet, or LAT Session

                    1. Connect to the host and start the application launcher.

                    2. Launch the host application.

                    3. The host displays the application on the terminal.

                                                                   LJ−03535−RAGS




236 Chapter 13
                                                                      Launching Applications
                                                          13.3 Launching Remote Applications

      Two VXT Application Launcher Connections
                                                                        Launcher 1
                                                                        Application 1
                     Connect to host 1 and start launcher 1.
                     Launch application 1.
                     The host displays application 1.

                     Connect to host 2 and start launcher 2.
                     Launch application 2.
                     The host displays application 2.
                                                                         Launcher 2
                                                                         Application 2


                                                                        LJ−03536−RAGS



13.3.1 Running the Application Launcher
      VXT Version 2.1 and later software provides the application launcher. Check
      with your system manager for the name and location of the application
      launcher file on your host system. VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and
      System Management describes the installation and setup of the launcher.
      The launcher establishes a display connection with the terminal. This allows
      you to send launch commands from the terminal to the launcher, which relays
      the commands to the host system.
      The following sections describe methods to run the application launcher on
      UNIX or OpenVMS systems. Section 13.3.2 describes the command syntax in
      detail.
      UNIX, ULTRIX, and DEC OSF/1 Systems
      The default name of the application launcher file is vxtlaunch. The default file
      location is in the /usr/local/bin path.
      You can use the following commands to run the launcher. Make sure the
      launcher is in your current path.
      % setenv DISPLAY terminal’s_IP_address:0
      % vxtlaunch arguments &
      Section 13.3.2 describes possible command arguments.




                                   VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 237
Launching Applications
13.3 Launching Remote Applications

        Example
        The following commands starts the launcher with a process name of launch1,
        to connect to a terminal with a TCP/IP address of 16.122.144.56:
        % setenv DISPLAY 16.122.144.56:0
        % vxtlaunch -name launch1 &
        If you do not specify a process name, the default is vxt.
        OpenVMS Systems
        The default name of the application launcher file is VXT$LAUNCH.EXE. The
        default file location is VXT$LIBRARY. The following commands shows one
        possible method for invoking the launcher:
        $ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=terminal’s_DECnet_address
        $ MCR VXT$LIBRARY:VXT$LAUNCH arguments
        Section 13.3.2 describes possible command arguments.
        Example
        The following command starts the launcher with the name LAUNCH1 to connect
        to a terminal with a DECnet address of 3456:
        $ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=3456
        $ MCR VXT$LIBRARY:VXT$LAUNCH -NAME LAUNCH1
        If you do not specify a process name, the default is VXT.

13.3.2 Launch Command Arguments
        This section lists the arguments you can use with the command that runs
        the application launcher. On UNIX systems, the command is vxtlaunch. On
        OpenVMS systems, the system manager must define a foreign command name.
        This section assumes the command is vxtlaunch.
        vxtlaunch arguments
        Standard vxtlaunch Arguments
        The application launcher supports the following arguments:

        Argument               Description
        -help                  Provides help information on arguments.




238 Chapter 13
                                                      Launching Applications
                                          13.3 Launching Remote Applications

Argument                 Description

-display name            Enter the name of the display to connect to.
                         IP              Enter terminal’s_IP_address:0.
                         DECnet          Enter terminal’s_DECnet_address::0
-name name               Specifies a name to use for the launcher on this host system.
                         If you launch applications from multiple systems for display
                         on the same terminal, you must specify a unique name for the
                         launcher on each system. You use this name when entering
                         launch commands for applications. The default name is VXT.
-kill                    Stops a VXT launcher process on the host system. You must
                         specify the -name argument if the launcher has a name other
                         than the default (VXT).

Examples
Here are some vxtlaunch command examples using the supported arguments:

Argument Example                  Description
vxtlaunch                         Starts a launch process with the default name VXT.
vxtlaunch -name LCH1              Starts a launch process with the name LCH1.
vxtlaunch -kill                   Stops a launch process with the default name VXT.
vxtlaunch -kill -name LCH1        Stops a launch process with the name LCH1.

Other vxtlaunch Arguments
The following vxtlaunch arguments may present security implications on your
system:

Argument                          Description
-retry interval:number            If the launcher fails to make an X connection with the
                                  terminal, this argument specifies how often (interval)
                                  and how many times (number) the launcher should
                                  retry to make a connection. The default interval is 1
                                  second. The default duration is forever.
-reconnect                        If the launcher receives a fatal error after a
                                  successful X connection, this argument tells the
                                  launcher to try to reestablish the connection.




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 239
Launching Applications
13.3 Launching Remote Applications

        Examples
        Here are some vxtlaunch command examples using the -retry and
        -reconnect arguments:

        Argument Example                      Description
        vxtlaunch -retry -reconnect           Retry to make a connection every 1 second, forever.
                                              If an existing connection fails, try to reconnect.
        vxtlaunch -retry 3                    Retry to make a connection every 3 seconds, forever.
        vxtlaunch -retry :3                   Retry to make a connection every 1 second, for 3
                                              times.
        vxtlaunch -retry 3:3                  Retry to make a connection every 3 seconds, for 3
                                              times.


13.3.3 Defining Menu Items or Keys to Launch Remote Applications
        You can define keys or menu items on the Workspace submenu to launch
        remote applications.
        To define a menu item to launch a remote application:
        Follow the same steps used to define menu items for local applications or
        sessions (Section 13.2.1), but use the following command syntax:
        "menu item" root | window f.exec "rexec launcher command"
        The launcher is the name of the application launcher. Default name: VXT.
        The command is the host system command to launch the desired application.
        Examples
        The following examples show typical commands to start a clock on a UNIX
        system or OpenVMS system.
        UNIX system:
        "xclock"             root|window      f.exec "rexec launch1 /usr/bin/X11/xclock"
        OpenVMS system:
        "Clock"            root|window      f.exec "rexec vxt run @sys$system:decw$clock"
        To define a key to launch a remote application:
        Follow the same steps used to define keys for local applications or sessions
        (Section 13.2.2), but use the following command syntax:
        "<Key>key" f.exec "rexec launcher command"



240 Chapter 13
                                                                      Launching Applications
                                                          13.3 Launching Remote Applications

     The key is the key you want to define.
     The launcher is the name of the application launcher. Default name: VXT.
     The command is the host system command to launch the desired application.
     Examples
     The following examples show typical commands to start a clock on a UNIX
     system or OpenVMS system.
     UNIX system:
     "<Key>F17"              f.exec           "rexec launch1 /usr/bin/X11/xclock"
     OpenVMS system:
     "<Key>F17"              f.exec           "rexec vxt run @sys$system:decw$clock"

13.4 Launching Sessions and VXT Applications Using rsh
     On UNIX systems, you can use the rsh (r shell) application to launch sessions
     and local VXT applications over the IP transport. The rsh commands contain
     the host name, user name, and the command to launch the application.
     The terminal checks the host name and user name for authorization in the
     terminal’s Customize Security list.
     rsh vxt_name application -ip node
     vxt_name is the terminal’s IP host name, as listed in the host system’s
     /etc/hosts file. You cannot use IP addresses with rsh.
     application is the session or local VXT application to start.
     node is the host system you are connected to.
     Example
     The following example starts a VXT DECterm window on the terminal myvxt
     from the host system market.
     csh>rsh myvxt decterm -ip market

                                       TCP/IP Session

                    1. Connect to the host.
                    2. Use an r shell command to start a VXT application.

                    3. The host passes the command to the terminal’s
                       window manager, which displays the application.

                                                                    LJ−03537−RAGS




                                   VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 241
                                                                           14
                                                                          14
                                       Using VXT EX Software


        This chapter describes how to load and use VXT EX software with the
        terminal. The chapter covers the following major topics:
        •   VXT EX Software
        •   Loading VXT EX Software
        •   Creating a Session
        •   VXT EX Options Dialog Box

14.1 VXT EX Software
        VXT EX (essential X server) software is a minimal version of VXT software,
        without any local applications such as the Terminal Manager window, VXT
        DECterm and VXT 3270 windows, and the Motif window manager. VXT EX
        software lets you create X sessions with minimal memory installed in the
        terminal. The system you connect to must provide all window management
        and terminal emulation features.
        VXT EX software provides a single dialog box for creating an X session. You
        can create an X session to systems that support the TCP/IP or LAT transports.
        VXT EX software
        •   Requires only the minimum 4 megabytes of installed memory
        •   Requires host-based clients for window management and terminal
            emulation
        •   Does not support printing to locally attached printers
        •   Requires a mouse or pointing device




242 Chapter 14
                                                         Using VXT EX Software
                                                  14.2 Loading VXT EX Software

14.2 Loading VXT EX Software
     When you turn or reboot the terminal, it normally loads full-function VXT
     software. There are two ways to load VXT EX software instead of VXT
     software:
     •   Specify VXT EX software in the Customize Boot dialog box and reboot the
         terminal. To specify host-based operation, see Section 5.7.2. To specify
         server-based operation, see Section 5.7.3.
     •   Enter a BOOT command that specifies VXT EX software (Section 5.7.5).

14.3 Creating a Session
     When you reboot the terminal with VXT EX software, the terminal displays
     the VXT EX connection dialog box. You use the dialog box to create an X
     session to a host system. You can create multiple X sessions.

                               VXT EX V2.0




                                                          LJ−03007−RAGS




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 243
Using VXT EX Software
14.3 Creating a Session

        The Video Alignment button is for VXT 2000 model VX227 windowing
        terminals only. This button provides centering and rotation controls to align
        the screen display if necessary. See Section 3.11.
        To connect to a host system:
        1. Choose your display language. The default is English.
        2. Choose the communication transport to use for the X session—LAT or IP.
        3. For LAT: Enter your LAT Service Name. By default, the host system you
           connect to supplies your fonts.
            For IP: Enter your Host IP Address, TFTP Font Path, and IP Name
            Server.
            Your terminal’s IP address and name server must be defined on a host
            system by your system manager. See Section 4.5.
        4. Click on the Save button if you want to save your host settings.
            If you save your host settings, the terminal automatically tries to establish
            a connection to that host whenever you turn on or reboot the terminal. The
            terminal does not display the VXT EX dialog box.
            If you do not save your settings, the terminal uses these settings for the
            current session only. The next time you turn on or reboot the terminal, it
            will display the VXT EX dialog box again.
        5. Click on the Connect button. If a connection is made, the terminal displays
           your host system’s login prompt.
            If a connection is not made, the terminal redisplays the VXT EX dialog box.
        6. Log in to your host system.
        To redisplay the VXT EX dialog box:
        Press the F3 key.
        You can change your settings or create a second X session.
        To switch from VXT EX to VXT software:
        If you are using host-based operation, you must halt the terminal and enter a
        BOOT command that specifies VXT software. See Section 5.7.5.
        If you are using server-based operation, you can choose VXT software from the
        VXT EX options box (Section 14.4).




244 Chapter 14
                                                       Using VXT EX Software
                                               14.4 VXT EX Options Dialog Box

14.4 VXT EX Options Dialog Box
     You can specify VXT EX option settings by choosing the Options... button in
     the VXT EX dialog box. When you click on Options, the terminal displays the
     VXT EX options dialog box:


                              VXT EX V2.0




                                                        LJ−03025−RAGS

     From the VXT EX options dialog box, you can change the following settings:
        Setup Key
     Normally, you use the F3 key to display the VXT EX dialog box. You can choose
     to use the Ctrl Alt F3 key sequence instead.
        Allow All Connections
     Normally, other systems and users cannot connect to your terminal when you
     are using VXT EX software. If you click on the Allow All Connections button,
     any system on the Ethernet can establish an X connection to your terminal.




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 245
Using VXT EX Software
14.4 VXT EX Options Dialog Box

            Secondary Boot VXT Software
        If your terminal operates in server-based mode, you can use this button to
        switch from VXT EX software to full-function VXT software. The VXT software
        image must be available on an InfoServer system in your network. Your new
        setting takes effect the next time you turn on or reboot the terminal. You can
        reboot the terminal by pressing the Ctrl +left Alt +keypad . sequence.
        Host-based terminals and server-based terminals operating in host-based mode
        cannot use this option. However, you can switch to VXT software by entering a
        boot command (Section 5.7.5).
        To close the Options dialog box:
        Click on the Cancel button.




246 Chapter 14
                                                                            15
                                                                           15
                                         Using Your Keyboard


      You can use one of the following keyboards with your terminal:
      •   ANSI Keyboard
      •   Short ANSI Keyboard
      •   The PC Keyboard
      •   The Sun Style Keyboard
      This chapter describes the basic functions of the keys and indicators on each
      keyboard. The chapter also describes how to use the keyboard instead of the
      mouse to navigate through windows and to choose items from menus and
      dialog boxes. Finally, the chapter describes how to type additional characters
      not shown on the keyboard keys.

                              VXT 3270 Keyboard Functions
          For keyboard functions in VXT 3270 windows, see Chapter 9.



15.1 ANSI Keyboard
      The ANSI keyboard comes in many versions for use with different languages
      and dialects. The only physical difference between these keyboards are the
      legends on the keys.

15.1.1 Keyboard Dialect
      The terminal is initially set to work with the North American/United Kingdom
      keyboard. If you have a keyboard for a different language or you want to
      use the British dialect, you must change the Keyboard Type setting in the
      Customize Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3).



                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 247
Using Your Keyboard
15.1 ANSI Keyboard

15.1.2 Layout
        The keyboard has four groups of keys and two visual indicators. The keys are
        grouped by function.
                  Main keypad
                  Editing keypad
                  Numeric keypad
                  Top-row function keys
        The keyboard also has two audible indicators, a keyclick and bell.
        The following figure shows the North American/United Kingdom keyboard:


                                                                                                             Top-Row Function Keys

                       Visual Indicators

           di gi tal


            F1           F2          F3       F4           F5                 F6           F7           F8       F9       F10                     F11         F12         F13          F14    Help             Do            F17    F18       F19       F20




           Hold        Print                              Break               F6           F7           F8       F9       F10                    (ESC)        (BS)        (LF)         F14                                   F17    F18       F19       F20


                                                                                                                                              _
                   ~           !          a           #           $       %            ^            &        *        (           )                       +               X                           Insert        Re-     PF1     PF2   PF3       PF4

                               1          2           3           4       5            6            7        8        9           0           -           =
                                                                                                                                                                                              Find
                                                                                                                                                                                                      Here          move

                   Tab                                                                                                                                                        Return
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            7       8     9         _
                                     Q            W         E         R            T            Y        U        I           O           P           }           }                          Select   Prev          Next
                                                                                                                                                      ]           ]

                                                                                                                                             :                                                                              4       5               ,
           Ctrl
                                          A        S            D         F            G        H            J        K         L                         "                                                                               6
                                                                                                                                             ;            ’           \
           Shift
                                     >        Z           X           C       V            B            N        M        <           >           ?           Shift
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1       2     3         Enter

                                     <                                                                                    ,           .           /
                         Compose          Alt                                                                                     Alt                 Compose
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            0             .
                         Character        Function                                                                                Function            Character




                                                                          Main Keypad                                                                                                          Editing                             Numeric
                                                                                                                                                                                               Keypad                              Keypad

                                                                                                                                                                                                                           GSF_1436_89.DG


15.1.3 Main Keypad
        The main keypad is similar to a typewriter keyboard with alphanumeric
        characters, punctuation marks, and Shift keys. The main keypad also has a
        number of keys not found on a standard typewriter, such as the Ctrl modifier
        key and the Compose Character and Alt prefix keys. The German keyboard has
        a Group Shift key and Alternate Shift key instead of Compose Character keys.
        Modifier keys are pressed in combination with another key, to modify the
        code sent by that key. Prefix keys are pressed and released before pressing
        another key, to change the function of one or more keystrokes.




248 Chapter 15
                                                           Using Your Keyboard
                                                            15.1 ANSI Keyboard

Special-Function Keys
The main keypad has the following special-function keys:


Tab              In VXT DECterm windows, pressing Tab sends a horizontal tab,
                 which normally moves the cursor to the next tab stop. Applications
                 can change tab stops. In the Terminal Manager window screens
                 and in some DECwindows menus, Tab moves the cursor to the next
                 text-entry box.
Ctrl             Holding down Ctrl and pressing another key sends a control code to
                 the host.
                 For example, Ctrl Z means to hold down Ctrl and press the Z key.
Shift            There are left and right Shift keys. Holding down Shift and pressing
                 a standard key sends the shifted (top) character on the key.
                 Holding down Shift and pressing a special-function key starts a
                 predefined control function. For example, Shift F2 (Print) means to
                 hold down Shift while pressing the F2 (Print) key.
                 Pressing the lock key down puts the keyboard in caps lock mode or
                 shift lock mode. You can set the mode from the Customize Keyboard
                 dialog box (Section 3.3). The default setting is Caps Lock.
                 •   In caps lock mode, the alphabetic keys send their uppercase or
                     shifted character when pressed alone. You can use a Shift key
                     to send the shifted character on other keys. You turn caps lock
                     mode on and off by pressing and releasing the lock key.
                 •   In shift lock mode, all keys on the main keypad send their
                     shifted character. You can turn shift lock mode on or off by
                     pressing the Lock key.
                 When the lock key is down, the lock indicator on the keyboard turns
                 on.
Return           Pressing Return sends either a carriage return or a carriage return
                 and a line feed (newline). You can choose the function of the
                  Return key from the VXT DECterm General Options dialog box
                 (Section 8.5).
< x Backarrow    Pressing the < x key normally sends a delete (DEL) character.
key              Many applications use DEL to erase one character to the left of the
                 cursor.
                 You can make the < x key send a backspace (BS) character instead
                 of DEL. You can select the function of the <x key from the VXT
                 DECterm Keyboard Options dialog box (Section 8.6).
Space bar        Pressing the space bar sends a space (SP) character. You use spaces
                 to separate words or move the cursor forward.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 249
Using Your Keyboard
15.1 ANSI Keyboard

                                     These are prefix keys, used to generate characters that do not
         Compose
         Character
                                     appear as standard keys on your keyboard. See Section 15.6.3.
                                     On the German keyboard, the Compose Character        key is replaced
                  LJ-00280-TI0




        (left and right)
                                     by Group Shift and Alternate Shift.

          Group
                                     You use Group Shift as a prefix or modifier key, to type the
          Shift                      characters on the right half of keycaps. See Section 15.6.4.
                     LJ-00281-TI0




        (German)
                                      Alternate Shift is a modifier key, used to generate a no break space
                                     (NBSP) or soft hyphen (SHY) character.
          Alternate
          Shift
                      LJ-00282-TI0




                                      Alternate Shift + space bar = NBSP character.
        (German)
                                      Alternate Shift - = SHY character.

          Alt
                                     You use Alt with other keys, to select alternate functions defined by
          Function                   your application software.
                      LJ-00283-TI0




        (left and right)             You can use Alt as a Compose Character key, by holding down the
                                     Alt and space bar. This action starts a compose character sequence.
                                     Your keyboard has both Compose Character and Alt Function keys.
                                     If a workstation application’s documentation specifies use of the
                                       Compose Character key as a modifier for keyboard keys or mouse
                                     buttons, you may need to use the Alt key instead on the terminal.

15.1.4 Editing Keypad
        The editing keypad has four arrow keys and six editing keys.
        Normally, pressing an arrow key moves the text cursor in the direction of the
        arrow. For example, pressing the   key moves the cursor down one line.
        If you press Ctrl Shift F3 , you can use the editing keypad to perform some
        mouse functions. In this mode, the arrow keys move the mouse pointer. The
         Select , Prev , and Next keys correspond to the three mouse buttons. The mouse
        continues to operate. There is no indication the mode is on, but the arrow keys
        will not work for normal editing functions.
        To turn this mode off, press Ctrl Shift F3 again.
        The six editing keys generally perform screen control functions defined by
        application software.




250 Chapter 15
                                                                  Using Your Keyboard
                                                                   15.1 ANSI Keyboard

15.1.5 Numeric Keypad
      Numeric keypad keys often have functions assigned by your software
      applications, especially PF1 to PF4 . For example, you may use a spreadsheet
      program that assigns special functions to these keys. See your application
      manuals for details.
      You can use the numeric keypad to enter numeric data as you would with
      a calculator. Programmers can use this keypad to do hexadecimal compose
      sequences. See Section 15.6.7.
      When you use VXT DECterm windows, you can set the keypad to work as
      a numeric keypad or application keypad. See the VXT DECterm Keyboard
      Options dialog box in Section 8.6.

      Enter           The Enter key on the numeric keypad normally works like the Return
                      key. Enter sends a carriage return, or a carriage return and a line
                      feed. You can select the function of the Return key from the VXT
                      DECterm General Options dialog box (Section 8.5).
                      Application software may use Enter as a special-function key.

15.1.6 Top-Row Function Keys
      Predefined Keys
      The first five top-row keys, F1 to F5 , are predefined to perform the following
      functions. You cannot change these functions. Your application software
      defines the functions of the remaining top-row keys. See your application
      manual for details.
      F1 (Hold)       Pressing F1 (Hold) puts the screen display in the active window on
                      hold. This stops the scrolling of text, which can make reading easier.
                      When you press F1 (Hold), the hold indicator on the keyboard turns
                      on. Pressing F1 (Hold) again allows scrolling to resume.
      F2 (Print)      Pressing F2 (Print) sends the text in the active window to the printer.
                      The output may or may not correspond exactly to the display in the
                      window. The output depends on the window size and font size. See
                      Chapter 8 for more information on printing.
      Ctrl F2         Pressing Ctrl F2 (Print) turns auto print mode on or off. In auto print
                      mode, you can automatically print each line of text as it is received
                      from the host system.
      F3              This key if enabled in the Customize Terminal Manager window lets
                      you hide or display the Terminal Manager window. See Section 3.10.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 251
Using Your Keyboard
15.1 ANSI Keyboard

        Ctrl Shift F3   Pressing Ctrl Shift F3 lets you use the editing keypad to perform
                        some mouse functions. In this mode, the arrow keys move the
                        mouse pointer. The Select , Prev , and Next keys correspond to the
                        three mouse buttons. The mouse continues to operate. There is no
                        indication the mode is on, but the arrow keys will not work for normal
                        editing functions.
                        To turn this mode off, press Ctrl Shift F3 again.
        F4              This key is disabled.
        F5 (Break)      Pressing Break ends communication with your system if you are using
                        a VXT DECterm window running over the serial communication line.
                        Pressing F5 (Break) has no effect on LAT, TCP/IP, or DECnet
                        connections.
        Shift F5        Pressing Shift F5 (Break) performs a disconnect on any VXT DECterm
                        window session (LAT, TCP/IP, DECnet, or serial line). A disconnect is
                        normally used to end communication with a modem in preparation for
                        another call.
        Ctrl F5         Pressing Ctrl F5 (Break) sends the answerback message to the system
                        using LAT, TCP/IP, DECnet, or the serial line.

                                                              Note
                                       Ctrl F5 (Break) sends the answerback message
                                      even if you set the Conceal Answerback
                                      Message feature in the VXT DECterm
                                      Keyboard Options dialog box (Section 8.6).


        User-Defined Keys and Application-Specific Keys
        The function of the remaining top-row keys, F6 to F20 , often depends on
        your application software. Refer to your application software manuals for a
        description of key functions. You can also define the function of these keys
        yourself.
        F6 to F20       When pressed alone, these keys send predefined programming
                        sequences to the host system. Applications that recognize these
                        sequences can use the keys to perform various functions.
                        In VT100 and VT52 modes
                        Keys F11 , F12 , and F13 send control characters ESC, BS, and LF
                        respectively. Keys F6 to F10 and F14 to F20 do not function.




252 Chapter 15
                                                                 Using Your Keyboard
                                                                  15.1 ANSI Keyboard

      Shift F6        User-defined keys (UDKs)
      to              Pressing Shift and one of these keys sends the user-defined function
      Shift 20        for that key. You can define keys F6 to F20 by using programming
                      sequences. You can use any sequence of characters in your definitions.
                      Definitions are loaded from the host system. See the VT320
                      Programmer Reference Manual for details.

15.1.7 Data Processing Keys
      Most versions of the keyboard have some keys with characters on the left half
      and right half of their keycap. Normally, you use the characters on the left half
      of the key. These are called typewriter characters. The characters on the right
      half are for data processing use.
      You can set these keys to send their typewriter or data processing characters,
      by choosing the keyboard mode. See Section 3.3.
      For the following keyboard types, the typewriter and data processing settings
      are identical:
      •    North American and Dutch
      •    When using 8-bit multinational characters: British, German, and
           Portuguese
      If you use 7-bit national replacement character sets (NRCs), make sure you
      have chosen the correct NRC to match your keyboard. All data processing
      keyboards, regardless of language, expect the U.S. ASCII character set to be
      chosen. See Section 8.7.
      # £ Key
      The North American/United Kingdom standard keyboard has only one key with
      three characters.
      To use the £ symbol, you choose the British Keyboard type in the Customize
      Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3). To use the # symbol, you choose the North
      American Keyboard type. There are no separate data processing legends on
      the North American/United Kingdom keyboard.

15.1.8 Compose Characters
      You can type compose sequences to display many more characters than those
      shown on the keycaps. For example, you can display accented letters. See
      Section 15.6.




                             VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 253
Using Your Keyboard
15.1 ANSI Keyboard

15.1.9 Text-Editing Functions
        You can use the following key sequences to move the cursor or delete text in
        most applications.

        To move . . .                                                      Press . . .
        To the next word                                                   Shift   




        To the previous word                                               Shift   




        To the beginning of the line                                       F12 or Ctrl   H
        To the end of the line                                             Shift F12 or Ctrl   E




        To delete . . .                                                    Press . . .
        The characters to the left of the cursor, up to and including      F13 or Ctrl   J
        the beginning of the word
        The characters to the right of the cursor, up to and including     Shift F13
        the end of the word
        The character to the left of the cursor and move all text to       <x
        the right of the deleted character one space to the left
        The character to the right of the cursor and move all text to      Shift   <x
        the right of the deleted character one space to the left
        All characters to the start of the line                            Ctrl    U


15.1.10 Indicator Lights
        The keyboard has two indicator lights that work with the F1 (Hold) and lock
        keys. The indicator lights are at the upper-left of the keyboard.

                            Turns on or off when you press the F1 (Hold) key.


                            Turns on or off when you press the lock key.


15.1.11 Audible Indicators
        The keyboard has two audible indicators, a keyclick and a bell. You can use
        the bell as a margin bell, warning bell, or both. You can turn off the keyclick
        and bell, or adjust their volume. See the Customize Keyboard dialog box
        (Section 3.3).




254 Chapter 15
                                                                Using Your Keyboard
                                                                 15.1 ANSI Keyboard

15.1.12 Keyclick
       You hear the keyclick sound each time you press a key that sends a code or
       causes the terminal to take some immediate action. Shift and Ctrl never click.
       If a key is autorepeating, the keyclick will repeat once for each character or
       key sequence sent. You can turn off the keyclick in the Customize Keyboard
       dialog box.

15.1.13 Bell
       The bell tone is a beeping sound. You can use the bell as a margin bell,
       warning bell, or both.
       Margin Bell
       This bell sounds when the cursor is eight characters from the right margin.
       Warning Bell
       This bell sounds for any of the following conditions:
       •   During the power-up self-test
       •   When the terminal receives a bell (BEL) character from the host system
       •   After a compose character error
       •   After pressing a key for a character that is not available in the current
           character set

15.2 Short ANSI Keyboard
       The short ANSI keyboard is a compact version of the ANSI keyboard, for those
       who make little use of auxiliary editing and numeric keypads. Most keys
       on the short ANSI keyboard work the same way as on the ANSI keyboard.
       This section describes how the short ANSI keyboard differs from the ANSI
       keyboard.
       The short ANSI keyboard is only available in the North American/United
       Kingdom version. The keyboard has three groups of keys. The keys are
       grouped by function.
       The keyboard also has two audible indicators, a keyclick and bell.




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 255
Using Your Keyboard
15.2 Short ANSI Keyboard


             di gi tal                                                                                              3                                                                           2


                 F1         F2            F3       F4            F5                   F6            F7              F8              F9               F10

                F11         F12       F13          F14           Help                 Do          F17               F18             F19              F20

               ~                                                                                                                                                        _            +
                      ESC         !            a         #            $           %        ^                &               *                (             )                                      X
                                 1             2        3             4           5        6                7               8             9                0            -            =
                                                                                              PF1            PF2             PF3             PF4           Find         Insert Remove

               Tab
                                      Q            W         E            R           T        Y                U               I                O             P             }           }                      >~
                                                                                                                                                                             ]           ]            \         <
                                                                                                    7               8               9            -             Select        Prev        Next

              Control
                                          A        S             D            F           G             H               J               K             L            :             "
                                                                                                                                                                                             Return

                                                                                                                                                                   ;             ’
                                                                                                         4               5               6             7               ,,                    Enter

              Shift
                                               Z         X              C         V           B              N               M                   <         >                ?        Shift

                                                                                                                                                 ,         .                /
                                                                                                                1               2                3           ..                      Lock

               Extend       Com-      Alt                                                                                                                         Alt                    Compose
         4                  pose      Function                                                                                                                    Function               Character


                                                                                                        0


                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                                                                                                                          LJ-01101-TI0


               Main keypad                                        Top-row function keys
                                                         




               Arrow keys                                         Extend key
         




15.2.1 Main Keypad
        The layout of the main keypad is similar to the ANSI keyboard, but includes
        an Extend key. The Extend key lets you enter the same keystrokes as the
        keypad and function keys found on the longer ANSI keyboard.

15.2.2 Using Extend Key Sequences for Keypad and Function Keys
        You can use two-stroke Extend key sequences to perform the same functions as
        the following keys that are on the longer ANSI keyboard:
        •      F11 to F20

        •      Editing keypad
        •      Numeric keypad
        These functions are printed on the front of certain keys on the short ANSI
        keyboard. For example, the P key also serves as the Select editing key. To
        access this second function, you press the Extend key first. The following table
        lists all the two-stroke Extend key sequences:




256 Chapter 15
                                                            Using Your Keyboard
                                                       15.2 Short ANSI Keyboard

To Select ...         Press ...              To Select ...         Press ...
Top-Row Function Keys
F11 to                Extend F1 to
F20                   Extend F10


Editing Keypad Keys
Find                  Extend      0           Select                Extend     P
Insert                Extend      -           Prev                  Extend     {
Remove                Extend      =           Next                  Extend     }


Numeric Keypad Keys
PF1                   Extend      6           4                     Extend H
PF2                   Extend      7           5                     Extend J
PF3                   Extend      8           6                     Extend K
PF4                   Extend      9           ,                     Extend L
7                     Extend      Y           1                     Extend N
8                     Extend      U           2                     Extend M
9                     Extend      I           3                     Extend ,
 -                    Extend      O           .                     Extend .
                                              0                     Extend space
                                                                   bar

Special-Function Keys
The main keypad has the same special-function keys as the ANSI keyboard.
The only difference from the ANSI keyboard is the Extend key.
Extend front     Pressing a two-stroke Extend sequence lets you perform the same
                 functions as the following keys on the longer ANSI keyboard: F11 to
                 F20 , editing keypad, and numeric keypad. Functions are printed on
                 the front of short ANSI keys.




                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 257
Using Your Keyboard
15.2 Short ANSI Keyboard

         Extend                            Pressing the Extend and right Shift keys puts the keyboard in caps
        right Shift                        lock mode or shift lock mode. You can select the mode from the
                                           Customize Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3). The default setting is
                                           Caps Lock.
                                           •   In caps lock mode, the alphabetic keys send their uppercase or
                                               shifted character when pressed alone. You can use a Shift key to
                                               send the shifted character on other keys. You turn Caps Lock
                                               mode on and off by pressing the Extend and right Shift keys.
                                           •   In shift lock mode, all keys on the main keypad send their
                                               shifted character. You can turn shift lock mode on by pressing
                                               the Extend and right Shift keys. You can turn it off by pressing
                                               either the Extend and right Shift keys or the Shift key.

        The ` ~ key and < > key work the same way as on the ANSI keyboard, but the
        keycap legends are slightly different.
                        ~ ESC              Pressing this key normally sends the ` or ~ character.
                                           You can also use this key to send the escape (ESC) control character,
                            LJ-01471-TI0




                                           by choosing the Tilde Key Sends ESC button in the VXT DECterm
                                           Keyboard Options dialog box (Section 8.6).
                        >~                 If you use the ` ~ key to send the ESC character, you may want to
         LJ-01473-TI0
                        <
                                           use the <> key to send the ` and ~ characters. To do this, choose the
                                           Angle Bracket Key Sends ‘~ in the VXT DECterm Keyboard Options
                                           dialog box (Section 8.6).

15.2.3 Arrow Keys
        The four arrow keys work the same as on the ANSI keyboard.
        If you press Ctrl Shift F3 , you can use the editing keypad to perform some
        mouse functions. In this mode, the arrow keys move the mouse pointer. The
         Select , Prev , and Next keys correspond to the three mouse buttons. The mouse
        continues to operate. There is no indication the mode is on, but the arrow keys
        will not work for normal editing functions.
        To turn this mode off, press Ctrl Shift F3 again.

15.2.4 Top-Row Function Keys
        Predefined Keys
        The first five top-row keys, F1 to F5 , have the same predefined functions as on
        the ANSI keyboard.




258 Chapter 15
                                                               Using Your Keyboard
                                                          15.2 Short ANSI Keyboard

      User-Defined Keys and Application-Specific Keys
      As on the ANSI keyboard, the function of the remaining top-row keys, F6 to
      F10 and Extend F1 to Extend F10 , often depends on your application software.
      Refer to your application software manuals for a description of key functions.
      You can also define the function of these keys yourself.
      F6 to F10              When pressed, these keys send predefined programming
      and                    sequences to the host system. Applications that recognize
      Extend F1 to           these sequences can use the keys to perform various
      Extend F10             functions.
                             In VT100 and VT52 modes
                             Keys Extend F1 , Extend F2 , and Extend F3 send control
                             characters ESC, BS, and LF respectively. Keys F6 to F10 and
                              Extend F4 to Extend F10 do not function.


                                                              Note
                                           You can use the ` ~ key to send
                                           the ESC character. See the VXT
                                           DECterm Keyboard Options dialog
                                           box in Section 8.6.


      Shift F6               User-defined keys (UDKs)
      to                     Pressing Shift and one of these key sequences sends the
      Shift F10              user-defined function for that key. You can define keys F6 to
      and                     Extend F10 by using programming sequences. You can use
      Shift Extend F1        any sequence of characters in your definitions. Definitions are
      to                     loaded from the host system.
      Shift Extend F10

      # £ Key
      This key works the same way as on the ANSI keyboard.
      To use the £ symbol, you select the British Keyboard setting in the Customize
      Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3). To use the # symbol, you select the North
      American Keyboard setting.
15.2.5 Compose Characters
      The Compose keys work the same as the       Compose Character   keys on the ANSI
      keyboard.
      You can type compose sequences to display many more characters than those
      shown on the keycaps. For example, you can display accented letters. See
      Section 15.6.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 259
Using Your Keyboard
15.2 Short ANSI Keyboard

15.2.6 Indicator Lights
        The short ANSI keyboard does not have indicator lights.

15.2.7 Audible Indicators
        The short ANSI keyboard has the same two audible indicators as the ANSI
        keyboard, a keyclick and a bell. You can use the bell as a margin bell, warning
        bell, or both. You can turn off the keyclick and bell, or adjust their volume.
        See the Customize Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3).

15.3 The PC Keyboard
        You can use Digital’s LK443 or LK444 PC keyboards with a VXT 2000
        windowing terminal. The terminal does not support other PC keyboards.
        You can operate the PC keyboard as a PC keyboard or as an ANSI keyboard
        (Section 15.1). This chapter describes using the PC keyboard keys in both
        modes.

15.3.1 PC Keyboard Models—Setting the Keyboard Type
        There are two PC keyboards, a worldwide model (LK443) and a North
        American model (LK444). This section shows the North American model.
        •   The North American model has 101 keys.
        •   The worldwide model has 102 keys. The worldwide model comes in the
            following versions, for use in different countries.
             Belgium      Germany      Portugal    Switzerland
             Denmark      Italy        Spain       United Kingdom
             France       Norway       Sweden
        When you start up the terminal with a PC keyboard connected, the terminal
        uses the North American PC keymap by default. To choose the keymap for
        one of the worldwide models, change the Customize Keyboard Type to the
        appropriate country (Section 3.3).

15.3.2 Using the ANSI Keyboard Layout
        To switch from a PC keymap to an ANSI keymap, select one of the LK401
        keyboard types (Section 3.3). When you switch to an ANSI keymap, the
        keyboard keys work like the keys on that ANSI keyboard. For example,
        if you have the LK443 North American PC keyboard, you might switch to
        the NORTH_AMERICAN_LK401AA keymap. To switch back to the North
        American PC keymap, you would choose the PC_US_LK443AA keymap.




260 Chapter 15
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Using Your Keyboard
                                                                                                                                                                                                            15.3 The PC Keyboard

      The PC keyboard does not have the following keys, which appear on the ANSI
      keyboard: F16 Do, F17 , F18 , F19 , F20 , and the - hyphen key on the numeric
      keypad. Applications that use these keys may not work properly with the PC
      keyboard, unless the applications provide alternate keystrokes.

15.3.3 Layout
      The PC keyboard has four groups of keys and three indicator lights. The keys
      are grouped by function. The PC keyboard also has two audible indicators, a
      keyclick and bell.

            5                                                                                                                4                                                                                             6

           di gi tal                                                                                                 North American
                                                                                                                                                                                  Print    Scroll   Pause
            Esc             F1         F2       F3          F4               F5       F6           F7           F8                   F9          F10           F11          F12
                                                                                                                                                                                  Screen   Lock

                                                                                                                                                                                  SetUp             Break
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Num Lock   Caps Lock Scroll Lock




                                                                                                                                     _                                                                                                   _
           ~            !        a          #           $        %       ^        &            *            (            )                           +                            Insert   Home     Page       Num    /          *
                        1        2          3        4           5       6        7            8        9                0           -               =
                                                                                                                                                                   BackSpace
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Up         Lock




                                                                                                                                            }             }            |          Delete   End      Page       7      8         9
                            Q          W        E           R        T        Y           U         I            O               P           ]             ]                                        Down
           Tab                                                                                                                                                         \                                      Home              PgUp
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         +

           Caps                                                                                                                  :               "             Enter                                           4      5         6
           Lock             A          S            D       F            G        H        J            K            L           ;               ’


                                 Z          X        C           V       B        N            M        <                >            ?                                                                        1      2         3
                Shift
                                                                                                        ,                .            /
                                                                                                                                                         Shift
                                                                                                                                                                                                               End              PgDn
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Enter

                                                                                                                                                                                                               0                .
           Ctrl                  Alt                                                                                                      Altl                       Ctrl
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Ins              Del




                                                                                                                                                                                                                GSF-MK2510-29-DG

                                                                                  1                                                                                                        2                                   3

                                                                                                                                                                                                                               LJ-00226-TI0




               Main keypad                                                                        Top-row function keys
               Editing keypad                                                                      Escape key
       




                                                                                      
               Numeric keypad                                                                      Indicator lights
       




15.3.4 Main Keypad
      The layout of the main keypad is similar to a typewriter keyboard, with
      alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks, and Shift keys. The main keypad
      also has a number of keys not found on a typewriter, such as the Ctrl and Alt
      modifier keys.
      Modifier keys are pressed in combination with another key, to modify the
      code sent by that key. Prefix keys are pressed and released before pressing
      another key, to change the function of one or more keystrokes.



                                                                                  VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 261
Using Your Keyboard
15.3 The PC Keyboard

        Special-Function Keys
        The main keypad and top row have the following special-function keys:
        Tab                 Pressing Tab moves the cursor to the next tab stop.
        Ctrl                Holding down Ctrl and pressing another key sends a control code to
                            the host.
                            For example, Ctrl Z means to hold down Ctrl and press the Z key.
         Caps Lock          Pressing the Caps Lock key puts the keyboard in caps lock mode
                            or shift lock mode. You can select the mode from the Customize
                            Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3). The default setting is Caps Lock
                            mode.
                            •   In Caps Lock mode, the alphabetic keys send their uppercase or
                                shifted character when pressed alone. You can use a Shift key to
                                send the shifted characters on other keys. You turn Caps Lock
                                mode on and off by pressing the Caps Lock key.
                            •   In Shift Lock mode, all keys on the main keypad send their
                                shifted character. You can turn Shift Lock mode on by pressing
                                the Caps Lock key. You can turn it off by pressing either the
                                 Caps Lock key or the Shift key.

        Shift               Holding down a Shift key and pressing a standard key generates the
                            uppercase character on the key.
        Enter               Pressing Enter sends a carriage return to the host, which usually
                            puts the cursor either at the beginning of the next line or at the
                            beginning of the same line.
                            Pressing Enter normally moves the cursor to the beginning of the
                            next line.
          
                Backspace   Pressing   
                                           Backspace   deletes one character to the left of the
                            cursor.
        Space bar           Pressing the space bar adds a space character. You use spaces to
                            separate words or move the cursor forward.
        Alt                 Alt is used to generate characters or alternate functions that do not
                            appear as standard keys on your PC keyboard. You can use Alt with
                            another key to generate additional codes, or with the function keys
                            to generate a third-level function for the key. See Section 15.1.8.
                            When you select the North American keyboard type, both Alt keys
                            work the same.
        AltGr               You use AltGr with Janus-faced or front-faced keys to generate the
        (right)             third character on a keycap. The North American PC keyboard does
                            not have an AltGr key.




262 Chapter 15
                                                                     Using Your Keyboard
                                                                    15.3 The PC Keyboard

15.3.5 Janus-Faced and Front-Faced Character Keys
      All PC keyboards, except the North American and United Kingdom, have
      keycaps with more than two characters. In most cases, the third character
      is on the top of the keycap, to the right of the first character. These keys are
      called Janus-faced character keys. In other cases the extra characters are on
      the front of the keycap. These keys are called front-faced character keys.
      To display the third character on a Janus-faced or front-faced key:
      •      Press AltGr and the selected key.

15.3.6 Editing Keypad
      The editing keypad has four arrow keys and six editing keys.
      Pressing an arrow key normally moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.
      For example, pressing the   key moves the cursor down one line.
      You can use the editing keys in several ways:
      •      For panning up or down a page, or for changing the size of a window on
             the screen.
      •      For special functions defined by the application software.

15.3.7 Numeric Keypad
      You can use the numeric keypad to enter numbers and arithmetic operators.
      If you use an MS–DOS emulator, you can also use the numeric keypad as a
      cursor keypad. You press the Num Lock key to change from a numeric to a
      cursor keypad and back. In cursor keypad mode, the arrow keys and the Home
      key work exactly like the arrow keys on the editing keypad.

15.3.8 Top-Row Function Keys
      The top-row keys perform the following functions:
      F1 to F5            These keys perform the same functions as on the ANSI keyboard
                          (Predefined Keys).
       F6 to F12          Your application software defines the functions of these keys. See
                          your application manual for details.
       Esc                Pressing Esc begins a control sequence.
      The function of the Print Screen , Scroll Lock , and Pause keys depends on your
      operating system environment and the keyboard type selected in the Customize
      Keyboard dialog box. In an MS–DOS environment (MS–DOS emulation):




                                VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 263
Using Your Keyboard
15.3 The PC Keyboard

         Print Screen              Prints the screen.
         Scroll Lock               Stops the screen from scrolling.
         Pause                     Stops or cancels a command.
        In a non MS–DOS environment, the function of          Print Screen , Scroll Lock , and
         Pause is application-specific.

        When you change the keyboard type to an LK401 ANSI keymap:
        •    F13 becomes the Print Screen key.

        •    F14 becomes the Scroll Lock key.

        •    Help (F15) becomes the the Pause key.

15.3.9 Audible Indicators
        The PC keyboard has two audible indicators, a keyclick and a bell. You can use
        a margin bell, warning bell, or both. See Section 3.3.

15.3.10 Keyclick
        You hear the keyclick sound each time you press a key that sends a code or
        causes the terminal to take some immediate action. If a key is autorepeating,
        the keyclick will repeat once for each character or key sequence sent. Keys do
        not click under the following conditions:
        •   You press Shift , Ctrl , or Alt . These keys never click except when Shift is
            leaving the shift-lock state.
        •   You disable the Keyclick Volume in the Customize Keyboard dialog box
            (Section 3.3).
        •   You press a key or key combination that does not have a function under the
            current operating conditions.

15.3.11 Bell
        The bell tone is a beeping sound. You can use the bell as a margin bell,
        warning bell, or both.
        Margin Bell
        This bell sounds when the cursor is eight characters from the right margin.




264 Chapter 15
                                                                 Using Your Keyboard
                                                                15.3 The PC Keyboard

      Warning Bell
      This bell sounds for any of the following conditions:
      •   During the power-up self-test
      •   When the terminal receives a bell (BEL) character from the host system
      •   After a compose character error

15.3.12 Redefining Keys
      You can use the X application xmodmap to modify key definitions.
      Section 15.3.13 lists the default key definitions. Each key on the keyboard
      sends a unique keycode to the terminal, and each keycode is assigned a key
      symbol. The applications that you use perform actions based on key symbols.
      To change a key’s function, you redefine the key by changing the key symbol.
      For example, if you wanted to redefine the Insert key to work like the Find key,
      you would look up the keycode for the Insert key in the Section 15.3.13. Then
      you would assign the key symbol Find to that keycode by using the xmodmap
      program.
      For UNIX, ULTRIX, and DEC OSF/1 AXP systems
      Here is the command format for redefining a key:
      % xmodmap -e "keycode 0x keycode = key_symbol"
      Examples
      •   To define the Insert key to work like the Find key:
          % xmodmap -e "keycode 0x8A = Find"
      •   To make the Insert key work normally again:
          % xmodmap -e "keycode 0x8A = Insert"
      For OpenVMS systems

                                            Note
          The xmodmap program is available for systems using a DECwindows
          Motif version later than Version 1.1.


      First, define a logical name (like xmodmap) pointing to the xmodmap
      executable image on your system. For example:
      $ xmodmap:==$DECW$UTILS:XMODMAP.EXE



                             VXT 2000+/VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 265
Using Your Keyboard
15.3 The PC Keyboard

        Here is the command format for redefining a key:
        $ xmodmap -e "keycode 0xkeycode = key_symbol"
        Examples
        •   To define the Insert key to work like the Find key:
            $ xmodmap -e "keycode 0x8A = Find"
        •   To make the Insert key work normally again:
            $ xmodmap -e "keycode 0x8A = Insert"

15.3.13 PC Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
        Table 15–1 lists the key labels, keycodes, and key symbols for each key on the
        North American PC keyboard.

        Table 15–1 PC Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
        Key                Key      Key              Shifted Key
        Label              Code     Symbol           Symbol
        Main Keypad Keys
          Shift            AB       Shift_R
        Alt                AC       Alt_L
        Ctrl               AD       Control_R
          Shift            AE       Shift_L
        Ctrl               AF       Control_L
        Caps Lock          B0       Caps_Lock
        Alt Gr             B2       Alt_R
        
           Backspace       BC       Delete
        Enter              BD       Return
        Tab                BE       Tab
        ‘~                 BF       quoteleft        asciitilde
        1!                 C0       1                exclam
        Q                  C1       Q
        A                  C2       A
        Z                  C3       Z
        2@                 C5       2                at
        W                  C6       W
        S                  C7       S
        X                  C8       X
        3#                 CB       3                numbersign
                                                                   (continued on next page)




266 Chapter 15
                                                              Using Your Keyboard
                                                             15.3 The PC Keyboard


Table 15–1 (Cont.) PC Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
Key                Key        Key              Shifted Key
Label              Code       Symbol           Symbol
Main Keypad Keys
E                  CC         E
D                  CD         D
C                  CE         C
4$                 D0         4                dollar
R                  D1         R
F                  D2         F
V                  D3         V
Spacebar           D4         Space
5%                 D6         5                percent
T                  D7         T
G                  D8         G
B                  D9         B
6^                 DB         6                asciicircum
Y                  DC         Y
H                  DD         H
N                  DE         N
7&                 E0         7                ampersand
U                  E1         U
J                  E2         J
M                  E3         M
8*                 E5         8                asterisk
K                  E7         K
,<                 E8         comma            less
9(                 EA         9                parenleft
O                  EB         O
L                  EC         L
. >                ED         period           greater
0)                 EF         0                parenright
P                  F0         P
;:                 F2         semicolon        colon
/?                 F3         slash            question
=+                 F5         equal            plus
]}                 F6         bracketright     braceright
\ |                F7         backslash        bar
                                                               (continued on next page)




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 267
Using Your Keyboard
15.3 The PC Keyboard


        Table 15–1 (Cont.) PC Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
        Key                Key    Key           Shifted Key
        Label              Code   Symbol        Symbol
        Main Keypad Keys
        -_                 F9     minus         underscore
        [{                 FA     bracketleft   braceleft
        ’"                 FB     quoteright    quotedbl


        Editing and Arrow Keypad Keys
        Insert             8A     Insert
        Home               8B     Home
        Page Up            8C     Prior
        Delete             8D     Delete
        End                8E     End
        Page Down          8F     Next
        
                           A7     Left
        
                           A8     Right
        
                           A9     Down
                           AA     Up


        Top-Row Function Keys
        Esc                55     Escape
        F1                 56     F1
        F2                 57     F2
        F3                 58     F3
        F4                 59     F4
        F5                 5A     F5
        F6                 64     F6
        F7                 65     F7
        F8                 66     F8
        F9                 67     F9
        F10                68     F10
        F11                71     F11
        F12                72     F12
        Print Screen       73     Print
        Scroll Lock        74     Scroll_Lock
        Pause              7C     Pause

                                                              (continued on next page)




268 Chapter 15
                                                           Using Your Keyboard
                                                          15.3 The PC Keyboard


Table 15–1 (Cont.) PC Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
Key             Key         Key             Shifted Key
Label           Code        Symbol          Symbol
Numeric Keypad Keys
0               92          KP_0
.               94          KP_Decimal
Enter           95          KP_Enter
1               96          KP_1
2               97          KP_2
3               98          KP_3
4               99          KP_4
5               9A          KP_5
6               9B          KP_6
+               9C          KP_Add
7               9D          KP_7
8               9E          KP_8
9               9F          KP_9
Num Lock        A1          Num_Lock
/               A2          KP_Divide
*               A3          KP_Multiply
-               A4          KP_Subtract




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 269
Using Your Keyboard
15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard

15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard
                    This section describes the Sun style keyboard (LK460) for the VXT 2000
                    windowing terminal. The Sun style keyboard comes in a North American
                    model (101 keys) only.
                    When you start up the terminal with a Sun style keyboard connected, the
                    terminal automatically chooses the Sun style keyboard map. To choose
                    the keymap for another keyboard model, change the Keyboard Type in the
                    Customize Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3).

15.4.1 Layout
                    The Sun style keyboard has four groups of keys and four indicator lights. The
                    keys are grouped by function. The Sun style keyboard also has two audible
                    indicators, a keyclick and bell.




                                                                                                                         4                                                                                                 6
                         F1          F2            F3           F4          F5          F6              F7           F8          F9          F10         F11         F12          |           Delete       Caps         Scroll          Num
                                                                                                                                                                                  \                        Lock Compose Lock            Lock


                                 5                                                                                                                                                                                             Scroll
Stop        Again                                                                                                                                                                                          Pause   PrSc                 Num
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Lock     Lock
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Break
Props       Undo         Esc         !             @            #           $           %               ^            &           *           (           )           _            =           Back Space
                                                                                                                                                                                                               =       /           *        -
                                     1             2            3           4           5               6            7           8           9           0           -            +

Front       Copy         Tab             Q              W           E           R               T            Y           U           I           O           P           {            }         Return     7       8           9
                                                                                                                                                                         [            ]                    Home                Pg Up
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        +
Open        Paste        Control               A            B           D           F               G            H           J           K           L           :           "            ~                4       5           6
                                                                                                                                                                 ;           ’            ‘

Find        Cut          Shift                     Z            X           C           V               B            N           M           <           >           ?           Shift             Line    1       2           3     Enter
                                                                                                                                             ,           .           /                             Feed    End                 Pg Dn

Help                     Caps            Alt                                                                                                                                          Com        Alt       0                   .
                         Lock                                                                                                                                                         pose       Graph     Ins                 Del


        2                                                                                                                1                                                                                                 3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           LJ-03682-TI0

                              Main keypad                                                              Top-row function keys
                              Editing keypad                                                            Escape key
                     




                                                                                            
                              Numeric keypad                                                            Indicator lights
                     




270 Chapter 15
                                                                   Using Your Keyboard
                                                            15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard


15.4.2 Main Keypad
      The layout of the main keypad is similar to a typewriter keyboard, with
      alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks, and Shift keys. The main keypad
      also has a number of keys not found on a typewriter, such as the Control and
      Alt modifier keys.

      Modifier keys are pressed in combination with another key, to modify the
      code sent by that key. Prefix keys are pressed and released before pressing
      another key, to change the function of one or more keystrokes.
      Special-Function Keys
      The main keypad and top row have the following special-function keys:
      Esc                 Pressing Esc begins a control sequence.
      Tab                 Pressing Tab moves the cursor to the next tab stop.
      Control             Holding down Control and pressing another key sends a control code
                          to the host.
                          For example, Control    Z means to hold down Control and press the
                           Z key.
      Shift               Holding down a Shift key and pressing a standard key generates the
                          uppercase character on the key.
       Caps Lock          Pressing the Caps Lock key puts the keyboard in caps lock mode
                          or shift lock mode. You can select the mode from the Customize
                          Keyboard dialog box (Section 3.3). The default setting is Caps Lock
                          mode.
                          •   In Caps Lock mode, the alphabetic keys send their uppercase or
                              shifted character when pressed alone. You can use a Shift key to
                              send the shifted characters on other keys. You turn Caps Lock
                              mode on and off by pressing the Caps Lock key.
                          •   In Shift Lock mode, all keys on the main keypad send their
                              shifted character. You can turn Shift Lock mode on by pressing
                              the Caps Lock key. You can turn it off by pressing either the
                               Caps Lock key or the Shift key.

      Return              Pressing Return sends a carriage return to the host, which usually
                          puts the cursor either at the beginning of the next line or at the
                          beginning of the same line.
                          Pressing Return normally moves the cursor to the beginning of the
                          next line.
        
              Backspace   Pressing   
                                         Backspace moves the cursor one character to the left.




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 271
Using Your Keyboard
15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard

        Space bar          Pressing the space bar adds a space character. You use spaces to
                           separate words or move the cursor forward.
                           You use    instead of Alt in key sequences for VXT 2000 functions.
                           For example, you press Ctrl     Del to reboot the terminal. If you
                           use the keyboard instead of the mouse to navigate windows, use
                           instead of Alt in key sequences (Section 15.5).
        Alt                You use Alt key sequences to generate added characters or functions.
                           To compose added characters, see Section 15.1.8. When you use Alt
                           with certain function keys, you generate a third-level function for
                           the key.
         Alt Graph         You use Alt Graph with Janus-faced or front-faced keys to generate
                           the third character on a keycap.

15.4.3 Editing Keypad
        The 11 editing keys generally perform functions defined by application
        software. See your Sun system documentation.

15.4.4 Numeric Keypad
        You can use the numeric keypad to enter numbers and arithmetic operators.
        You can also use the numeric keypad as a cursor keypad. You press the
         Num Lock key to change from a numeric to a cursor keypad and back.

        In cursor keypad mode, you can use arrow key functions. Pressing an arrow
        key normally moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow. For example,
        pressing the    key moves the cursor down one line. Other keys let you
        •     Pan up or down a page
        •     Change the size of a window on the screen
        •     Perform functions defined by your application software
        The numeric keypad also includes special-function keys. The function of
        the PrSc , Scroll Lock , and Pause keys depends on your operating system
        environment and the keyboard type selected. When using the Open Look
        window manager:
        PrSc                       Prints the screen.
         Scroll Lock               Stops the screen from scrolling.
         Pause                     Stops or cancels a command.
         Num Lock                  Changes numeric keypad to a cursor keypad.




272 Chapter 15
                                                                 Using Your Keyboard
                                                          15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard

15.4.5 Top-Row Function Keys
       The top-row keys perform the following functions:
       Delete            Pressing Delete deletes one character to the left of the cursor.

15.4.6 Audible Indicators
       The Sun style keyboard has two audible indicators, a keyclick and a bell. You
       can use a margin bell, warning bell, or both.

15.4.7 Keyclick
       You hear the keyclick sound each time you press a key that sends a code or
       causes the terminal to take some immediate action. If a key is autorepeating,
       the keyclick will repeat once for each character or key sequence sent. Keys do
       not click under the following conditions:
       •   You press Shift , Control , or Alt . These keys never click except when Shift is
           leaving the shift-lock state.
       •   You disable the Keyclick Volume in the Customize Keyboard dialog box
           (Section 3.3).
       •   You press a key or key combination that does not have a function under the
           current operating conditions.

15.4.8 Bell
       The bell tone is a beeping sound. You can use the bell as a margin bell,
       warning bell, or both.
       Margin Bell
       This bell sounds when the cursor is eight characters from the right margin.
       Warning Bell
       This bell sounds for any of the following conditions:
       •   During the power-up self-test
       •   When the terminal receives a bell (BEL) character from the host system
       •   After a compose character error




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 273
Using Your Keyboard
15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard

15.4.9 Redefining Keys
        You can use the X application xmodmap to modify key definitions.
        Section 15.4.10 lists the default key definitions. Each key on the keyboard
        sends a unique keycode to the terminal, and each keycode is assigned a key
        symbol. The applications that you use perform actions based on key symbols.
        To change a key’s function, you redefine the key by changing the key symbol.
        For example, if you wanted to redefine the Insert key to work like the Find key,
        you would look up the keycode for the Insert key in the Section 15.4.10. Then
        you would assign the key symbol Find to that keycode by using the xmodmap
        program.
        Here is the command format for redefining a key using its keycode:
        % xmodmap -e "keycode 0x keycode = key_symbol"
        Examples
        •   To define the Insert key to work like the Find key:
            % xmodmap -e "keycode 0x8A = Find"
        •   To make the Insert key work normally again:
            % xmodmap -e "keycode 0x8A = Insert"
        You can also redefine a key by looking up its key symbol and assigning a new
        key symbol. However, make sure the key symbol you choose performs the
        expected function. In other words, make sure that a new keycode was not
        assigned to the key symbol. Here is the format for assigning a new key symbol:
        % xmodmap -e "keysym old_key_symbol = new_key_symbol"
        Example
        To define the Backspace key to work like the Del key:
        % xmodmap -e "keysym BackSpace = Delete"

15.4.10 Sun Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
        Table 15–2 lists the keycodes and key symbols for each key on the Sun style
        keyboard. There are up to four key symbols for each keycode.




274 Chapter 15
                                                           Using Your Keyboard
                                                    15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard


Table 15–2 Sun Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
Key
Code Key Symbols                                      Key Symbol Valuess

8    F11           F11       Cancel                   ffc8     ffc8    ff69
a    F12           F12       Redo                     ffc9     ffc9    ff66
c    F1                                               ffbe             ffbe
d    F2                                               ffbf             ffbf
e    F10                                              ffc7             ffc7
f    F3                                               ffc0             ffc0
10   SunXK_F36                                        1005ff10         1005ff10
11   F4                                               ffc1             ffc1
12   SunXK_F37                                        1005ff11         1005ff11
13   F5                                               ffc2             ffc2
14   Mode_switch                                      ff7e             ff7e
15   F6                                               ffc3             ffc3
17   F7                                               ffc4             ffc4
18   F8                                               ffc5             ffc5
19   F9                                               ffc6             ffc6
1a   Alt_L                                            ffe9             ffe9
1c   F21           F21       Pause                    ffd2     ffd2    ff13
1d   F22           F22       Print                    ffd3     ffd3    ff61
1e   F23           F23       Scroll_Lock    Break     ffd4     ffd4    ff14       ff6b
20   F13           F13       SunXK_Props              ffca     ffca    1005ff70
21   F14           F14       Undo                     ffcb     ffcb    ff65
24   Escape                                           ff1b             ff1b
25   1             exclam                             31       21      31         21
26   2             at                                 32       40      32         40
27   3             numbersign                         33       23      33         23
28   4             dollar                             34       24      34         24
29   5             percent                            35       25      35         25
2a   6             asciicircum                        36       5e      36         5e
2b   7             ampersand                          37       26      37         26
2c   8             asterisk                           38       2a      38         2a
2d   9             parenleft                          39       28      39         28
2e   0             parenright                         30       29      30         29
2f   minus         underscore                         2d       5f      2d         5f
30   equal         plus                               3d       2b      3d         2b
31   grave         asciitilde                         60       7e      60         7e
32   BackSpace                                        ff08             ff08
34   F24           F24       KP_Equal                 ffd5     ffd5    ffbd
35   F25           F25       KP_Divide                ffd6     ffd6    ffaf
                                                              (continued on next page)




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 275
Using Your Keyboard
15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard


        Table 15–2 (Cont.) Sun Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
        Key
        Code Key Symbols                                       Key Symbol Valuess

        36   F26            F26          KP_Multiply           ffd7    ffd7    ffaa
        38   F15            F15          SunXK_Front           ffcc    ffcc    1005ff71
        39   Delete         Delete       KP_Decimal            ffff    ffff    ffae
        3a   F16            F16          SunXK_Copy            ffcd    ffcd    1005ff72
        3c   Tab                                               ff09            ff09
        3d   Q                                                 71      51      71         51
        3e   W                                                 77      57      77         57
        3f   E                                                 65      45      65         45
        40   R                                                 72      52      72         52
        41   T                                                 74      54      74         54
        42   Y                                                 79      59      79         59
        43   U                                                 75      55      75         55
        44   I                                                 69      49      69         49
        45   O                                                 6f      4f      6f         4f
        46   P                                                 70      50      70         50
        47   bracketleft    braceleft                          5b      7b      5b         7b
        48   bracketright   braceright                         5d      7d      5d         7d
        49   Delete                                            ffff            ffff
        4a   Multi_key                                         ff20            ff20
        4b   F27            F27          KP_7          Home    ffd8    ffd8    ffb7       ff50
        4c   Up             F28          KP_8                  ff52    ffd9    ffb8
        4d   F29            F29          KP_9          Prior   ffda    ffda    ffb9       ff55
        4e   KP_Subtract                                       ffad            ffad
        4f   F17            F17          SunXK_Open            ffce    ffce    1005ff73
        50   F18            F18          SunXK_Paste           ffcf    ffcf    1005ff74
        53   Control_L                                         ffe3            ffe3
        54   A                                                 61      41      61         41
        55   S                                                 73      53      73         53
        56   D                                                 64      44      64         44
        57   F                                                 66      46      66         46
        58   G                                                 67      47      67         47
        59   H                                                 68      48      68         48
        5a   J                                                 6a      4a      6a         4a
        5b   K                                                 6b      4b      6b         4b
        5c   L                                                 6c      4c      6c         4c
        5d   semicolon      colon                              3b      3a      3b         3a
        5e   apostrophe     quotedbl                           27      22      27         22
        5f   backslash      bar          brokenbar             5c      7c      a6
                                                                      (continued on next page)




276 Chapter 15
                                                           Using Your Keyboard
                                                    15.4 The Sun Style Keyboard


Table 15–2 (Cont.) Sun Keyboard Keycodes and Symbol Assignments
Key
Code Key Symbols                                      Key Symbol Valuess

60   Return                                           ff0d            ff0d
61   KP_Enter                                         ff8d            ff8d
62   Left          F30        KP_4                    ff51    ffdb    ffb4
63   F31           F31        KP_5                    ffdc    ffdc    ffb5
64   Right         F32        KP_6                    ff53    ffdd    ffb6
65   Insert        Insert     KP_0                    ff63    ff63    ffb0
66   F19           F19        Find                    ffd0    ffd0    ff68
68   F20           F20        SunXK_Cut               ffd1    ffd1    1005ff75
69   Num_Lock                                         ff7f            ff7f
6a   Shift_L                                          ffe1            ffe1
6b   Z                                                7a      5a      7a         5a
6c   X                                                78      58      78         58
6d   C                                                63      43      63         43
6e   V                                                76      56      76         56
6f   B                                                62      42      62         42
70   N                                                6e      4e      6e         4e
71   M                                                6d      4d      6d         4d
72   comma         less                               2c      3c      2c         3c
73   period        greater                            2e      3e      2e         3e
74   slash         question                           2f      3f      2f         3f
75   Shift_R                                          ffe2            ffe2
76   Linefeed                                         ff0a            ff0a
77   R13           R13        KP_1           End      ffde    ffde    ffb1       ff57
78   Down          F34        KP_2                    ff54    ffdf    ffb2
79   F35           F35        KP_3           Next     ffe0    ffe0    ffb3       ff56
7d   Help                                             ff6a            ff6a
7e   Caps_Lock                                        ffe5            ffe5
7f   Meta_L                                           ffe7            ffe7
80   space                                            20              20
81   Meta_R                                           ffe8            ffe8
84   KP_Add                                           ffab            ffab




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 277
Using Your Keyboard
15.5 Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse

15.5 Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse
        This section describes how to use the keyboard to navigate through windows
        and choose items from menus and dialog boxes. You will find this section
        useful if you prefer using the keyboard rather than the mouse, or if your mouse
        is not working.
        Sun Style Keyboard: Use     Instead of Alt
        On the Sun style keyboard, use    instead of Alt in keyboard navigation
        sequences.

15.5.1 Using the Editing Keypad to Perform Mouse Functions
        When you enable the editing keypad to perform mouse functions, you can still
        use your mouse. There is no indication the mode is on, but you cannot use the
        arrow keys for normal editing functions.

        To...                                            Press...
        Enable the editing keypad to perform mouse       Ctrl Shift F3
        functions.
        Move the mouse pointer                                 ,        ,              ,   




        Perform MB1 functions                            Select
        Perform MB2 functions                            Prev
        Perform MB3 functions                            Next
        Disable the editing keypad from performing       Ctrl Shift F3 again
        mouse functions.


15.5.2 Using Menu Bars and Pull-Down Menus

        To...                                            Press...
        Move to the first menu in a menu bar             F10
        Pull down a menu from the menu bar               Alt       mnemonic
        Move to the next menu item in a pull-down menu             or    




        Move to another menu in the menu bar                       or       




        Move from one pull-down menu to the preceding             , Ctrl                       , or Ctrl
        menu on the left in the menu bar

         The underlined character in the menu name




278 Chapter 15
                                                             Using Your Keyboard
                                      15.5 Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse

      To...                                              Press...
      Move from one pull-down menu to the next menu           , Ctrl      , or Ctrl   




      on the right in the menu bar
      Choose a menu item                                 Return , Ctrl Return , or Enter
      Remove a menu, leaving the cursor on the menu      F11 (ESC)
      name
      Move the cursor from the menu bar to where         F11 (ESC)
      it was before you started using the menu bar
      (explicit focus policy), or
      Move the cursor from the menu bar to wherever
      the pointer is located (implicit focus policy)
      Remove all displayed menus                         F10


15.5.3 Using Pop-Up Menus
      To...                                              Press...
      Display a pop-up menu                              F4
      Move to the next menu item in a pop-up menu              or   




      Display a submenu from a pop-up menu item           




      Choose a menu item                                 Return , Ctrl Return , or Enter
      Remove the displayed menu                          F11 (ESC)
      Dismiss the menu                                   F4


15.5.4 Using Submenus

      To...                                              Press...
      Display a submenu                                  Any of these:
                                                         Arrow key (in direction of
                                                         submenu), Ctrl arrow key, Return ,
                                                         Ctrl Return , or Enter
      Choose a menu item                                 Return , Ctrl Return , or Enter
      Choose the default entry in a submenu              Alt   mnemonic
      Move to another menu item in a submenu                   or   




      Remove the submenu and move back to the             




      parent menu

       The underlined character in the menu name




                                VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 279
Using Your Keyboard
15.5 Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse

        To...                                                    Press...
        From the submenu to the parent menu                           , Ctrl          , or Ctrl
        Move from the parent menu to the default menu                 , Ctrl           , or Ctrl   




        item in the associated submenu


15.5.5 Navigating Windows
        This section describes how to use your keyboard to move between and within
        windows.
        Moving Between Windows
        To move between groups of windows:

        To move...                                               Press...
        From one group of windows to another                     Alt Tab or Alt F11
        From one minimized window to another when the            Alt Tab or Alt F11
        minimized windows are not in an icon box
        From one minimized window to another in an               Arrow keys
        icon box
        Within a group of windows                                Alt F6
        To the previous group of windows                         Alt Shift F11 or Alt Shift Tab
        To move between minimized windows in an icon             Arrow keys
        box

         If you use the mouse pointer to make windows active (Section 12.3), you cannot use the Alt Tab
        or Alt F11 functions.


15.5.6 Miscellaneous


        To ...                                                   Press...
        Pop up the window menu of a minimized window             F4
        when that window is in an icon box.
        Restore a minimized icon box                             Alt F5 or Return


        Moving Within Windows
        To move within menus:




280 Chapter 15
                                                    Using Your Keyboard
                             15.5 Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse

To ...                                           Press...
Focus on the menu bar                             F10
Pull down the window menu                        Alt +space bar or Shift F11
Move from one tab group to another               Tab


To choose items in the window menu:

To ...                                           Press...
Lower a window to the bottom of the window       Alt F3
stack
Close (not minimize) a window                    Alt F4
Restore a minimized window                       Alt F5
Move a window                                    Alt F7
Size a window                                    Alt F8
Minimize a window                                Alt F9
Maximize a window                                Alt F10


To move a window around the screen:
1. Press Alt F7 .
2. Use the arrow keys to move the window in the desired direction. You can
   also press Ctrl + arrow keys to move the window several pixels at a time.
3. Press Return or Ctrl Return to finish the operation.
To size a window:
1. Press Alt F8 .
2. Press one arrow key to indicate which side of the window to size. For
   example, press    for the top of the window.
     You can also press two arrow keys in a row to indicate which corner to size.
     For example, press          to indicate the upper-left corner.
3. Press the arrow keys to size the window in the desired direction. You can
   also press Ctrl arrow keys to size the window several pixels at a time.
4. Press Return or Ctrl Return to finish the operation.




                        VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 281
Using Your Keyboard
15.5 Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse

15.5.7 Using Dialog Boxes


        To move...                                          Press...
        Forward from tab group to tab group (field to       Tab or Ctrl Tab
        field)
        Backward from tab group to tab group                Shift Tab or Ctrl Shift Tab
        From button to button in a tab group                Arrow keys
        To a pop-up Options menu                            Select , space bar, or Ctrl +space bar




        To activate...                                      Press...
        The default selection in the dialog box             Return , Ctrl Return , or Enter
        A check or radio button in a group                  Select , space bar, or Ctrl +space bar
        A push button in a group                            Select , space bar, Ctrl +space bar,
                                                            Return
        A push button in a group                            Ctrl Return or Enter
        An item in an Options menu                          Return , Ctrl Return , or Enter




        To cancel...                                        Press...
        A dialog box or an Options menu                     Alt F4



15.6 Typing Additional Characters
        The terminal lets you type more characters than appear on your keyboard. For
        example, you can type accented characters or a © symbol. This chapter lists
        the available characters and shows you how to select them.
        To enter one of these characters, you type a sequence of keys. Most sequences
        begin with one of the Compose Character keys. If you use the German
        keyboard, you use the Group Shift key instead of Compose Character .
        This chapter describes the following types of key sequences:
        •   Three-stroke      Compose Character   sequences (with all LK401 keyboards)
        •    Group Shift   sequences (with the German keyboard)




282 Chapter 15
                                                               Using Your Keyboard
                                                   15.6 Typing Additional Characters

      •   Two-stroke key sequences (with keyboards that have nonspacing diacritical
          keys)
      •   Hexadecimal key sequences (for programmers)
      Two basic factors determine the key sequences you can use.
      •   The Keyboard Type setting, which should match your keyboard type
          (Section 3.3).
      •   The character set the terminal is currently using (Chapter 8).

15.6.1 What Characters Can I Type?
      You can type any of the characters in the character set the terminal is
      currently using. You can select from two 8-bit multinational sets (DEC
      Multinational or ISO Latin Alphabet No. 1) or many 7-bit national
      replacement character sets (NRCs).

      To choose ...                                      Use...
      The use of 8-bit multinational sets or 7-bit NRC   The VXT DECterm General
      sets                                               Options dialog box (Section 8.5).
      An 8-bit multinational set                         The VXT DECterm General
                                                         Options dialog box.
      A 7-bit NRC set                                    The 7-Bit NRCS Selection dialog
                                                         box (Section 8.7).

      By default, the terminal uses the DEC Multinational character set. Section 8.5
      describes multinational and national character sets.

15.6.2 Key Sequences with Nonspacing Diacritical Keys
      Table 15–3 lists the keyboards that have keys with diacritical marks.
      Table 15–4 lists all the additional characters for all character sets in the
      terminal. Many of these characters include a diacritical mark. For example, Á
      includes an acute accent.
      To enter a character that has a diacritical mark, you press the diacritical key
      followed by the character. If your keyboard does not have the diacritical key,
      you must press the Compose Character key followed by the correct key sequence
      listed in Table 15–4.




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 283
Using Your Keyboard
15.6 Typing Additional Characters

        To use diacritical keys, you must be using a multinational character set.

        Table 15–3 Keyboards with Diacritical Marks
                                Grave            Acute               Circumflex   Tilde
        Keyboard                Accent           Accent              Accent       Mark    Umlaut

        Finnish                 yes              no                  yes          yes     no
        Flemish                 yes              no                  yes          yes     yes
        French/Belgian          yes              no                  yes          yes     yes
        French Canadian         yes              no                  yes          yes     no
        German                  yes              yes                 yes          yes     yes
        Portuguese              no               no                  no           yes     no
        Spanish                 yes              yes                 yes          yes     yes
        Swedish                 yes              no                  yes          yes     no
        Swiss (French)          yes              no                  yes          yes     yes
        Swiss (German)          yes              no                  yes          yes     yes


15.6.3 How to Type a Character Using the Compose Character Key
        To enter a       Compose Character       key sequence:
        1. Find the character you want to type in Table 15–4.
        2. Press the         Compose Character         key.
        3. Type the sequence in Table 15–4 for the character you want.
        Example
        To type an é:
        1. Find the é character in Table 15–4.
        2. Press         Compose Character   .
        3. Type      e    and   ’   (apostrophe).

                                                              Note
            If you try to enter a character that is not available in the current
            character set, a warning bell sounds. See Section 15.6.5.




284 Chapter 15
                                                                      Using Your Keyboard
                                                          15.6 Typing Additional Characters

15.6.4 How to Type a Character Using the Group Shift Key
      If you select the Austrian-German keyboard type in the Customize Keyboard
      dialog box (Chapter 3), the Group Shift key replaces the Compose Character key.
      Many keys on the German keyboard have a second group of legends on the
      right half of their keycap. These legends are called Group-2.
      To enter a single character from Group-2:
      1. Press and release the       Group Shift   key.
      2. Type the key that has the desired character on the right half of the keycap.
         The character appears on the screen.
      Example
      To type an ø:
      1. Press   Group Shift .

      2. Type the key that has the ø character on the right half of the keycap: O ø .
      To enter a series of characters from Group-2:
      1. Hold down the      Group Shift   key.
      2. Type the series of keys that have the desired characters on the right half of
         their keycaps. The characters appear on the screen.
      3. When you are done typing characters from Group-2, release the Group Shift
         key.

15.6.5 Invalid Sequences
      When you complete a valid compose or group-shift sequence, the character
      appears on the screen. If you use an invalid sequence, the terminal cancels the
      sequence and sounds the warning bell.
      Some compose characters require that you type the key sequence in the order
      listed in Table 15–4. If you do not follow the order, the sequence is invalid and
      the warning bell sounds. If the terminal does not display the character, repeat
      the sequence exactly as shown in Table 15–4.

                                                   Note
         Pressing a function key cancels a compose or group-shift sequence
         without sounding the bell.
         You can turn the warning bell on or off from the Customize Keyboard
         dialog box (Chapter 3).




                                 VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 285
Using Your Keyboard
15.6 Typing Additional Characters

15.6.6 Canceling or Restarting a Key Sequence
        If you accidentally start a key sequence by pressing Compose Character ,
         Group Shift , or a nonspacing diacritical key, press the <x key. This immediately
        cancels the sequence.
        If you press Compose Character during a compose sequence, a new three-stroke
        sequence starts from that point. The first sequence is canceled.
        If you press any of the following keys during a key sequence, they cancel the
        sequence and perform their usual function:
                       Tab                           Any top-row key
                       Enter                         Any Ctrl other key combination

15.6.7 Hexadecimal Key Sequences
        This feature is primarily for programmers who are familiar with character
        coding and hexadecimal representation.
        The terminal uses coded character sets to exchange data with a host computer.
        The code for a character can be represented by a pair of hexadecimal digits.
        You can enter any 8-bit code from the terminal, by pressing Compose Character
        or Group Shift then entering two hexadecimal digits on the numeric keypad.
        When you press Compose Character or Group Shift , the terminal assigns
        hexadecimal values to the numeric keypad keys. Here are the values assigned
        to each key:

                 PF1    PF2    PF3      PF4
                                                    Key          Hexadecimal
                                                    Name         Digit
                 7      8      9       _
                                                    PF1          A
                                       ,
                 4      5      6                    PF2          B
                                                    PF3          C
                 1      2      3                    PF4
                                        Enter
                                                                 D
                               .                    Minus (–)    E
                 0                                  Comma (,)    F

                                     LJ-00252-TI0




286 Chapter 15
                                                             Using Your Keyboard
                                                 15.6 Typing Additional Characters

                                            Note
    The 8-Bit Multinational Characters, 7-Bit NRCS Characters, and UPSS
    DEC Supplemental buttons in the VXT DECterm General Options
    dialog box do not affect hexadecimal compose sequences.


Examples
•   You can use a hexadecimal compose sequence to send the US (unit
    separator) control character. The hexadecimal value for US is 1F.
    1. Press       Compose Character   or   Group Shift .

    2. Press   1     on the numeric keypad.
    3. Press   ,    on the numeric keypad.
•   You can use a hexadecimal compose sequence to send the DCS (device
    control string) character. The hexadecimal value for DCS is 90.
    1. Press       Compose Character   or   Group Shift .

    2. Press   9     on the numeric keypad.
    3. Press   0     on the numeric keypad.
Invalid Hexadecimal Sequences
If you enter an invalid sequence, the terminal cancels the sequence and sounds
the warning bell. You can turn the warning bell on or off from the Customize
Keyboard dialog box (Chapter 3).




                          VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 287
Using Your Keyboard
15.6 Typing Additional Characters


        Table 15–4 Key Sequences for Additional Characters
        Character                  Sequence
        "    quotation mark        ¨ (sp)
        #    number sign           ++
        ’    apostrophe            ´ (sp)
        @    commercial at         AA
        [    opening bracket       ((
        \    backslash             / / or / <
        ]    closing bracket       ))
        ^    circumflex accent     ^ (sp)
        `    grave accent          ` (sp)
        {    opening brace         (-
        |    vertical line         /^
        }    closing brace         )-
        ~    tilde                 ~ (sp)
        ¡    inverted !            !!
        ¢    cent sign             C / or C |
        £    pound sign            L- or L=
        ¥    yen sign              Y- or Y=
        §    section sign          SO or S! or S0
        ¤    currency sign         XO or X0
        ©    copyright sign        CO or C0
        ª    feminine ordinal      A_
        «    open angle brackets   <<
        °    degree sign           0^
        ±    plus or minus sign    +-
        ²    superscript 2         2^
        ³    superscript 3         3^
        µ    micro sign            /U
        ¶    paragraph sign        P!
        ·    middle dot            . ^
                                                             (continued on next page)




288 Chapter 15
                                                               Using Your Keyboard
                                                   15.6 Typing Additional Characters


Table 15–4 (Cont.) Key Sequences for Additional Characters
Character                       Sequence

¹     superscript 1             1^
º     masculine ordinal         O_
»     closed angle              >>
      brackets
¼     fraction one-             14
      quarter
½     fraction one-half         12
¿     inverted ?                ??
À     A grave                   `A
Á     A acute                   ’A
Â     A circumflex              ^A
Ã     A tilde                   ~A
Ä     A umlaut                  ¨A or "A
Å     A ring                    °A or *A
                                (degree sign)
Æ     A E diphthong             AE
Ç     C cedilla                 C,
È     E grave                   `E
É     E acute                   ’E
Ê     E circumflex              ^E
Ë     E umlaut                  ¨E or "E
Ì     I grave                   `I
Í     I acute                   ’I
Î     I circumflex              ^I
Ï     I umlaut                  ¨I or "I
Ñ     N tilde                   ~N
Ò     O grave                   `O
Ó     O acute                   ’O


Most sequences that include diacritical marks can also be typed in reverse order.

                                                                       (continued on next page)




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 289
Using Your Keyboard
15.6 Typing Additional Characters


        Table 15–4 (Cont.) Key Sequences for Additional Characters
        Character                      Sequence
        Ô     O circumflex             ^O
        Õ     O tilde                  ~O
        Ö     O umlaut                 ¨O or "O
        Œ     O E diphthong            OE
        Ø     O slash                  o/
        Ù     U grave                  `U
        Ú     U acute                  ’U
        Û     U circumflex             ^U
        Ü     U umlaut                 ¨U or "U
        Ÿ     Y umlaut                 ¨Y or "Y
        ß     German small             ss
              sharp s
        à     a grave                  `a
        á     a acute                  ’a
        â     a circumflex             ^a
        ã     a tilde                  ~a
        ä     a umlaut                 ¨a or "a
        å     a ring                   °a or a*
                                       (degree sign)
        æ     a e diphthong            ae
        ç     c cedilla                c , (comma)
        è     e grave                  `e
        á     e acute                  ’e
        ê     e circumflex             ^e
        ë     e umlaut                 ¨e or "e
        ì     i grave                  `i
        í     i acute                  ’i
        î     i circumflex             ^i

         This character is only available when you use the DEC Multinational character set. See the VXT
        DECterm General Options dialog box (Section 8.5).

                                                                            (continued on next page)




290 Chapter 15
                                                             Using Your Keyboard
                                                 15.6 Typing Additional Characters


Table 15–4 (Cont.) Key Sequences for Additional Characters
Character                      Sequence
ï     i umlaut                 ¨i or "i
ñ     n tilde                  ~n
ò     o grave                  `o
ó     o acute                  ’o
ô     o circumflex             ^o
õ     o tilde                  ~o
ö     o umlaut                 ¨o or "o
œ     o e diphthong            oe
ø     o slash                  o/
ù     u grave                  `u
ú     u acute                  ’u
û     u circumflex             ^u
ü     u umlaut                 ¨u or "u
ÿ     y umlaut                 ¨y or "y

 This character is only available when you use the DEC Multinational character set. See the VXT
DECterm General Options dialog box (Section 8.5).

                                                                    (continued on next page)




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 291
Using Your Keyboard
15.6 Typing Additional Characters


        Table 15–4 (Cont.) Key Sequences for Additional Characters
        Character                      Sequence


        ISO Characters†
              no break space           sp sp
        ¦     broken vertical bar      | | or ! ^
        ¬     logical not              -,
        -     soft (syllable)          --
              hyphen
        ®     registered trade-        RO
              mark
        ¯     macron                   -^
        ¾     three quarters           34
        ÷     division sign            -:
              multiplication sign      xx
        ´     acute accent             ’’
        ¸     cedilla                  ,,
        ¨     diaeresis                ¨ (sp) or " "
        Ý     Y acute                  ’Y
        ý     y acute                  ’y
        Þ     capital Icelandic        TH
              thorn
        þ     small Icelandic          th
              thorn
        Ð     capital Icelandic        -D
              Eth
        ð     small Icelandic Eth      -d

        †These characters are only available when you use the ISO Latin Alphabet No. 1 character set.
        See the VXT DECterm General Options dialog box (Section 8.5).




292 Chapter 15
                                                                                 A
                                                                                    A
      Solving Problems and Getting Service


     This appendix describes some simple operating problems you can solve
     yourself. The appendix covers the following major topics:
     •   Operating Problems
     •   Power-Up Self-Test
     •   Digital Service Overview

A.1 Operating Problems
     The following tables list some possible operating problems and suggested
     solutions. If you have a problem with your terminal, check this list before
     calling for service. If the problem persists and you need service, see Section A.4
     in this appendix.
         Table A–1, System Box, Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, and Printer Problems
         Table A–2, Booting, Server, and Network Problems
         Table A–3, Session, Application, and Dialog Box Problems

     Table A–1 System Box, Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, and Printer Problems
     Symptom                       Suggested Solution
     System Box Problems
     The system box fan is off.    Check the power source. Make sure the power cord is
                                   plugged in. Turn the system box’s power switch on ( | ).
                                   Note: The VX225 and VX227 terminals do not have a
                                   system box.

                                                                  (continued on next page)




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 293
Solving Problems and Getting Service
A.1 Operating Problems


        Table A–1 (Cont.) System Box, Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, and Printer
                          Problems
        Symptom                        Suggested Solution
        Monitor Problems
        When you turn the terminal     Make sure the monitor’s power switch is on ( | ).
        on, the monitor does not       System box models: Check the monitor cable connections
        display the Terminal           at the system box and monitor.
        Manager window after
        45 seconds.                    Adjust the monitor’s brightness and contrast controls.
                                       See the monitor’s installation guide.
                                       If you have a VRM17 monitor, set the scan switch to
                                       High.
                                       If you have customized the terminal to hide the Terminal
                                       Manager window at startup, you can press F3 to
                                       redisplay the Terminal Manager window.
                                       If you have customized the terminal to not run the
                                       terminal manager, you can start the Terminal Manager
                                       window from the VXT Create pop-up menu. Press MB2
                                       anywhere on the screen background to display the menu.
                                       Check the keyboard cable connections at the terminal
                                       and keyboard
        The screen is blank, but the   Check if the two keyboard lights are blinking, which
        terminal is on.                may indicate the CRT saver is on. If the CRT saver is
                                       on, press any key to reactivate the screen.
                                       Check if brightness and contrast controls are set
                                       correctly.
        System box models: On a        Check the monitor’s cable connection at the back of the
        color terminal, the window     system box. The cable may be plugged in upside down.
        colors look wrong. The red
        and blue colors appear to be
        swapped.
                                                                       (continued on next page)




294 Appendix A
                                         Solving Problems and Getting Service
                                                      A.1 Operating Problems


Table A–1 (Cont.) System Box, Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, and Printer
                  Problems
Symptom                        Suggested Solution
Keyboard Problems
The bell tone does not         Check the keyboard cable connection to the system box.
sound when you turn the
terminal on. All keyboard
indicator lights are off.
The information you type is    Check the hold indicator to see if the keyboard is on
not displayed.                 hold. If the keyboard is on hold, press the F1 (Hold) key
                               to release the screen.
                               The current window may not accept input, or you may
                               not have activated the window. Check the window’s title
                               bar to see if the window has input focus.


Mouse Problems
The pointer for the mouse      Turn the system box’s l O power switch off (O), then
or tablet does not appear on   disconnect and reconnect the mouse or tablet cable. Turn
the screen, or the pointer     the system box’s l O power switch on ( | ).
does not respond to the        Replace the mouse. Until you get a new mouse, press
pointing device commands.      Ctrl Shift F3 to use the editing keypad to perform mouse
                               functions. See Chapter 15.


Printer Problems
The printer does not print.    Turn the printer’s power switch on ( | ).
                               Check the printer cable connections.
                               Check the settings in the Customize Serial and Parallel
                               Ports dialog box (Section 4.2). Check that the correct
                               port is enabled (serial or parallel). Check that the
                               transmit rate, baud rate, and parity setting in the dialog
                               box match the printer’s settings.




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 295
Solving Problems and Getting Service
A.1 Operating Problems


        Table A–2 Booting, Server, and Network Problems
        Symptom                      Suggested Solution
        Booting Problems or Operating Failure
        The monitor displays a >>>   The >>> prompt appears when the terminal fails
        prompt.                      operation or when you halt the terminal (by pressing the
                                     halt button, or by pressing Ctrl C before the terminal
                                     boots its VXT software).
                                     Turn the terminal’s l O power switch off (O) and on
                                     ( | ) again. (On system box models, this is the switch on
                                     the system box.)
                                     If the terminal fails to load its software or fails operation
                                     again, keep notes of any error messages and the
                                     terminal’s operating state when the failure occurred.
                                     For host-based terminals, see Section 1.5.1 to monitor
                                     memory use.
                                     You can also enter boot commands at the >>> prompt, to
                                     load a specific version of VXT software (Section 5.7.5).
                                     If you cannot correct the problem, call your Digital
                                     Service representative with any error messages you
                                     noted.
                                                                       (continued on next page)




296 Appendix A
                                         Solving Problems and Getting Service
                                                      A.1 Operating Problems


Table A–2 (Cont.) Booting, Server, and Network Problems
Symptom                         Suggested Solution
Server-Based Terminals: Problems with Server Connections
The first time you start        The terminal does not have the same LASTport group
the terminal, it fails to       code as the InfoServer system. See your system manager
load its VXT software           for the correct code. See Section 4.4 to enter a LASTport
from an InfoServer system       code.
and displays the following
message four times:
LASTport... Group code 0
The terminal stops              The terminal may have lost its connection to the
operating correctly and         InfoServer system. Wait for the connection to be
displays a message on the       reestablished. When the connection resumes, the
top line of the screen.         message is erased, the screen is restored, and the
                                terminal returns to normal functions.
                                Contact your system manager if these messages appear
                                too frequently or for longer than a few seconds. If the
                                terminal does not recover, turn the terminal’s l O
                                power switch off (O) and on ( | ) again to restart the
                                terminal. On system box models, this is the switch on
                                the system box.
The terminal’s software         Reboot the terminal by pressing the following key
seems to be hanging in a        sequence:
suspended state.                ANSI keyboard – Press Ctrl +left Alt +keypad . .
                                PC keyboard – Press Ctrl + Alt +keypad . .
                                Short ANSI keyboard – Press Ctrl Alt Extend     . .
                                Sun style keyboard – Press Ctrl      Del .
                                                                (continued on next page)




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 297
Solving Problems and Getting Service
A.1 Operating Problems


        Table A–2 (Cont.) Booting, Server, and Network Problems
        Symptom                       Suggested Solution
        Network Problems
        The host system and termi-    Check that the Ethernet cable is securely connected to
        nal do not communicate.       the terminal.
                                      Make sure the port that your system cable is connected
                                      to is active by trying a working system in the port.
                                      If you are using a ThinWire Ethernet cable, make sure
                                      the cable is attached to the system box by a T-connector.
                                      Make sure there is no ThinWire segment between the
                                      system box and the T-connector. Check if a terminator
                                      has been removed or is connected to an active ThinWire
                                      segment.
        Server-based terminals: the   Communication between the InfoServer system and
        InfoServer system displays    terminal may have been interrupted. Wait to see if
        messages at the top of the    the InfoServer system can reconnect to the terminal.
        terminal’s screen.            If normal operation does not resume, you may need to
                                      reboot the terminal:
                                      ANSI keyboard – Press Ctrl +left Alt +keypad . .
                                      PC keyboard – Press Ctrl + Alt +keypad . .
                                      Short ANSI keyboard – Press Ctrl Alt Extend      . .
                                      Sun style keyboard – Press Ctrl      Del .



        Table A–3 Session, Application, and Dialog Box Problems
        Symptom                       Suggested Solution
        Problems Creating Sessions and VXT Applications
        You cannot view the           If you have customized the terminal to hide the Terminal
        Terminal Manager window.      Manager window, you can press F3 to redisplay the
                                      Terminal Manager window.
                                      If you have customized the terminal to not run the
                                      terminal manager, you can start the Terminal Manager
                                      window from the VXT Create pop-up menu. Press MB2
                                      anywhere on the screen background to display the menu.
                                                                      (continued on next page)




298 Appendix A
                                         Solving Problems and Getting Service
                                                      A.1 Operating Problems


Table A–3 (Cont.) Session, Application, and Dialog Box Problems
Symptom                        Suggested Solution
Problems Creating Sessions and VXT Applications

You cannot create sessions     Make sure your terminal’s IP address is entered in the
with the TCP/IP transport      Customize TCP/IP dialog box and appears at the bottom
in the Create dialog box.      of the Terminal Manager window. See Section 4.5.
The TCP/IP button is           Also, your system manager may have restricted access
dimmed.                        to the Create menu settings by using the terminal’s
                               configuration manager. Ask your system manager which
                               of your terminal’s create and customize features are
                               restricted.
You cannot use the DECnet      Make sure your terminal’s DECnet address is entered
transport to create sessions   in the Customize DECnet dialog box and appears at
in the Create dialog box.      the bottom of the Terminal Manager window. See
The DECnet button is           Section 4.9.
dimmed.                        Also, your system manager may have restricted access
                               to the Create menu settings by using the terminal’s
                               configuration manager. Ask your system manager which
                               of your terminal’s create and customize features are
                               restricted.
You cannot create a DECnet     Make sure your system manager installed the network
X session to an OpenVMS        object VXT$SERVER.COM on the OpenVMS host.
host from the Create dialog    See VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System
box.                           Management.


Font Problems
Your host application fonts    Set the font path in the Customize Font Path dialog
display incorrectly on the     box to access the fonts from your host system. List the
terminal.                      font path to your host system as the first entry in the
                               Customize Font Path dialog box (Section 5.3).
The terminal cannot access     Include backup font sources in the Customize Font Path
fonts on your host system      dialog box. If the primary font source is unavailable, the
or InfoServer system. The      terminal can find the same fonts on the backup source.
VXT Message Box displays
Font not found error
messages.
                                                                (continued on next page)




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 299
Solving Problems and Getting Service
A.1 Operating Problems


        Table A–3 (Cont.) Session, Application, and Dialog Box Problems
        Symptom                      Suggested Solution
        Problems with Customize Dialog Boxes
        You cannot change settings   Your system manager may have restricted access to
        in Customize dialog boxes.   some Customize dialog boxes by using the terminal’s
                                     configuration manager. Ask your system manager which
                                     of your terminal’s customize features are restricted.
                                     Some buttons are dimmed if they do not apply to the
                                     action you are currently performing.


        VXT DECterm Window Problems
        The DECterm window is too    Adjust the terminal size in the DECterm Window
        high on the screen.          Options dialog box. You can also use the window menu
                                     to move the window. To display the menu, click MB3
                                     anywhere on the window frame.


A.1.1 NFS Error Codes
        If an error occurs when mounting or accessing file systems, the VXT Message
        Box displays an NFS error code. Table A–4 lists NFS numeric error codes.

        Table A–4 NFS Error Codes
        Error Code     Meaning
            0          NFS$_NORMAL
           -1          NFS$_ERROR
        10001          NFS$_NOMOREMNT
        10002          NFS$_CANTMPGBL
        10003          NFS$_NOTMOUNTED
        10004          NFS$_INVPARAM
        10005          NFS$_ALRDYMOUNTED
        10006          NFS$_NOHOSTNAME
        10007          NFS$_INVHOSTNAME
        10008          NFS$_CANTGETHNAM
        10009          NFS$_CANTGETIP
                                                                   (continued on next page)




300 Appendix A
                                     Solving Problems and Getting Service
                                                  A.1 Operating Problems


Table A–4 (Cont.) NFS Error Codes
Error Code   Meaning

10010        NFS$_DQUOTA
10011        NFS$_NFSDQUOTA
10020        NFS$_QUEERR
10021        NFS$_NOREQQUE
10022        NFS$_NOTOPENED


20001        NFS$_CANTENCODE
20002        NFS$_CANTDECODE
20003        NFS$_RPCTIMEDOUT
20004        NFS$_PROGUNAVAIL
20005        NFS$_PROCUNAVAIL
20006        NFS$_CANTDECODE
20007        NFS$_CANTSEND
20008        NFS$_CANTRECV
20009        NFS$_VERSMISMATCH
20010        NFS$_AUTHERR
20011        NFS$_PRGVERMISMATCH
20012        NFS$_ATHERERR
20013        NFS$_PMAPFAILURE
20014        NFS$_RPCSYSERR
20015        NFS$_RPCPROGNOTREG


30001        NFS$_NFS_PERM
30002        NFS$_NFS_NOENT
30003        NFS$_NFS_IO
30004        NFS$_NFS_NXIO
30005        NFS$_NFS_ACCES
30006        NFS$_NFS_EXIST
30007        NFS$_NFS_NODEV
                                                          (continued on next page)




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 301
Solving Problems and Getting Service
A.1 Operating Problems


        Table A–4 (Cont.) NFS Error Codes
        Error Code    Meaning

        30008         NFS$_NFS_NOTDIR
        30009         NFS$_NFS_ISDIR
        30010         NFS$_NFS_FBIG
        30011         NFS$_NFS_NOSPC
        30012         NFS$_NFS_ROFS
        30013         NFS$_NFS_NAMTOOLNG
        30014         NFS$_NFS_NOTEMPTY
        30015         NFS$_NFS_DQUOT
        30016         NFS$_NFS_STALE
        30017         NFS$_NFS_WFLUSH



A.2 Power-Up Self-Test
        Every time your turn the terminal on, it automatically runs a power-up
        self-test. This test checks the operating status of many internal parts in the
        terminal. During the test, the keyboard lights turn on and off. The power-up
        self-test should not take more than 45 seconds to complete.
        If the test is successful:
        The terminal downloads the VXT system image software, performs its boot
        procedure, and displays the Terminal Manager window or a login prompt for
        your host system.
        If there were any test errors:
        The terminal displays a diagnostic error message.

A.2.1 Error Messages
        If the terminal fails the power-up self-test, the terminal may display an error
        message and >>> prompt. The following table lists error messages for some
        simple problems that you can correct yourself. If you see other error messages,
        note the error messages and call your Digital service representative; only
        qualified service personnel should try to correct these problems.




302 Appendix A
                                           Solving Problems and Getting Service
                                                         A.2 Power-Up Self-Test

      Error Message        Reason
      ?? 002 3 QDZ 0080    The keyboard failed the self-test. Check that the keyboard is
                           plugged in correctly.
      ?? 001 9 VNI 0132    The Ethernet failed the self-test. Check that your network
                           cable is plugged in correctly.
      ?? 020 12 IMG 0016   The image accelerator option board failed the self-test. Check
                           that the board is installed correctly. For VXT 2000 system
                           box models, see VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal Installation
                           Information. For other models, see instructions supplied with
                           the image accelerator board.
      ?MOP 1               Transmit error. MOP was unable to transmit due to a system
                           board error.
      ?MOP 255             Not enough space in memory to load the image.
      ?IP 2                An ICMP Protocol Unreachable message was received. The
                           TFTP host listed in the BOOTP response does not understand
                           the user datagram protocol (UDP) that TFTP runs over. The IP
                           download stops.
      ?IP 3                An ICMP Port Unreachable message was received. The remote
                           TFTP daemon has either never been started or is not running
                           on the load host. The IP download stops.
      ?TFTP 1              A TFTP error message was received while sending a TFTP
                           Read Request packet. The TFTP load stops. This error usually
                           means a file was not found or you do not have access to the file.
      ?TFTP 3              A TFTP error message was received while sending a TFTP
                           Acknowledgment packet. The TFTP load stops.
      ?TFTP 5              A TFTP error message was received while sending a TFTP
                           Error packet. The TFTP load stops.
      ?TFTP 255            Not enough space in memory to load the image.


A.3 Restoring the Terminal to Factory-Default Settings
      You can reset the VXT 2000 windowing terminal’s nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM)
      to the factory-default settings by entering a console command.
      1. Place the terminal in console mode by pressing Ctrl Alt keypad . or
         pressing the halt button on the rear of the terminal.
      2. At the >>> console prompt, enter the following command:
          >>> T/UTIL 1




                           VXT 2000+/VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 303
Solving Problems and Getting Service
A.3 Restoring the Terminal to Factory-Default Settings

        When you boot the terminal successfully it saves a record of the successful
        booting method used. When you reboot the terminal, it tries using this saved
        method first. You can clear this saved state while booting the terminal:
        >>> B/10000

A.4 Digital Service Overview
        As a full-service vendor, Digital provides hardware, software, network, and
        operations support to a diverse, worldwide customer base. Digital offers one
        of the most comprehensive portfolios of service in the industry, designed to
        support customers throughout the computing life cycle—planning, design,
        implementation and ongoing management.
        Customers tailor the type and level of support to meet their individual
        business needs. Regardless of the service solution, customers benefit from
        Digital’s single-source support strategy.
        Digital’s commitment to be the Best in Class service provider means that there
        is a force of 40,000 service professionals operating from 450 locations in over
        80 countries dedicated to support our customers.
        Digital believes in backing its products with meaningful warranties. This
        product may be covered by the Standard Product Warranty, which is
        entitlement to one year of hardware Basic Service with priority response
        time Monday through Friday, 8 AM to 5 PM. Where applicable, entitlement to
        the Product Foundation Warranty for the kernel software is provided. This
        Standard Warranty is further proof of Digital’s commitment to the customer.
        Digital provides on-site and off-site remedial services.
        Digital offers fast, competitively priced, quality maintenance performed at your
        site by Digital trained Service Specialists. There are several on-site services
        available.

A.4.1 How to Get Service
        Digital has a central service center in your area to help you keep your system
        running at peak efficiency. To find out more about Digital’s hardware and
        software service offerings
        In the United States
        For customers who purchased standard warranty (on-site) support, have your
        system manager call for remedial service at 1–800–354–9000.
        Other customers may call 1–800–225–5385 for return to Digital Service.
        For general information, call 1–800–DEC–INFO.


304 Appendix A
                                    Solving Problems and Getting Service
                                             A.4 Digital Service Overview

For ordering and ordering support, call 1–800–DIGITAL.
Outside the United States
Contact your local Digital Customer Services Office.




                      VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 305
                                                                                BB
                                                            Mixing Colors


        This appendix describes how to use the Color Mixing dialog box on VXT 2000
        color and gray scale terminals. You can choose and mix your own colors for
        windows, window borders, and certain other customizable features. When you
        choose a feature that has customizable colors, the terminal displays a Color
        Mixing dialog box.
        The VXT 2000 color and gray scale terminals use 8-plane displays. The color
        terminal lets you display 256 colors from a palette of 16.7 million colors. The
        gray scale terminals provide 256 levels of gray.



B.1 What Color Settings Can I Customize?
        Here is a list of VXT 2000 color settings you can change, using the Terminal
        Manager window and workspace Options submenu.

        To change this feature’s color...         Use this dialog box...
        Terminal Manager (Customize Menu)
        Pointer                                   Customize Pointer
        Window                                    Customize Window Color
        Screen                                    Customize Screen Background




306 Appendix B
                                                                     Mixing Colors
                                          B.1 What Color Settings Can I Customize?

      To change this feature’s color...           Use this dialog box...
      Window Manager (Workspace Options Submenu)
      Border for active windows                   Border Color Options
      Border for inactive windows                 Border Color Options
      Window manager menu colors                  Border Color Options
      Icons                                       Icon Color Options
      Window matte                                Matte Options


B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box
      The Color Mixing dialog box offers different methods for mixing colors, based
      on different color models:
      •   Picker
      •   Hue, Lightness, Saturation (HLS)
      •   Red, Green, Blue (RGB)
      •   Browser
      •   Gray scale
      The default model is the Picker model. You can use one model or a combination
      of models. For example, you can use any color model to select a color, then use
      the Picker color model to blend the selected color. When you choose a color
      model in the dialog box, the terminal displays the set of controls for that model
      in the dialog box.
      The following sections describe how to use each of the color models to choose
      your own colors.

B.2.1 Picker Color Model
      When you click on a button in a dialog box to change a color, the terminal
      displays the Picker version of the Color Mixing dialog box:

                                              Note
          The title of the dialog box may be Color Mixing or Highlight Color,
          depending on what feature you are customizing.




                               VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 307
Mixing Colors
B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box



                                         Highlight Color




                                                                               Color Display
Current Color                                                                  Box

                                                                               New Color




                                 Color Model:    Picker



                                         Spectrum                              Spectrum Label


                                                                               Color Spectrum


  Paint Bucket
                   Lighter                Interpolator              Warmer
Lightness
Arrow Buttons                                                                  Warmth
                                                                               Arrow Buttons

                   Darker                                           Cooler
  Smear                                                                        Interpolator
  Push Button
                                        Smear     Undo
                                                                               Undo
                                                                               Push Button

                                          Scratch Pad...



                                  OK    Apply    Reset     Cancel




                                                                             LJ−03030−RAGS




             The color spectrum is a static collection of colors. The spectrum options
             menu lets you set the spectrum to one of the following common color palettes:
             •   Rainbow spectrum (white, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, blue-violet,
                 violet, brown and black)
             •   Pastels
             •   Vivids



308 Appendix B
                                                                Mixing Colors
                                                  B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box

•   Earthtones
•   Any application-specific palettes
When you click MB1 on a spectrum tile or interpolator tile, that color becomes
the new color. The tile is highlighted to identify it as the currently selected
color.
You can use the selected color without modification, or you can do on or more
of the following tasks:
•   Use the interpolator to smear (blend) the selected color into various shades.
•   Use the arrow buttons to make the color lighter or darker, warmer or
    cooler.
•   Switch to another color model and use the features of that model to modify
    the current selection.
To smear colors, use the two paint buckets to load the interpolator with the
colors:
1. Click MB1 on a spectrum tile or interpolator tile. The color display box
   displays the color of that tile.
2. Click on a paint bucket, which fills the interpolator end tile below it with
   the selected color.
3. Fill both interpolator end tiles or one. If you only fill one end tile, the color
   of the empty interpolator end tile is white.
As an alternative to the paint buckets, you can use an eyedropper pointer to
load the interpolator. If you click and hold MB1 on a spectrum or interpolator
tile, the pointer becomes an eyedropper filled with the color of the tile.
You can use the eyedropper to fill one of the interpolator’s two end tiles, by
moving the eyedropper to the tile and clicking on MB1. If you do not position
the eyedropper directly on one of the two end tiles, the closest end tile is filled
with the eyedropper color. The cursor must be inside the interpolator.
Use the Undo button to reverse the last interpolator action, which can be
a smear, the filling of an end tile, or the activation of one of the warmth or
lightness adjustment buttons.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 309
Mixing Colors
B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box

B.2.2 Hue, Lightness, Saturation (HLS) Color Model
        When you choose HLS from the pop-up Color Model menu, the Color Mixing
        dialog box displays the controls for the HLS color model.

                                    Highlight Color




                         Color Model:        HLS



                                                   220
                          Hue:



                                  Black                     White
                                                   62
                    Lightness:



                                  Gray                        Full
                                                   68
                    Saturation:




                                     Scratch Pad...



                            OK       Apply   Reset       Cancel



                                                                     LJ−03027−RAGS




310 Appendix B
                                                               Mixing Colors
                                                 B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box

In the HLS color model, you specify a color by three characteristics: hue,
lightness, and saturation.
•   Hue is color, such as red or blue.
•   Lightness is color intensity, the amount of color.
•   Saturation is the purity of the color, or how much the color is diluted by
    white.
The HLS color model contains three scales that represent the ranges of hue,
lightness, and saturation.




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 311
Mixing Colors
B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box

B.2.3 Red, Green, Blue (RGB) Color Model
        In the RGB color model, you mix a color by adding different intensities of
        the primary colors red, green, and blue. A primary color is a basic color that
        cannot be created by mixing other colors.
        The RGB color model contains three scales that represent the of red, green and
        blue.

                                       Color Mixing




                          Color Model:          RGB



                       Percentage                        Value

                               Red
                                                          24672

                                 Green
                                                          35209         RGB Values


                                         Blue
                                                          57825



                                       Scratch Pad...



                          OK         Apply   Reset      Cancel




                                                                   LJ−03028−RAGS




312 Appendix B
                                                                          Mixing Colors
                                                            B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box

B.2.4 Browser Color Model
      The browser color model is a scrolled window that displays a list of X11 named
      colors. Each button in the scrolled window shows the name of an X11 color.
      Use the scroll bar to scroll through this color list. When you click MB1 on a
      color in the list, the color display box becomes filled with that color. The color
      browser is available on all systems.

                                 Color Mixing




                        Color Model:     Browser



                                Aquamarine

                             MediumAquamarine

                                  Black

                                  Blue

                                CadetBlue




                                 Scratch Pad...



                        OK     Apply   Reset       Cancel




                                                             LJ−03029−RAGS




                              VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 313
Mixing Colors
B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box

B.2.5 Grayscale
        The grayscale color model contains a scale that lets you mix gray shades
        ranging from black to white. Note that when you switch to the grayscale color
        model, the current new color becomes a shade of gray.

                                   Color Mixing




                          Color Model:   Greyscale


                                          59




                                   Scratch Pad...



                          OK     Apply    Reset      Cancel




                                                              LJ−03031−RAGS



        Scratch Pad
        The scratch pad lets you store intermediate colors for later use in color mixing.




314 Appendix B
                                                                 Mixing Colors
                                                   B.2 Color Mixing Dialog Box

To access the scratch pad, click on the Scratch Pad button in any of the
color models.

       Scratch Pad...

   Save colors here...

                          Paint Bucket to
                          Load Scratch Pad




    Clear     Cancel


                              ZK−2577A−GE




To store the currently selected color in the scratch pad, click on the
paint bucket above the scratch pad color tile. The scratch pad adds that color
to its stored colors, which you can scroll through with the scroll bar.
To clear the scratch pad list, use the Clear button.
On the picker model, the currently selected color can be one of many color tiles.
On other color models, you can select only the new and original color tiles.
To set the new color tile to a scratch pad, scroll to that color and click on the
scratch pad color tile. The new color tile changes and the scratch pad tile
becomes highlighted. If you are in the picker model, you now have the option
to dump the highlighted scratch pad color into one of the interpolator end tiles
by using the paint bucket buttons.




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 315
                                                                              CC
    Programming with the X Windows Image
                                Extension


        This appendix is for programmers using X windows image extension (XIE)
        software for applications on the terminal. The appendix briefly covers the
        following topics:
        •   Checking the Terminal’s Imaging Capabilities
        •   Hardware Accelerated XIE Functions
        •   XIE Pipeline Definitions
        •   XIE Pipeline Constraints
        •   XIE Pipeline Examples
        The terminal includes the X windows image extension (XIE) to the X windows
        server. The terminal supports Version 3.0 of the XIE protocol. With XIE:
        •   The server can save resources by managing images in compressed form
        •   The server can manipulate the images while accepting user input from
            client-based application programs
        The terminal supports all XIE protocol functions. Many VXT 2000 models have
        an optional image accelerator board available. You do not need the optional
        image accelerator board to use XIE functions, but the board accelerates certain
        bitonal XIE functions to help display images faster.
        All full function VXT system images include XIE support. The VXT EX system
        image does not support XIE. To use XIE, make sure the X Image Extension
        button in the Customize Boot dialog box is on. See Section 5.7.
        For more information on XIE: Appendix D lists some available
        documentation on XIE and Digital’s image application toolkit products that
        support XIE, such as DECimage Application Services.


316 Appendix C
                            Programming with the X Windows Image Extension
                              C.1 Checking the Terminal’s Imaging Capabilities

C.1 Checking the Terminal’s Imaging Capabilities
      If the terminal is using a VXT software image that supports XIE, you can
      have your application use the following query to determine if the bitonal image
      accelerator is present:
      status = XInternAtom(display, "_DEC_XIE_ACCEL_TYPE_A", True);
      The presence of the _DEC_XIE_ACCEL_TYPE_A atom indicates that the
      bitonal image accelerator board is present in the terminal. This board
      accelerates the following functions:
      •   CCITT Group 3 and Group 4 image data decompression
      •   Scaling range from 1/64 to 64 times the original size
      •   Orthogonal rotation (0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°)
      •   Cropping
      •   Convolution using a 3 3 or 5 5 kernel, with kernel values between 0 and
                                       




          255

C.2 Hardware Accelerated XIE Functions
      To take maximum advantage of the bitonal image accelerator, you must follow
      these general rules:
      •   Use the XIE pipeline method of processing to display images (instead of
          atomic XIE processing).
      •   Group all accelerated XIE functions together.
      •   Transport and work from compressed bitonal images whenever possible.

C.3 XIE Pipeline Definitions
      Always use XIE pipelines to display images on the terminal.
      XIE uses process control services, known as pipelines, to allow a client
      to create and execute linear, macro-like assemblies of protocol requests. A
      pipeline is a single threaded list of XIE protocol functions through which image
      data flows sequentially.
      When you construct pipelines for processing images in the terminal, use the
      following guidelines for the best image display performance:
      •   Group all accelerated XIE functions together. That is, do not mix
          nonaccelerated functions with accelerated functions. Accelerated XIE
          functions include crop, area-constrain, scale, rotate, and mirror.


                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 317
Programming with the X Windows Image Extension
C.3 XIE Pipeline Definitions

        •   When using any accelerated functions, observe the following order: crop,
            area-constrain, scale, rotate, mirror.
        •   If you use the area function, it must be followed by the constrain function.
        •   Do not include more than one instance of an accelerated XIE function in
            the pipe. Do not use two scale functions in a single pipeline.
        •   End the pipeline with the export function.
        •   Do not use phototaps in the pipeline.

C.3.1 XIE Pipeline Constraints
        Some accelerated XIE functions have associated constraints, to ensure that the
        bitonal image accelerator option can handle the request. By following these
        constraints, you ensure that the hardware accelerator is used to process XIE
        requests, rather than the XIE software alone.
        Following is a list of the hardware accelerated XIE constraints:
        •   The bitonal image accelerator supports CCITT Group 3 and Group 4
            compressed image formats and Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) data. CCITT
            is the Comitè Consultatif International de Télégraphique et Téléphonique,
            a standards committee for the communication industry in Europe.
        •   Specify kernel values in the area request as follows:
                 Each value must be between 0 and 255.
                 The kernel size must be either 3 3 or 5 5.
                                                         




                 The sum of all values must be between 224 and 255.
        •   Specify the IDC parameter as null in an area request.
        •   Specify the parameters op1 and op2 as mult and sum, respectively, in the
            area request.
        •   Images may not be scaled to a size greater than 64 times or less than 1/64
            of the original in the scale request.
        •   For data alignment purposes, the server may slightly adjust the output
            scanline length from that specified in the scale request. Any adjustment
            will be close to the specified scale, and will always be equal to or greater
            than the specified scale.
        •   Specify a rotation request of 0°, 90°, 180°, or 270° only.




318 Appendix C
                           Programming with the X Windows Image Extension
                                                 C.3 XIE Pipeline Definitions

      •   The constrain function immediately following the area function determines
          the number of levels for a given output pixel.
             Specifying two levels in the constrain function produces a bitonal
             output on any display. In this case, the export function parameters
             (lut_id, colormap_id, match, and grey) should all be null in the
             export request.
             In a gray scale or color system, specifying up to 256 levels in the
             constrain function produces a multibit output. In this case, the export
             function parameters colormap_id, match, and grey should be null
             in the export request. The lut_id parameter should be specified as a
             previously created server image resource.
             Digital suggests that an application allocate a fixed number of gray
             scale colormap entries at initialization time and always use these
             entries to display the enhanced bitonal images. This is accomplished by
             allocating the colors (actually gray scales) from the default colormap,
             and creating a one-scanline image with these colormap entry pixel
             values to use as the lut_id in all XIE export calls.
             Digital recommends using from 8 to 32 gray scale values. Fewer values
             introduce artifacts in the displayed image, and more values are a waste
             of server resources. See the XIE documentation for details on creating
             a LUT image.

C.3.2 XIE Pipeline Examples
      The following examples show sample pipelines that illustrate how functions are
      mapped either to the image accelerator board or to the XIE software routines.
      The examples illustrate the difference in image display performance when you
      program with the image accelerator board in mind.
      1. All Accelerated Functions (Best Performance)
             Crop
             Area-Constrain
             Scale
             Rotate
             Mirror
          In this pipeline, all XIE routines are mapped to the image accelerator
          board. Thus, this pipeline requires only one pass through the image
          accelerator board, resulting in the best image display performance.
      2. Interspersed Software Functions (Poorer Performance)
             Crop
             Scale


                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 319
Programming with the X Windows Image Extension
C.3 XIE Pipeline Definitions

                 Translate
                 Rotate
           In this pipeline, the Crop and Scale XIE routines are first mapped to
           the image accelerator board. The Translate routine is then mapped to
           the XIE software. Finally, the Rotate routine is mapped to the image
           accelerator board. Thus, this pipeline requires two passes through the
           image accelerator board, resulting in degraded image display performance.




320 Appendix C
                                                                              DD
                                     Related Documentation


This document is part of your terminal’s user documentation kit.

Document                                                        Part Number

VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Documentation Kit   EK–VXT20–DK
  VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal Installing and         EK–VXT20–IN
Getting Started
  VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information       EK–VXT20–UG
  VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal Release Notes          EK–VXT20–RN

You can also order the following related documents from Digital. Check with
your Digital sales representative for availability in your country.

Software and Service Documentation                              Part Number

VXT Software Version 2.1 Installation and System Management     AA–PJHFE–TE
VXT Software Version 2.1 Release Notes                          AA–PKWSG–TE
VT320 Programmer Reference Manual                               EK–VT320–RM
DECimage Application Services for VMS
  X Image Extension Programmer’s Reference Manual               AA–PH7XA–TE
  Image Display Services Programmer’s Reference Manual          AA–LE73C–TE
  Programmer’s Overview                                         AA–LE65C–TE
ULTRIX DECwindows Motif User’s Guide                            AA–MA87B–TE
VMS DECwindows Motif User’s Guide                               AA–PGZ5A–TE
VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal and DECimage 2000 Option Service    EK–VXT20–SV
Information




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 321
Related Documentation



        Software and Service Documentation                            Part Number

        VXT 2000 Model VX225 Windowing Terminal Service Information   EK–VXT15–SV
        VXT 2000 Model VX227 Windowing Terminal Service Information   EK–VXT17–SV
        VRM17 Monitor Service Guide                                   EK–VRM17–SV
        VR315 Monitor Service Guide                                   EK–VR315–SV
        VR319 Monitor Service Guide                                   EK–VR319–SV
        VR320 Monitor Service Guide                                   EK–VR320–SV
        VR326 Monitor Service Guide                                   EK–VR326–SV



D.1 Ordering Information
        You can order options and documentation by mail, phone, or electronically. For
        a list of options, see Appendix E.
        Need Help?
        If you need help deciding which documentation best meets your needs, please
        call 800–DIGITAL (800–344–4825) and press 2 for technical assistance.
        Electronic Orders
        To place an order through your account at the Electronic Store, dial 800–
        234–1998, using a modem set to 2400 or 9600 baud. You must be using a VT
        terminal or terminal emulator set at 8 bits, no parity. If you need help, call
        800–DIGITAL (800–344–4825) and ask for an Electronic Store specialist.




322 Appendix D
                                                       Related Documentation
                                                      D.1 Ordering Information

Telephone or Direct Mail Orders
If You Are
From . . .        Call . . .               Or Write . . .
U.S.A.            DECdirect                Digital Equipment Corporation
                  Phone: 800–DIGITAL       P.O. Box CS2008
                  (800–344–4825)           Nashua, New Hampshire 03061
                  FAX: (603) 884–5597
Puerto Rico       Phone: (809) 781–0505    Digital Equipment Caribbean, Inc.
                  FAX: (809) 749–8377      3 Digital Plaza, 1st Street
                                           Suite 200
                                           Metro Office Park
                                           San Juan, Puerto Rico 00920
Canada            Phone: 800–267–6215      Digital Equipment of Canada Ltd.
                  FAX: (613) 592–1946      100 Herzberg Road
                                           Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2K 2A6
                                           Attn: DECdirect Sales
International     –                        Local Digital subsidiary or approved
                                           distributor

Digital Personnel
To order hardware or software documentation, contact the U.S. Software
Supply Business group for instructions. For software documentation, request
an Internal Software Order Form (EN–01740–07).
    U.S. Software Supply Business
    Digital Equipment Corporation
    10 Cotton Road
    Nashua, NH, 03063–1260
    DTN: 264–3030
    (603) 884–3030
    FAX: (603) 884–3960




                       VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 323
                                                                                    EE
                                                                           Options


        This appendix lists the options available from Digital for the VXT 2000
        windowing terminal. For ordering information, see Section D.1.

E.1 Options
        Boards

        Board                                                             Part Number
        2 MB memory controller board                                      VX20X–MA
        2 MB memory module                                                MS200–AA
        4 MB memory module                                                MS200–BA
        Network board with ThinWire and thickwire connectors              VX20D–AA
        Network board with twisted-pair and thickwire connectors          VX20D–BA
        Image board                                                       VX20A–OP

        Modems

        Model                  Description
        DF242 Scholar Plus     300, 1200, and 2400 baud, full-duplex asynchronous
        DF224                  300, 1200, and 2400 baud, full-duplex asynchronous
        DF124                  300, 600, and 1200 baud, full-duplex asynchronous




324 Appendix E
                                                                             Options
                                                                         E.1 Options

Cables

Cable                                 Length                          Part Number
Network Cables
Thickwire                             2 m (6.5 ft)                    BNE4C–02
Twisted pair, uncrossed ( | | )       3 m (10 ft)                     BN24G–03
Twisted pair, crossed (x)             3 m (10 ft)                     BN24F–03
ThinWire                              3.6 m (12 ft)                   BC16M–12
                                      9 m (30 ft)                     BC16M–30
  T-connector                         –                               H8223
  Terminator                          –                               H8225
  LAN kit                             Includes 3.6 m (12 ft) cable,   BC16T–12
                                      T-connector, and terminator


Video Cables
Monochrome                                                            M–17–02441–01
Color                                                                 C–17–02906–02
Gray scale                                                            G–17–02878–01


AC Power Cables
Australia, New Zealand                                                BN20V–2E
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Netherlands, Norway,      BN20S–2E
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Canada                                                                BN20P–2E
Denmark                                                               BN20U–2E
Ireland, United Kingdom                                               BN20R–2E
Israel                                                                BN19U–2E
Italy                                                                 BN20W–2E
Switzerland                                                           BN20T–2E

For parallel and serial port cables and adapters, contact your Digital sales
representative.




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 325
                                                                                 FF
                                                               Specifications


        This appendix lists general, environmental, and electrical specifications for the
        terminal.
        Site Planning
                                     Weight        Height        Width        Depth
        System box                   9 kg          57 mm         394 mm       360 mm
                                     (20 lb)       (2.25 in)     (15.5 in)    (14.17 in)
        VRC16 monitor                22.5 kg       432 mm        411 mm       434 mm
                                     (49.6 lb)     (17 in)       (16.2 in)    (17.1 in)
        VRM17 monitor                27.2 kg       457 mm        495 mm       452 mm
                                     (60 lb)       (18 in)       (19.5 in)    (17.8 in)
        VR315 monitor                13 kg         400 mm        400 mm       391 mm
                                     (29 lb)       (15.7 in)     (15.7 in)    (15.4 in)
        VR319 monitor                27.2 kg       457 mm        495 mm       452 mm
                                     (60 lb)       (18 in)       (19.5 in)    (17.8 in)
        VR320 monitor                29 kg         457 mm        495 mm       452 mm
                                     (63 lb)       (18 in)       (19.9 in)    (17.8 in)
        VR326 monitor                17.2 kg       381 mm        381 mm       396 mm
                                     (38 lb)       (15 in)       (15 in)      (15.6 in)
        LK401/LK402 ANSI keyboard    1.4 kg        45 mm         478 mm       191 mm
                                     (3.1 lb)      (1.75 in)     (18.8 in)    (7.5 in)
        LK421 Short ANSI keyboard    1.0 kg        51 mm         335 mm       165 mm
                                     (2.2 lb)      (2.0 in)      (13.5 in)    (6.5 in)




326 Appendix F
                                                                             Specifications


LK443/LK444 PC keyboard         1.4 kg            50 mm         450 mm           180 mm
                                (3.1 lb)          (2.0 in)      (18.25 in)       (7.25 in)
Mouse                           Weight            Height        Width            Length
                                97 g              32.5 mm       60.9 mm          99.1 mm
                                (3.4 oz)          (1.28 in)     (2.4 in)         (3.4 in)

Environment
                                   Operating                  Storage
Temperature                        10° to 40° C               –40° to 66° C
                                   (50° to 104° F)            (–40° to 151° F)
Relative humidity                  10% to 90%                 0% to 95%
Maximum wet bulb                   28° C (82° F)
Minimum dew point                  2° C (36° F)
Maximum altitude                   4.9 km (16,000 ft)         9.1 km (30,000 ft)
Electrical
Line voltage (U.S.)                100 V to 120 V ac nominal
                                   88 V to 132 V rms operating range
                                   single-phase, 3-wire
Line voltage (Europe)              220 V to 240 V ac nominal
                                   176 V to 264 V rms operating range
                                   single phase, 3-wire
Line frequency                     50 Hz to 60 Hz
Input power                        80 W maximum
Power cord                         Detachable, 3-conductor, grounded
Power cord receptacle              EIA specified, CEE22-6A
Monitors (Screen Size and Resolution)
Monitor           Screen Size          Resolution
VRC16 CRT         425 mm (17 in)       100 dots/in
VRM17 CRT         425 mm (17 in)       100 dots/in
VR315 CRT         380 mm (15 in)       108 dots/in
VR319 CRT         495 mm (19 in)       95 dots/in
VR320 CRT         495 mm (19 in)       100 dots/in




                         VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 327
Specifications



        Monitor            Screen Size        Resolution

        VR326 CRT          381 mm (15 in)     100 dots/in

        LK401 or LK402 ANSI Keyboard

        Item                             Description
        Number of keys                   108 sculptured keys with matte finish
        Models                           Available in many language dialects, including English.
        Cord                             1.8 m (6 ft) coiled cord with a 4-pin telephone-type
                                         modular connector
        Indicator lights                 2 keyboard indicators:

                                                            Hold


                                                            Lock




        Keys                             (Approximate Size)
        Home row                         30 mm (1.18 in) above desktop
        Key size (top)                   13 mm (0.50 in) square
        Key spacing                      19 mm (0.75 in) center to center
                                         (for single-width keys)
        Numeric keypad                   18 keys
        Function keys                    5 predefined keys, 15 user-definable keys



        Audible Indicators               If enabled . . .
        Keyclick                         Sounds after each keystroke.
        Margin bell                      Rings once when cursor approaches right margin
        Warning bell                     Rings for compose errors and certain system messages.




328 Appendix F
                                                                   Specifications


LK421 Short ANSI Keyboard (UNIX Style)
Item                        Description
General                     74 sculptured keys with matte finish
                            Available in North American/UK version only
Cord                        1.8 m (6 ft) coiled cord with a 4-pin telephone-type
                            modular connector



Keys                        Approximate Size or Number
Home row                    30 mm (1.18 in) above desktop
Key size (top)              13 mm (0.50 in) square
Key spacing                 19 mm (0.75 in) center to center (for single-width keys)
Function keys               5 predefined keys, 15 user-definable keys (including 10
                            Extend key sequences, to emulate the full set of ANSI
                            keyboard keys)



Audible Indicators          If enabled . . .
Keyclick                    Sounds after each keystroke.
Margin bell                 Rings once when cursor approaches right margin.
Warning bell                Rings for compose errors and certain system messages.




                     VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 329
Specifications


        LK443 or LK444 PC Keyboard
        Item                    Description
        Number of keys          101 or 102 sculptured keys with matte finish
        Models                  Available in many language dialects, including English
        Cord                    1.8 m (6 ft) coiled cord with a 4-pin telephone-type
                                modular connector
        Indicator lights        3 keyboard indicators:
                                Num        Caps          Scroll
                                Lock       Lock          Lock



        Keys                    Approximate Size
        Home row                30 mm (1.18 in) above desktop
        Key size (top)          13 mm (0.50 in) square
        Key spacing             19 mm (0.75 in) center to center (for single-width keys)
        Numeric keypad          17 keys
        Function keys           3 predefined key, 16 user-definable keys



        Audible Indicators
        Keyclick                Sounds after each keystroke.
        Margin bell             Rings once when cursor approaches right margin.
        Warning bell            Rings for compose errors and certain system messages.

        Mouse
        Item                    Description
        Switches                Three tactile-feel type switches with an actuating force
                                of 85 grams (3 ounces) 25%
        Surface                 Nonglare textured finish
        Cable                   1.5 m (5 ft) round, 0.375 cm (0.15 in) diameter
                                6-conductor, number 26 stranded, shielded, high-
                                flexibility design
        Connector               7-pin micro-DIN type (male)




330 Appendix F
                                                                            G
                                                                               G
               Setting Up the Work Environment


     This appendix contains recommendations to protect your health and safety.

G.1 Proper Setup and Use
     Certain recent scientific literature suggests that poor posture, work habits, or
     office equipment setup may cause injuries. Other literature suggests that there
     is no cause and effect. Because the safety of our users is a great concern, it is
     important to take the precautions described in Table G–1.




                           VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 331
Setting Up the Work Environment
G.1 Proper Setup and Use


Table G–1 Recommendations for Proper Setup and Use
Adjust         So that . . .
Chair          1      Feet are flat on the floor or footrest, if needed.
               2      Legs are vertical forming a right angle to the floor.
               3      Your weight is off your thighs and your thighs are in a
                      horizontal position. Keep the back of your knees away
                      from the seat so you do not compress the area behind
                      them, which could restrict the blood flow.
               4      Your upper body is erect and your lower back is supported
                      with a backrest.
Keyboard       5      Your wrists are straight and do not flex more than 15°.
                      They may be supported but should not rest on sharp
                      edges.
If you use a mouse, rest your hand on the mouse so your wrist is not on the work surface. Operate
the mouse close to your body’s centerline.
               6      Upper arms are straight down at your sides, elbows
                      are close to your sides and support your arm weight.
                      Forearms are at a 70° to 90° angle.
Head           7      Your neck is not strained. Your head should incline
                      downward, but no more than 15° to 20°.
Terminal       8      The terminal is at eye level and at the correct distance for proper vision.
Eyes           9      You avoid eye fatigue, which can be caused by glare, image quality,
                      uncomfortable furniture, eye height, and uncorrected vision. If you cannot
                      read the screen at different distances, you may need special glasses. Relax
                      your eyes periodically by looking at distant objects.
                                                                              (continued on next page)




332 Appendix G
                                               Setting Up the Work Environment
                                                       G.1 Proper Setup and Use


Table G–1 (Cont.) Recommendations for Proper Setup and Use




                                                         MA–0069–93.IL




                                                               (continued on next page)




                            VXT 2000+ /VXT 2000 Windowing Terminal User Information 333
Setting Up the Work Environment
G.1 Proper Setup and Use


Table G–1 (Cont.) Recommendations for Proper Setup and Use


Adjust         To . . .
Work                  Take periodic work breaks. Morning, lunch, and afternoon breaks meet
Breaks                most recommendations. Take advantage of work breaks to move around
                      and do other movements.
Lighting              Avoid direct lighting or sunlight on the screen, which causes glare and
                      reflections. Place lighting behind or to the side of your work area, and
                      distribute the lighting evenly on your work area. Adjust the terminal
                      brightness and the contrast controls as needed.
Noise                 Keep background noise at a minimum. Background noise above 65 dBA is
                      tiring. Sound-absorbing materials, such as curtains, carpeting, and acoustic
                      tile, can help reduce background noise.
Temperature           20°C to 23°C (68°F to 74°F)

Humidity              30% to 70%
Ventilation           Provide adequate air ventilation for equipment operation and to avoid
                      fatigue.
Space                 More than 70 cm (28 in) center to center, preferably more than 152 cm (60
between               in).
terminals


                                                 Warning
              If you experience pain or discomfort while using the terminal, take a
              substantial break and review the instructions for posture and work
              habits. If the pain or discomfort continues after resuming use of the
              terminal, then discontinue use and report the condition to your job
              supervisor or physician.




334 Appendix G
                                                             Glossary


Accelerator
A key or sequence of keys that provides an alternative to using the mouse. You
can perform all mouse actions from the keyboard, such as displaying menus
and choosing menu items.

Active window
The terminal window that is ready to accept input. This window displays the
information you type (if the window accepts user input). Only one terminal
window can be active at a time.

ANSI
American National Standards Institute

ANSI keyboard
Digital’s standard keyboard, with a main keypad, editing keypad, numeric
keypad, and top-row function keys. Compare to Short ANSI keyboard.

Application launcher
In VXT software, a utility that allows terminal users to start applications
residing on a host system, for display on the terminal. The terminal user
connects to the host system, runs the application launcher, then enters a
command to launch the desired host application.

ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A set of 7- or 8-bit
binary numbers representing the alphabet, punctuation, numerals, and other
special symbols used in text representation and communications protocol.




                                                                   Glossary 335
        Application
        A program that performs a specific task.

        Background process
        A process that does not require the total attention of the computer for
        operation. Background processing enables the operating system to execute
        more than one program or command at a time. As a general rule, all clients
        should run as background processes.

        BDF
        Bitmap distribution font format

        Boot
        To bring a device or system to a defined state where it can operate on its own.

        CCITT
        Comite Consultatif International de Telegraphique et Telephonique
        (International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee). A standards
        committee for the communication industry in Europe.

        Configuration manager
        In VXT software, a set of windows and dialog boxes that system managers use
        to centrally manage terminals and InfoServer font sets for terminals. System
        managers can place server-based terminals in work groups that share settings.

        Character set
        A group of graphic characters and control characters stored as a unit in the
        terminal. Graphic characters are characters you can display on the screen.
        Control characters perform special functions.

        Check buttons
        A group of square toggle buttons that provide different settings for an option.
        You choose one button from the group.

        Click
        To press and release a mouse button. The term comes from the fact that
        pressing and releasing the buttons of most mice makes a clicking sound.

        Client
        A program written specifically for X windows. Clients make their own windows
        and know how to resize and minimize themselves.


336 Glossary
Compose character
A character produced by pressing two or three keys in sequence, starting with
the Compose Character key or a diacritical mark key. You can use compose
sequences to produce characters that do not appear as standard keys on your
keyboard.

Computer system
A combination of system hardware, software, and external devices that
performs operations and tasks.

Cursor
A blinking line or block on the screen that indicates the active position.

Customizations
In VXT software, the set of customized operating settings for a terminal or
work group. Customizations are stored in a resource file.

Data processing keys
Keys that have three or four characters on the top of their keycap. The
characters on the right half of the keycap are data processing characters. To
use data processing characters, you must choose the data processing version of
your keyboard in the Customize Keyboard dialog box.

DECconnect cabling
Digital’s cabling system for extending Ethernet and terminal interconnections
into offices and work areas.

DEC Multinational character set
The default character set for the terminal. The DEC Multinational set is one
of two 8-bit sets built into the terminal. The other set is ISO Latin-1. Both
8-bit sets include the standard ASCII character set and a supplemental set.
For 7-bit environments, see National replacement character sets.

DECnet software
Digital’s networking software that runs on nodes in both local and wide area
networks.

DEC OSF/1 operating system
Digital’s implementation of the Open Software Foundation technology, with the
Motif graphical user interface and programming environment.




                                                                    Glossary 337
        DECterm
        Digital’s VT series terminal emulator. VXT 2000 windowing terminals let
        users create DECterm sessions on host systems.

        Default option
        A push button with a double outline, indicating the most frequently used
        setting for a window. You can choose a default option by pressing Return or
        clicking on the push button.

        Default setting
        A standard setting for one of the terminal’s operating features, set at the
        factory. The terminal uses factory-default settings, unless you choose a new
        setting.

        Device icon
        An icon on the back of the system box that identifies the device that can be
        plugged into the connector.

        Diacritical marks
        Marks or symbols that indicate a change in the standard pronunciation of a
        letter. Examples of diacritics are acute accent (’), grave accent (‘), and tilde (~).
        On the terminal, you can use diacritical marks (if available on your keyboard)
        to start two-stroke compose sequences.

        Double click
        To press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession.

        Drag
        To press and hold down a mouse button while moving the mouse on the
        desktop and the pointer on the screen. Typically, dragging is used with menu
        selecting, and window moving and resizing.

        Ethernet
        A type of local area network, based on Carrier Sense Multiple Access
        with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD). A communication concept for local
        communication networks that use coaxial cable.




338 Glossary
Filter rectangle
A bounded area used defined on the screen. To activate the filter, you define its
coordinates with a control function. If the terminal detects that the locator is
outside the filter rectangle, the terminal sends an outside rectangle event and
disables the rectangle.

Font
A font is a set of character images in a particular typeface and style. For
example, Times Roman bold is a font.

Font path
A logical file that lets a device access alternate character fonts for certain X
window applications.

Full-duplex modem
A modem that can handle simultaneous, two-way communications.

Graphics
The use of lines, figures, shapes, and shaded areas to display information.

Graphics tablet
An optional device used to move the graphics input cursor on the screen and to
enter data to an application program. Most tablets have three parts: a tablet,
stylus, and puck. To move the cursor you move the puck or stylus across the
tablet. Also known as a locator device.

Group code
A number that represents a host or group of hosts on a LAT network.

Hardware
The physical equipment—mechanical and electrical—that make up a system.
Compare to Software.

Hardware Ethernet address
The unique Ethernet physical address associated with a particular Ethernet
communications controller.

Host-based terminal
A terminal that uses its own memory to operate VXT software. By default,
host-based terminals also use their own memory to store their customizations
in a native resource file. Compare to server-based terminal.


                                                                     Glossary 339
        Host-based resource file
        A file created by a system manager or user to store customizations for a
        terminal or group of terminals. The file is stored on a host system; terminals
        can access the file using the NFS or TFTP protocols. Compare to native
        resource file.

        Host system
        A computer system that has an active connection to your terminal. The
        primary or controlling computer in a multiple-computer network.

        Icon
        A small graphic representation of an object, usually an application. A window
        can be shrunk to an icon (or minimized) to save room on the workspace.

        InfoReader
        A library of online documentation provided with VXT software kits for
        InfoServer systems. VXT 2000 windowing terminal users access the library
        from the Getting Started menu in the Terminal Manager window.

        InfoServer
        A high-performance virtual disk server that can efficiently download the VXT
        system image software to many terminals.

        Internet
        A collection of networks that includes the ARPAnet, a number of local networks
        at universities and research institutions, and many military networks. See
        TCP/IP.

        IP address
        A unique network address that identifies a device on the TCP/IP network.

        ISO
        International Standards Organization. ISO Latin-1 is one of the two 8-bit
        multinational character sets built into the terminal. The other set is the DEC
        Multinational set. For 7-bit environments, see National replacement character
        sets.

        Kilobyte (KB)
        When referring to memory, 1024 bytes.




340 Glossary
LASTport group code
A number from 0 to 1023 assigned to an InfoServer system. The InfoServer
only communicates with systems that belong to the same group code.

LAT protocol
A network protocol created by Digital for local area network communication.

LAT address
A network address that identifies the location of a device on the LAT network.

LED
Light-emitting diode. LEDs are used as indicators on the keyboard.

Local area network (LAN)
A high-speed communications network that covers a limited geographical area,
such as a section of a building, an entire building, or a cluster of buildings.

Locator device
See pointing device.

Local terminal
A terminal from which the configuration manager is being used to manage
other terminals and work groups.

Matte
An optional decorative border between the window frame and the work area.

Maximize button
A button that lets you increase the size of the window to its maximum
allowable size. The maximize button is at the right edge of a window’s title
bar.

Megabyte (MB)
When referring to memory, 1024 kilobytes or 1,048,576 bytes.

Menu bar
The area below a window’s title bar that lists the names of pull-down menus
for the window’s application.




                                                                  Glossary 341
        Minimize button
        A window button that lets you shrink a window to an icon. The minimize
        button is to the left of the maximize button.

        Mnemonic
        An underlined character in a menu. Mnemonics allow you to display menus
        and choose functions by typing letters on your keyboard.

        Modem
        Modulator - demodulator. A device that converts data from a computer or
        terminal into signals that can be sent over a telephone line and back again.

        Modifier key
        A key pressed in combination with another key, to modify the code sent by that
        key. Ctrl is a modifier key.

        Monochrome monitor
        A video screen that displays images in shades of one color.

        MOP
        Maintenance operation protocol. A network management protocol within
        DECnet software that handles tasks such as downloading, upline dumping,
        and circuit testing.

        Mouse
        A handheld pointing device used to select menu options and draw graphics.
        Moving the mouse across the desktop moves the pointer or mouse cursor on
        the screen. The mouse has three buttons that serve as function keys.

        National replacement character sets (NRCs)
        Seven-bit character sets for many Western European languages. Each set
        has 94 characters. NRC sets are similar to the ASCII set, except for a few
        characters.

        Native resource file
        In VXT software, the file that stores a terminal’s customized settings, entered
        from the terminal’s dialog boxes or from the configuration manager of another
        terminal. Host-based terminals store their native resource file in the terminal’s
        nonvolatile memory. Server-based terminals store their native resource file on
        an InfoServer system. Compare to Host-based resource file.




342 Glossary
Network
Two or more computers linked by communication lines to share information or
resources.

NFS
A network protocol developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. The VXT 2000
windowing terminal can use NFS to access fonts or host-based resource files on
host systems.

Node
A computer, workstation, or peripheral device that is connected to a network
and can communicate with other members of the network.

Nonvolatile memory
Random access memory (RAM) that does not lose its contents when you turn
the terminal off. The terminal uses this memory to store your saved customize
settings.

OpenVMS operating system
Digital’s proprietary operating system.

PC keyboard
Digital’s LK443 or LK444 PC keyboard. The LK443 is a worldwide model, with
102 keys. The LK444 is a North American model, with 102 keys.

Pixel
Picture elements. The smallest displayable unit on a video screen. To display
a character, the terminal turns on a series of pixels.

Pointer
A graphic symbol indicating a screen position. You control the pointer location
by moving the mouse. You can change the pointer shape; an application may
also change the pointer’s shape to indicate the type or state of an action.

Port
A means for connecting one device to another. Usually, each port has an
associated connector.

Prefix key
A key that you press and release before pressing another key, to change the
function of one or more keystrokes. Compose Character is a prefix key.


                                                                   Glossary 343
        Pull-down menu
        A menu accessed by pointing to the menu bar and pulling down with the
        mouse. Pull-down menus are generally organized by the types of functions
        they contain.

        Push button
        A control that causes an immediate action. To press a push button on the
        screen, point to it then click the select button.

        Radio buttons
        A group of option buttons that allow you to select only one of the selections at
        a time. Radio buttons may appear in a menu or in a program’s window. Radio
        buttons are usually displayed as small diamond-shaped buttons.

        Random access memory (RAM)
        Memory that can be read from and written to. The terminal uses this memory
        to store instructions of programs currently being run.

        Read-only memory (ROM)
        Memory that can be read from, but not modified. The terminal uses ROM
        memory to store its operating code.

        Read-only terminal
        A terminal that cannot save new customized settings. It belongs to a work
        group that does not allow the saving of new settings.

        ReGIS software
        A serial geometric graphics display protocol created by Digital.

        Resize border
        The resize border surrounds a window and is divided into eight handles—one
        for each side, and one for each corner.

        Restore
        To change an icon back into its original window.

        Resource file
        In VXT software, the file that stores the customizations for a terminal or work
        group. See Host-based resource file and Native resource file.




344 Glossary
Scroll bar
A vertical or horizontal bar that lets you control what portion of a larger object
is displayed within a window. The slider represents the relative position in
the list. The size of the slider represents the relative portion of the list that is
currently visible.

Scrolling
Moving information on the screen upward or downward to display more data.

Select button
The mouse button used for most operations, also known as mouse button 1
(MB1). By default, the select button is the left mouse button.

Server
Hardware or software that provides a specific set of services to a client.

Server-based terminal
In VXT software, a terminal that uses an InfoServer system to load its VXT
software and provide memory paging services. By default, a server-based
terminal also stores its customizations on the InfoServer, in a native resource
file. Compare to host-based terminal.

Service
A name that represents a host or cluster of hosts that provides access to that
host or cluster.

Session
An active connection between the terminal and the host system.

Short ANSI keyboard
A compact version of Digital’s ANSI keyboard, for those who make little use of
auxiliary editing and numeric keypads. An Extend key allows users to perform
keypad keystrokes when needed.

Sixel
A vertical column of six pixels. Screen displays can be printed in the form of
sixel graphics.




                                                                      Glossary 345
        Slider
        Part of a scroll bar that lets you scroll through information in a window. The
        size of the slider indicates how much of a file is currently displayed. The
        smaller the slider, the larger the file. The location of the slider in the scroll
        region indicates your relative position in the file.

        Software
        Programs that perform a chosen or required function. Compare to Hardware.

        Stepping arrow
        Part of a scroll bar that lets you move incrementally through information in a
        window.

        Submenu
        A menu associated with a menu item on a pull-down or pop-up menu. When
        you choose the menu item, you display the submenu.

        Sun style keyboard
        Digital’s LK460 keyboard. The Sun style keyboard comes in a North American
        model only.

        System
        A combination of hardware, software, and peripheral devices that perform
        specific processing operations.

        System image
        The VXT software, downloaded from a host system or server.

        System manager
        A person who performs tasks necessary to operate and maintain the system.
        See VXT manager.

        TCP/IP
        Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol. The standard wide area
        networking software for the ULTRIX and UNIX operating systems. TCP/IP
        is a set of protocols developed by researchers centered around the Advanced
        Research Projects Administration Network (ARPAnet).

        Terminal Manager window
        In VXT software, the window for creating and managing sessions, customizing
        terminal settings, and performing local printing functions.


346 Glossary
Terminal server
An intelligent unit that can connect a number of asynchronous devices
(terminals and printers) to a host system. For example, Digital’s DECserver
200 can link eight terminals to a system in a local area network (LAN), using
a high-speed Ethernet cable.

Terminal window
A window that emulates a video terminal. Terminal windows allow you to use
applications that were designed for the video terminal they emulate.

Terminator
A connector used on one or both ends of an Ethernet segment that provides the
50-ohm termination resistance needed for the cable.

TFTP
Trivial file transfer protocol. The Internet standard protocol for file transfer
with minimal capability and minimal overhead. TFTP is intended for use
in application environments that do not require complex interaction among
clients and servers.

ThinWire Ethernet network
A term to describe Digital’s 10base2 (IEEE standard 802.3 compliant) Ethernet
products used for local distribution of data.

Title bar
An area at the top of the window frame that displays the name of the
application and provides window management buttons.

Toggle buttons
See Check buttons.

Transcript
An area of memory that contains the last saved lines of your screen display.

transport
The network software that routes user data to its destination and controls the
flow of data.

ULTRIX operating system
A UNIX based operating system created by Digital.



                                                                     Glossary 347
        UNIX operating system
        An operating system created by AT&T and in wide use.

        Unregistered Terminals work group
        A work group supplied on a newly installed InfoServer, to let terminals operate
        until they are registered (created) in a work group you have created. The
        Unregistered Terminals work group is preconfigured with factory-default
        settings that are read-only.

        User-defined keys (UDKs)
        Keyboard keys that a user can define to perform specific functions.

        Visual character attribute
        A quality of a display character that highlights the character, such as bolding
        and underlining.

        VXT launcher
        See Application launcher.

        VXT manager
        The person who manages the VXT system, work groups and the network. This
        person assigns unique node names and addresses for each terminal on the
        network, and provides administrative assistance to network users.

        Window
        An area on your monitor screen that represents all or part of an application.

        Window frame
        The resize border and title bar surrounding a window.

        Window manager
        The window manager controls the size, placement, and operation of windows
        in the workspace. The terminal’s Motif window manager includes the window
        frames that surround each window object as well as the workspace menu. The
        Motif window manager is a client program of the X Window System.

        Window menu
        A menu that lets you control the size, shape, and position of a window. To
        display the menu, you use the window menu button.




348 Glossary
Window menu button
The button at the left corner of a window’s title bar. Clicking MB1 on the
window menu button displays the window menu.

Window system
A windowing architecture that allows the execution and display of applications
to be independent. Specific components of the architecture control the display
of applications and determine how applications run. Since its introduction by
MIT, the X Window System has become an industry standard.

Work area
The area in a window where you can perform user tasks.

Work group
A customization file and a set of terminals that share the file. Each work
group is assigned to a particular support server.

Workspace
The monitor screen, where all windows are displayed.

Workspace menu
A pop-up menu with items for arranging windows and customizing the window
manager. To display the workspace menu, point to anywhere in the workspace
and click MB1 or MB3. You can also display the workspace menu from the
window menu.

XIE
X image extension. An extension to the X core protocol that handles image
functions. XIE enables compressed image data to be sent across the X wire
and image processing to be handled at the X server.




                                                                  Glossary 349
                                                                        Index

8-Bit Multinational Characters button     ANSI keyboard, 247 to 255
    (DECterm), 153                          editing keypad, 250
7-Bit NRC Characters button (DECterm),      figure, 248
    153                                     function keys, 249, 251
7-Bit NRCS Selection Options dialog box     main keypad, 248
    (DECterm), 156                          numeric keypad, 251
                                          Answerback message
A                                           sending, 252
                                          Answerback Message box (DECterm), 154
Accelerator keys, 206
                                          Any Host button (TM), 18
Additional characters, 282 to 292
                                          Any Host Indirect button (TM), 19
    canceling a sequence, 286
                                          Application
    hexadecimal sequences, 286
                                            font problems, 299
    invalid sequences, 285
                                            moving between applications, 199
    table, 288
                                            starting, 14
Address
                                          Application Cursor Keys button (DECterm),
    Ethernet, 126
                                              152
Adjust Video Centering (TM)
                                          Application Keypad button (DECterm), 152
    VX227 terminal, 60
                                          Application launcher, 237
Adjust Video Rotation (TM)
                                            command arguments, 238
    VX227 terminal, 60
                                            running
Allow All Connections button
                                                 OpenVMS systems, 238
    VXT EX, 245
                                                 UNIX systems, 237
Alt key, 218
                                          Application launching, 232 to 241
 Alt A key, 159
                                            host application, 236
 Alt Graph key (Sun), 272
                                            remote application, 240
Alt key (PC), 262
                                            rsh commands, 241
    North American model, 262
                                            VXT application, 233, 241
Alt key (Sun), 272
                                          Apply button, 40
 Alternate Shift key (German), 250
                                            VXT DECterm options, 140
AltGr key (PC), 262
                                          Arrow keys, 250
< > keys, 155
                                            function, 152
 ,<    . > keys, 156
                                            PC keyboard, 263
                                            short ANSI keyboard, 258
                                            Sun style keyboard, 272




                                                                            Index–1
Arrow keys (cont’d)                         Booting the terminal (cont’d)
  to move pointer, 206                        reboot commands, 99
Audible indicators, 254                       secondary boot file, 107
  PC keyboard, 264                            using the XIE option, 107
  short ANSI keyboard, 260                    VXT software
  Sun style keyboard, 273                          from VXT EX Options dialog box,
Authorizing hosts                                      246
  TCP/IP, LAT, or DECnet connections, 50    Bootstrap history
Authorizing users, 50                         clearing, 303
Auto print mode                             Border color settings
  selecting, 251                              window manager, 220 to 221
Auto Print Mode button (DECterm), 159       Border settings
Auto Repeat button (DECterm), 155             window manager, 218 to 219
Auto Repeat button (TM), 43                 Break key
Auto Resize Terminal button (DECterm),        See F5 key
    144                                     Browser color model, 313
Auto Resize Window button (DECterm), 144
Auto Wrap button (DECterm), 149
Autostart feature                           C
  Customize AutoStart dialog box (TM), 95   Cables
AutoStart feature, 24                          part numbers, 325
  entering settings, 95                     Cancel button, 40, 216
                                               VXT DECterm options, 140
B                                           Cancel Printing (DECterm), 136
                                             Caps Lock key (PC), 262
Backarrow key (PC), 262                      Caps Lock key (Sun), 271
Background color (WM), 221                  Center Image button (TM), 49
Backing Store button (DECterm), 157         Character format
Backing Store button (TM), 93                  serial communication, 68
< x Backspace button (DECterm), 156         Character sets
     Backspace key (PC), 262
 




                                               overview, 10
     Backspace key (Sun), 271
 




                                               typing additional characters, 283
Batch Scroll Lines box (DECterm), 150          VXT 3270 window
Baud rate                                           translation table, 193
   serial communication, 68                    VXT DECterm window
Bell, 254, 255, 264, 273                            7-bit NRC sets, 156
Bell volume, 42                                     choosing a multinational set, 152
Big Font button (DECterm), 145                      selecting 8-bit or 7-bit, 153
BIND name servers, 74                       Check button
Booting the terminal, 98 to 110                defined, 209
   BOOT commands, 108                       Clear Communications menu item
   Customize Boot dialog box (TM), 105           (DECterm), 133
   error codes, 302                         Clear Display menu item (DECterm), 133
   from a remote node, 107
   MOP trigger, 107
   primary boot file, 106



Index–2
Clear Lines Off Top menu item (DECterm),    Compose Character key (ANSI), 250, 284
     133                                   Compose sequences, 284
Clicking                                   Composing characters
   defined, 196                               See Additional characters
Clientless VXT software, 4, 242            Conceal Answerback Message button
Close button (WM)                               (DECterm), 154
   using, 204                              Condensed font setting (DECterm), 144
Color                                      Configuration manager, 85
   customizable features, 306                 customizing the terminal, 8
   eyedropper, 309                            identifying terminals, 59
   interpolator, 309                       Confirm Close Terminal Manager button
   mixing colors, 306                           (TM), 58
   monitor setting, 94                     Confirm Reset Session button (TM), 58
   paint buckets, 309                      Connections Allowed button (TM), 50
   printing, 49                            Control key (Sun), 271
   smearing colors, 309                    Copy menu item
   tiles, 309                                 VXT 3270 window, 171
Color map entries, 157                        VXT DECterm window, 130
Color mixing                               Copying text
   scratch pad, 314                           disabled by some applications, 132
Color Mixing dialog box, 307                  extending selected text, 132, 173
Color models, 307                             host synchronization, 130
   browser, 313                               selecting text
   grayscale, 314                                  VXT 3270 window, 171
   HLS, 310                                        VXT DECterm window, 131
   picker, 307                                using the keyboard only, 173
   RGB, 312                                   VXT 3270 window, 171
Color systems                                 VXT DECterm window, 130
   customizing window colors, 221          Create dialog box, 14
Comma key, 156                             Create menu (TM), 14, 23
Commands menu (DECterm), 133               Creating sessions
Communication                                 problems, 298
   See also Serial communication           Creating sessions and applications, 14 to 24
   breaking serial, 252                       Getting Started menu, 36
   DECnet settings, 81, 82                 Ctrl key (ANSI), 249
   font problems, 299                      Ctrl key (PC), 262
   InfoServer systems, 71                  Cursor
   LAT settings, 69                           blinking or steady, 149
   network problems, 298                      block or underline, 150
   NFS mount points, 78                       text, 149
   serial and parallel ports, 66              VXT 3270 window, 168
   TCP/IP settings, 73, 74, 76             Cursor Blink button (DECterm), 149
Communications submenu (TM), 65            Cursor Blink button (TM), 43




                                                                               Index–3
Cursor keypad mode (PC), 263                   Customize menu (TM) (cont’d)
                                                 font path, 86
Customer service
                                                 keyboard settings, 41
  See Service
                                                 LASTport group code settings, 71
Customize Font Path dialog box (TM), 88
                                                 LAT settings, 69
Customize menu (message box), 61
                                                 NFS mount points, 78
Customize menu (TM), 39, 85
                                                 parallel port settings, 66
  AutoStart settings, 95
                                                 pointer and mouse settings, 45
  basic settings, 38 to 61
                                                 resource files, 113
  communication settings, 64 to 83
                                                 Resource files, 113
  configuration management, 85
                                                 saving the Terminal Manager window, 61
  Configuration submenu, 86
                                                 screen background settings, 52
  Customize AutoStart dialog box, 95
                                                 security settings, 50
  Customize Boot dialog box, 98, 105
                                                 serial port settings, 66
  Customize DECnet dialog box, 81
                                                 system settings, 84 to 113
  Customize DECnet Name Translator
                                                 TCP/IP Name Server settings, 74
      dialog box, 83
                                                 TCP/IP routing table settings, 76
  Customize Font Path dialog box, 88
                                                 TCP/IP settings, 73
  Customize Keyboard dialog box, 41
                                                 video alignment, 60
  Customize Language dialog box, 44
                                                 video alignment dialog box, 60
  Customize LASTport dialog box, 72
                                                 window color settings, 54
  Customize LAT dialog box, 70
                                                 X server, 93
  Customize NFS dialog box, 78
                                               Customize Message Box (TM), 63
  Customize Pointer dialog box, 45
                                               Customize Message dialog box (TM), 61
  Customize Print Screen dialog box, 48
                                               Customize NFS dialog box (TM), 78
  Customize Screen Background dialog box,
                                               Customize Software Options (TM), 111
      52
                                               Customized settings
  Customize Security dialog box, 50
                                                 DECwindows Customize utility, 9
  Customize Serial and Parallel Ports dialog
                                                 from a host system, 9
      box, 66
                                                 overview, 7
  Customize Software Options dialog box,
                                                 problems
      110, 111
                                                     cannot change settings, 300
  Customize TCP/IP dialog box, 73
                                                 resource file, 7
  Customize TCP/IP Name Server dialog
                                                 terminal manager, 38, 64, 84
      box, 75
                                                 VXT 3270 windows, 180
  Customize TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog
                                                 VXT DECterm windows, 138
      box, 77
                                                 window manager, 213
  Customize Terminal Manager dialog box,
      57
  Customize Window Color dialog box            D
      color, 55                                Data processing keys, 42
      monochrome, 54                             ANSI keyboard, 253
  Customize X Server dialog box, 93            DEC OSF/1 AXP operating system
  DECnet Name Translator settings, 82            NFS mount points, 78
  DECnet settings, 81
  display language, 44




Index–4
DEC OSF/1 AXP system                        Default Message Box Window (TM), 63
  print command, 35                         Default options
  quitting a remote session manager, 28        choosing, 210
  TCP/IP Name Server settings, 74           Default Terminal Manager Window (TM), 61
  TCP/IP printer port setup, 68             < x Delete button (DECterm), 156
  TCP/IP routing table settings, 76         < x delete key, 156
  TCP/IP settings, 73                       < x delete key (ANSI), 249
DECnet address, 16                          Delete key (Sun), 273
  checking, 127                             Determine IP Address (TM), 74
  entering, 82                              Diacritical keys, 283
DECnet session                              Diagnostic messages
  entering a host name or DECnet address,      VXT Message Box, 13
       16                                   Dialog boxes
  starting, 16                                 description, 208
DECnet terminal window                         making changes, 210
  AutoStart, 95                                options menus, 208
  ending, 28                                Digital manuals
DECnet transport                               See Related documentation
  Customize DECnet dialog box (TM), 81      Dimmed items, 210
  Customize DECnet Name Translator          Disable F3 Key (TM), 58
       dialog box (TM), 83                  Display Cursor button (DECterm), 149
  enabling, 81                              Display Options dialog box (DECterm), 148
  name translator address                   Display Scaling (TM), 94
       primary, 83                          Dithering, 49
       secondary, 83                        Documentation, 321
  Name Translator settings, 82                 online, 4, 36
  network buffer size                          ordering, 322
       entering, 82                         Domain name, 76
  security, 50, 51                          Double clicking
  settings, 81                                 defined, 196
  terminal’s DECnet address, 12             Dragging
DECnet X session
                                               See also Pointer shapes
  AutoStart, 95
                                               defined, 196
  ending, 28
                                            Dynamic Routing button (TM), 77
DECnet/SNA gateway, 161
DECterm window
  customizing, 8                            E
DECterm windows                             EBCDIC translation table, 193
  See VXT DECterm windows                   Echoing data, 152
DECwindows                                  Edit menu
  keyboard setting, 42                        VXT 3270 window
  overview, 7                                     format, 171
Default button, 216                               Select All, 171
                                              VXT DECterm window
                                                  format, 130




                                                                             Index–5
Edit menu
   VXT DECterm window (cont’d)
        Select All, 131                  F
Editing                                  F1 (Hold) key (ANSI), 251
   VXT 3270 window, 170                  F2 (Print) key (ANSI), 251
Editing keypad                           F3 key
   ANSI keyboard, 250                        hiding the Terminal Manager window, 58
   used as a mouse, 250                  F5 (Break) key, 154
Electrical specifications, 327           F5 (Break) key (ANSI), 252
Ending a session, 27                     Factory-default settings
Enet address, 126                           restoring, 303
Enter Connection Parameters dialog box   File menu (DECterm), 137
     (3270), 163                         Finish Printing (DECterm), 136
Enter key (ANSI), 251                    Font
Enter key (PC), 262                         problems, 299
Return key (Sun), 271                       scaling the display of, 94
Environmental specifications, 327           VXT DECterm window, 144, 145
Error codes                                      custom fonts, 146
   booting, 302                          Font manager
   NFS, 300                                 enabling or disabling use of, 112
Error messages, 302                      Font path
   See Diagnostic messages                  activating, 87
   displaying, 62                           checking, 126
Errors                                      directory, 89
   Ethernet, 121                            entering, 88
   LASTport protocol, 121                   errors, 92
   LAT protocol, 118                        font source, 88
ESC character, 155                          NFS, 90
Esc key (PC), 263                           removing, 89
Esc key (Sun), 271                          TCP/IP, 91
Escape key, 155                             TFTP, 90
Ethernet                                    transport, 88
   displaying errors and counters, 121   Font server
Ethernet address, 126                       TCP/IP font path, 91
   hardware address, 12                  Fonts
   when using DECnet, 12                    font path settings, 86 to 92
Ethernet Counters dialog box (TM), 120   Foreground color (WM), 221
Ethernet problems, 298                   Form Feed Terminator button (DECterm),
Ext key                                       158
   location, 176                         Function keys, 258
Extend key (short ANSI), 256, 257           ANSI keyboard, 249, 251
                                            PC keyboard, 263




Index–6
                                             Host-based terminals
                                               loading VXT software, 100
G                                            Host-based window manager, 57
General Options dialog box (DECterm), 150    HP–UX operating system
German Standard Font button (DECterm),         IP X session, 18
     145                                       print command, 35
Getting Started menu
   figure, 36
Getting Started menu (TM), 36                I
Graphics Options dialog box (DECterm), 157   IBM AIX operating system
Graphics printing button (DECterm), 159         print command, 35
Gray scale                                   Icon box
   monitor setting, 94                          saving the size and location of, 222
   printing, 49                              Icon color settings
Grayscale color model, 314                      window manager, 223 to 224
Group code                                   Icon Name button (DECterm), 145
   entering, 71                              Icon settings
 Group Shift key (German), 250, 285             window manager, 221 to 223
                                             Icons, 201
                                                customizing colors of, 224
H                                               displaying the icon box, 222
Hebrew keyboard                                 labels and images, 223
  Customize Keyboard Type (TM), 41              location of, 222
Hebrew language                                 making a window active, 218
  Customize Language dialog box (TM), 44        rearranging, 202
Hexadecimal key sequences, 286                  restoring, 93, 157
Hiding                                          restoring windows, 203
  Terminal Manager window, 58                   size, 222
  VXT Message box, 58                           stacking, 205
HLS color model, 310                         Icons (DECterm)
Hold key                                        selecting icon names, 145
  See F1 key                                 Image accelerator board
Horizontal Cursor Coupling button               functions, 317
    (DECterm), 149                           Indicator lights, 254
Horizontal Scroll Bar button (DECterm),      InfoReader library, 4
    149                                         accessing, 36
Host applications                               enabling or disabling use of, 112
  See Remote applications                    InfoReader Library dialog box, 37
Host Preconfigured button (TM), 106          InfoServer system, 3
Host status line, 149                           defined, 3
Host-based software, 3                          font path, 89
  font path                                     fonts
       checking, 126                                 for VXT DECterm window, 146, 147
  monitoring memory usage, 6                    LASTport group codes, 71
                                                name, 125




                                                                              Index–7
Input focus                                 Keyboard (cont’d)
   giving a window, 199                       VXT 3270 window, 184
IP address, 17                                warning bell, 155
   checking, 126                            Keyboard model
   domain name, 76                            setting, 41
   entering, 73, 74                         Keyboard Options dialog box (DECterm),
   entering an indirect address, 19            154
   formats, 18                              Keyboard settings (TM), 41 to 43
   primary name server, 75                  Keyclick, 254, 255, 264, 273
   reading from a host, 74                    volume slide bar, 42
   secondary name server, 76                Keys
IP subnet mask                                repeating, 43
   entering, 74
IP transport                                L
   for loading VXT software, 100
IP X session                                LA printers
   AutoStart, 95                              print settings for, 49
   limit, 17                                Language
   quitting, 28                               Customize Language dialog box (TM), 44
                                              display, 44
                                              keyboard, 41
J                                           LASTport group code
Janus-faced keys, 263                         entering, 72
                                            LASTport transport
                                              Customize LASTport dialog box (TM), 72
K                                             displaying errors and counters, 121
# £ key (short ANSI), 259                     font path, 89
Key bindings, 227                             group code settings, 71
Keyboard                                    LAT Counters dialog box (TM), 118
   ANSI keyboard, 247, 248                  LAT session
   auto repeat feature, 155                   starting, 15
   Customize Keyboard dialog box (TM), 41   LAT terminal window
   indicator lights, 254                      AutoStart, 95
   launching applications                     creating, 28
        local, 235                          LAT transport
        remote, 240                           circuit timer, 70
   local echo, 152                            Customize LAT dialog box (TM), 70
   PC keyboard, 260                           displaying errors and counters, 118
   PC keycodes, 266 to 269                    font path, 91
   problems, 295                              font paths, 88
   short ANSI keyboard, 255                   keep alive timer, 71
   specifications, 326, 328, 329, 330         printing from a host, 68
   Sun keycodes, 274 to 277                   retransmit timer, 71
   Sun style keyboard, 270                    security, 50, 51
   UNIX keyboard, 255                         settings, 69
                                              terminal’s LAT address, 12



Index–8
LAT transport (cont’d)                     Menu bindings, 227
   tuning performance, 69                    changing or adding, 229
   VXT EX security, 245                    Menus
LAT X session                                displaying from the keyboard, 206
   AutoStart, 95                             overview, 206
   ending, 28                                pop-up menus, 207
Launching                                    pull-down menu, 206
   applications, 232                       Message Box, 13
   sessions, 232                             AutoStart, 95
Lights                                       Customize menu, 61
   See Indicator lights                      displaying, 63
List Known Hosts button (TM), 19           Message Box (TM)
Listed Users Only button (TM), 51            booting software option, 112
Little Font button (DECterm), 145          Message region
Local Echo button (DECterm), 152             scroll lines saved, 62
Lock key (ANSI), 249                         title, 62
Lock key (short ANSI), 257                 Messages
Lock Key State (TM), 43                      controlling displays, 61
Lock UDKs button (DECterm), 152              displaying, 62
Lock User Features button (DECterm), 152     pause prompt box, 59
Lower button (WM)                          Metric button(TM), 78
   using, 204                              Minimize button (WM)
lp command, 35                               using, 201
lpr command, 35                            Mnemonic, 206
                                           Modem Control buttons (TM), 69
                                           Modems
M                                            breaking communication, 252
Managing terminals, 85                       part numbers, 324
Margin bell, 255, 264, 273                 Modified ISO-Latin Character Set
Margin Bell button (DECterm), 155            figure, 193
Matte                                      Monitor
  customizing, 225                           color, 94
Matte settings                               gray scale, 94
  window manager, 225 to 226                 problems, 294
Maximize button (WM)                       Monitors
  using, 200                                 specifications, 326, 327
MB3 pop-up menu (3270), 178                MOP Boot File box (TM), 106
Memory                                     MOP transport
  clearing, 6                                for loading VXT software, 100
  controller board, 5                      MOP trigger
  memory modules, 5                          for rebooting the terminal, 107
  monitoring the use of, 123               Motif window manager
  monitoring usage, 6                        AutoStart, 95
  requirements, 5                            restarting, 23
  size, 127




                                                                             Index–9
Motif Window Manager (TM)                    No Form Feed button, 49
  booting software option, 111               Nonselectable items, 210
Mounting files                               Normal Cursor Keys button (DECterm), 152
  errors, 300                                Normal font setting (DECterm), 144
Mouse                                        Normal Print Mode button (DECterm), 159
  See also Using scroll bars                 Num Lock key (Sun), 272
  button layout, 46                          Number generator mode (PC), 263
  buttons defined, 195                       Number generator mode (Sun), 272
  double click timeout, 47                   Number of Bit Planes button (DECterm),
  editing keypad, 250                            158
  figure, 196                                Numeric keypad
  pointer acceleration, 46                     ANSI keyboard, 251
  problems, 295                                PC keyboard, 263
  settings, 45                                 Sun style keyboard, 272
  specifications, 327, 330                     VXT 3270 window, 175
  using, 195                                 Numeric Keypad button (DECterm), 152
  using the editing keypad as a mouse, 252
Mouse button bindings, 227
Move button (WM)
                                             O
  using, 203                                 OK button, 40, 216
Multinational character sets, 152              VXT DECterm options, 140
Multiple VXT Launchers, 237                  Online documentation, 4, 36
                                             Open Look window manager, 29
                                               fonts
N                                                   host system, 31
Name server, 74                                     InfoServer system, 31
National replacement character sets, 156       setup, 29
Network                                      OpenVMS operating system
  monitoring network utilization, 123          DECnet Name Translator settings, 82
  problems, 298                                DECnet settings, 81
  routes                                       LAT settings, 69
       TCP/IP, 117                             print command, 35
  status, 28, 114                            Option settings
  TCP/IP routing tables, 77                    VXT DECterm
Network address, 12                                 recalling, 141
Network buffer size                          Options
  DECnet, 82                                   ordering, 322
Newline button (DECterm), 151                  part numbers, 324 to 325
NFS mount points scroll box (TM), 79           viewing installed options, 127
NFS transport                                  VXT DECterm window, 138 to 160
  error codes, 300                           Options button (TM), 245
  font path, 90                              Options menu (DECterm), 135, 139
  mount points, 78                             7-BIT NRCS Selection Options dialog box,
                                                    156
                                               Display Options dialog box, 148 to 150




Index–10
Options menu (DECterm) (cont’d)               Pasting text
  General Options dialog box, 150 to 154         host synchronization, 130
  Graphic Options dialog box, 157 to 158         Quick Copy, 132, 172
  Graphics Options dialog box, 157               remote DECterm windows, 132, 172
  Keyboard Options dialog box, 154 to 156        VXT 3270 window, 171, 172
  Printer Options dialog box:, 158 to 160        VXT DECterm window, 130, 131
  saving and restoring settings, 140          Pause key (PC), 264
  Window Options dialog box, 142 to 147       Pause key (Sun), 272
Options menus, 208                            Pausing a session, 25
Options submenu (WM), 213 to 231                 resuming the session, 26
  border colors, 220                          PC keyboard, 260 to 269
  border settings, 218                           ANSI keyboard option, 260
  icon, 221                                      editing keypad, 263
  icon color, 223                                figure, 261
  list of window manager functions, 228          function keys, 263
  matte, 225                                     Janus-faced keys, 263
  resource configuration, 226                    main keypad, 261
  Workspace: Border Color Options dialog         models, 260
       box, 220                                  numeric keypad, 263
  Workspace: Border Options dialog box,          redefining keys, 265
       218                                       special-function keys, 262
  Workspace: Customize Resource dialog        PF keys (3270), 174
       box, 227                               PF1 to PF4 keys, 251
  Workspace: Icon Color Options dialog box,   Photographic images
       223                                       printing, 49
  Workspace: Icon Options dialog box, 221     Picker color model, 307
  Workspace: Matte Options dialog box,        ping
       225                                       definition, 115
  Workspace: Options dialog box, 216          Pointer
Output Color Mode buttons (TM), 49               settings, 45
                                                 shapes, 197, 201
P                                             Pointing
                                                 defined, 196
Pagefile, 125                                 Pop-up menus, 207
Parallel communication                        Port number
  settings, 66                                   specifying for Telnet, 18
Parallel port                                 Port usage
  customizing, 66                                serial or parallel, 67
  for printing, 67                            # £ pound key (ANSI), 253
Parity, 68                                    Power-up self-test, 302
Parity Check button (TM), 68                  Preferred Services scroll box, 14
Paste menu item                                  entries added to menus, 23
  VXT 3270 window, 171                           managing, 22
  VXT DECterm window, 130




                                                                             Index–11
                                             Printing
Pressing
                                                from a host system (cont’d)
   defined, 196
Print All Characters button (DECterm), 160           HP–UX or SCO ODT, 35
Print All Text (DECterm), 136                        OpenVMS, 35
PRINT command, 35                                    ULTRIX, DEC OSF/1 AXP, SunOS, or
Print Full Page + Transcript button                      IBM AIX, 35
    (DECterm), 160                              from a TCP/IP or LAT host, 68
Print Full Page button (DECterm), 160           from DECterm windows, 158 to 160
Print Graphics (DECterm), 136                   from the host system, 159
 F2 (Print) key, 159                            gray scale or color, 49
                                                LAT print jobs
Print key
                                                     canceling, 33
   See F2 key                                   network
Print menu (DECterm), 135                            enabling or disabling, 112
Print National Characters + Line Drawing        output format, 48
     button (DECterm), 160                      pixel aspect ratio, 49
Print National Characters Only button           Print Screen menu, 32
     (DECterm), 160                             printer status, 34
Print Screen (TM)                               ribbon or toner saver, 49
   booting software option, 112                 rotated image, 49
 Print Screen key (PC), 264
                                                TCP/IP print jobs
PrSc key (Sun), 272
                                                     canceling, 33
Print screen settings, 48                       the screen, 159
Print Scroll Region Only button (DECterm),      under host control, 159
     160                                        using TCP/IP, 34
Print Selected Text (DECterm), 136              VXT 3270 window, 171
Print Selection Only button (DECterm), 160   Problems, 293
Print Text Page (DECterm), 136               Pull-down menu
Printer controller mode, 159                    displaying, 206
Printer Options dialog box (DECterm), 158    Push button
Printer port                                    defined, 210
   choosing serial or parallel, 67
Printer Port button (TM), 68
Printer to Host button (DECterm), 159        Q
Printers, 32                                 Quick Copy, 132, 172
   baud rate, 68                             Quitting
   problems, 295                               a remote session manager, 29
Printing, 32
   canceling, 34
   center image, 49                          R
   Customize Print Screen dialog box (TM),   Radio button
        48                                     defined, 210
   dithering, 49                             Reboot menu item, 27
   form feed character, 49
   from a host system, 34
        canceling, 35




Index–12
Reboot Options box (TM), 107                 RGB color model, 312
Record dialog box (3270)                     Rotate/Scale Picture button (TM), 49
  figure, 174                                Routes scroll box (TM), 78
Record Lines Off Top box (DECterm), 150      Rows and columns (DECterm), 144
Record Lines Off Top button (DECterm), 148   rsh commands
Recording key sequences (3270), 174            launching applications, 241
ReGIS graphics, 157, 158
  VXT DECterm window, 141
Related documentation, 321
                                             S
Remote application                           Save Message Box Window(TM), 63
  entering the VXT launcher name, 21         Save Terminal Manager Window (TM), 61
Remote applications                          Saving feature settings
  starting                                      terminal manager settings, 40
       Create dialog box, 21                    window manager settings, 215
Remote session managers, 28                  Saving settings
Remote window manager, 57                       VXT DECterm windows, 140
Report Macrograph Contents button            Scale
    (DECterm), 157                              defined, 209
Reset button, 216                            SCO ODT operating system
Reset menu item, 27                             print command, 35
Reset Terminal menu item (DECterm), 134      Scratch pad, for color, 314
Resize border                                Screen
  customizing, 219                              Customize Screen Background dialog box
Resize cursor, 201                                    (TM), 52
Resize Window menu item (DECterm), 133       Screen background, 53
Resizing                                     Screen color (TM), 52
  VXT DECterm windows, 144                   Screen Saver button (TM), 53
Resource file, 7                             Screen settings (TM), 52
  specifying, 113                            Scroll bar, 211
Resource settings                               Scroll region, 211
  window manager, 226 to 231                    Scrolling methods, 211
Restore button (WM)                           Scroll Lock key (PC), 264
  using, 203                                  Scroll Lock key (Sun), 272
Restore Message Box Window(TM), 63           Scrolling
Restore Terminal Manager Window (TM), 61        controlling, 155
Restoring feature settings                   Seating, 332
  terminal manager settings, 40              Secondary Boot button (TM), 107
  window manager settings, 215               Security
Restoring settings                              Customize Security dialog box (TM), 50
  VXT DECterm windows, 140                      OpenVMS sessions, 29
Return key                                   Security settings, 50
  selecting the function of, 151                adding authorized users, 51
Return key (ANSI), 249                          authorizing TCP/IP, LAT, or DECnet
                                                      connections, 50
                                                removing authorized users, 51




                                                                               Index–13
Security settings (cont’d)                   Session Status menu (TM)
   VXT EX, 245                                  TCP/IP Network Test (ping) dialog box,
Select All menu item                                 115
   VXT 3270 window, 171                         TCP/IP Routes dialog box, 117
   VXT DECterm window, 130                   Setup
Serial communication
                                                See Customize menu, Options submenu
   baud rate, 68
                                             Setup Key (VXT EX), 245
   settings, 66
                                             Shadow colors (TM), 55
Serial port
                                             Shadow colors (WM), 221
   customizing, 66
                                             Share Color Map Entries button (DECterm),
   for printing, 67
                                                  157
Serial printer
                                             Shift clicking
   setup, 159
                                                defined, 196
Serial session
                                             Shift key (ANSI), 249
   starting, 15
                                             Shift key (short ANSI), 258
Serial terminal window
                                             Shift key (PC), 262
   AutoStart, 95
                                             Shift key (Sun), 271
   ending, 28
                                             Short ANSI keyboard, 255 to 260
Server-based software, 4
                                                arrow keys, 258
   font path
                                                extended ANSI layout, 256
        checking, 126
                                                figure, 255
   pagefile, 125
                                                main keypad, 256
Server-based terminals
                                                predefined keys, 258
   loading VXT software, 102
                                                special-function keys, 257
Service, 304 to 305
                                                top-row function keys, 258
Session
                                                user-defined keys, 259
   AutoStart, 24
                                             Shutdown menu item, 27
   AutoStart settings, 95
                                             Site preparation, 326
   creating
                                             Sixel graphics, 158
        VXT Create pop-up menu, 23
                                                VXT DECterm window, 141
   ending, 27
                                             Size button (WM)
   help on creating, 36
                                                using, 203
   pausing, 25
                                             Slider
   quitting from a remote session manager,
                                                in scroll bar, 211
        29
                                             Software options
   starting, 14
                                                turning off, 110
        DECnet session, 16
                                             Solving problems, 293
        IP session, 17
                                             Specifications, 326 to 330
        LAT session, 15
                                             Startup State (TM), 58
        serial session, 15
                                             Status Display button (DECterm), 149
   using preferred services, 23
                                             Status indicators (VXT 3270), 169
Session menu (TM), 24, 25, 27
                                             Status line, 149
   Status submenu, 115
                                             Status submenu (TM), 115
                                                Ethernet Counters dialog box, 120
                                                figure, 115




Index–14
Status submenu (TM) (cont’d)                  TCP/IP session
   LAT Counters dialog box, 118                  preferred services (cont’d)
   System Configuration dialog box, 124               adding from the Known Hosts dialog
   System Monitor dialog box, 123                         box, 20
   using, 114 to 127                             starting, 17
Status update frequency                       TCP/IP transport
   seconds, 59                                   Customize TCP/IP dialog box (TM), 73
Stepping arrow, 211                              Customize TCP/IP Name Server dialog
Sun style keyboard, 270 to 277                        box (TM), 75
   editing keypad, 272                           Customize TCP/IP Routing Tables dialog
   figure, 270                                        box (TM), 77
   function keys, 271, 273                       enabling, 73
   main keypad, 271                              font path, 91
   numeric keypad, 272                           Name Server settings, 74
   redefinding keys, 274                         printing from a host, 68
Sun system                                       routing table settings, 76
   font conversion, 31                           security, 50, 51
Sun systems                                      terminal settings, 73
   Open Look window manager, 29                  terminal’s IP address, 12
SunOS operating system                           VXT EX security, 245
   print command, 35                          Telnet terminal window
System box                                       AutoStart, 95
   problems, 293                                 ending, 28
   specifications, 326                        Terminal
System Configuration dialog box (TM), 124        LASTport group codes, 71
System Defaults button, 40                       network addresses, 12
System Monitor dialog box (TM), 123              overview, 1 to 10
System-default settings                          problems, 296
   VXT DECterm                                   resource file name, 127
        recalling, 141                           status, 28, 114
                                                 system configuration, 124
                                                 TCP/IP address, 73
T                                             Terminal address, 126
Tab key (ANSI), 249                           Terminal ID button (DECterm), 153
Tab key (PC), 262                             Terminal Manager window, 11 to 37
Tab key (Sun), 271                               AutoStart, 95
TCP/IP Network Test (ping) dialog box (TM),      closing, 13
   115, 116                                      controlling display of, 58
TCP/IP Routes dialog box (TM), 117               Create dialog box, 14
TCP/IP session                                   Create menu, 14
  displaying available hosts, 19                 Customize menu, 84
  entering a host name or IP address, 17              communications, 64
      options, 18                                     user preferences, 38
  entering an indirect host name or IP           customizing, 8
      address, 19                                features, 12
  preferred services



                                                                                Index–15
Terminal Manager window (cont’d)          UNIX operating system
   figure, 12                               NFS mount points, 78
   Getting Started menu, 36                 quitting a remote session manager, 28
   hiding, 14, 58                           TCP/IP Name Server settings, 74
   icon, 58                                 TCP/IP printer port setup, 68
   option settings                          TCP/IP routing table settings, 76
        saving and recalling, 40            TCP/IP settings, 73
   Print Screen menu, 32                  UPSS DEC Supplemental button (DECterm),
   saving the size and position of, 61        152
   Session menu, 24, 25                   UPSS ISO Latin 1 Supplemental button
   starting, 21                               (DECterm), 152
   using, 11 to 37                        User-defined keys
Terminal Size box (DECterm), 144            ANSI keyboard, 252
Terminal Tag (TM), 59                       locking, 152
Terminal window                             short ANSI keyboard, 259
   on the serial port                     User-preferred settings, 38
        AutoStart, 95                     User-preferred supplemental sets, 152
Test
   power-up self-test, 302
Text-entry boxes                          V
   typing in, 209                         Vertical Cursor Coupling button (DECterm),
TFTP                                          149
   font path, 90                          Vertical Scroll Bar button (DECterm), 148
Tilde key, 155                            Video alignment
Title bar                                    Customize video alignment dialog box
   moving a window with, 200                     (TM), 60
Translation table, 193                       VX227 terminal, 60
Troubleshooting                           VRM17 monitor settings, 294
   boot error codes, 302                  VT emulation mode (DECterm), 153
Troubleshooting problems, 293             VX227 terminal
Typewriter keys, 42                          video alignment controls, 60
                                          VXT 2000 windowing terminal
                                             overview, 1 to 10
U                                         VXT 3270 window
ULTRIX operating system                      Access Name, 164
  DECnet Name Translator settings, 82        Application Name, 165
  DECnet settings, 81                        Authorization Password, 165
  NFS mount points, 78                       AutoStart, 95
  print command, 35                          character set
  quitting a remote session manager, 28          translation table, 193
  TCP/IP Name Server settings, 74            character sets, 10
  TCP/IP printer port setup, 68              checklist, 162
  TCP/IP routing table settings, 76          connection parameters, 177
  TCP/IP settings, 73                        creating a session, 162
                                             cursor




Index–16
VXT 3270 window                             VXT 3270 window (cont’d)
  cursor (cont’d)                             Wait parameter, 166
       moving, 170                            Window Options dialog box
  customizing, 8, 180 to 194                       figure, 183
  Data parameter, 165                         work area, 167
  Define Key dialog box                            format, 168
       figure, 181                          VXT application
  display                                     starting, 21
       customizing, 183                     VXT application launcher
  Edit menu, 171                              See Application launcher
  editing data, 170                         VXT Create pop-up menu (WM), 23, 24
  enabling or disabling use of, 112         VXT DECterm window
  Enter Connection Parameters dialog box,     answerback message, 154
       163                                    character set selection, 152, 153
  entering data, 169                          character sets, 10
  exiting, 179                                choosing a 7-bit NRC character set, 156
  field attributes, 177                       clearing, resetting, or resizing, 133
  function list, 177                          color, 149
  Gateway, 164                                Commands menu, 133
  key functions, 187                          cursor, 150
  keyboard functions, 184                     cursor key functions, 152
  keyboard layout map, 176                    customizing, 8
  Logon Mode, 165                             display settings, 148 to 150
  mouse, 184                                  Edit menu, 130
  numeric keypad                              exiting, 137
       entering numbers, 175                  font size, 145
  overview, 161                               format, 128
  pop-up menu, 178                            general settings, 150 to 154
  printing, 171                               graphics settings, 157 to 158
  protected and unprotected fields, 168       icon name, 145
  PU Name, 164                                keyboard settings, 154 to 156
  recording key sequences, 174                locking UDKs, 152
       canceling, 175                         numeric keypad function, 152
       playing back, 175                      options, 138 to 160
       viewing, 175                                saving and restoring, 141
  Selector Mouse, 184                              saving and restoring settings, 140
  Session Address, 164                        Options menu, 135, 139
  status indicators, 169                      Print menu, 135
  Terminal Type, 165                          printer settings, 158 to 160
  user-defined keys, 180                      printing, 135 to 136
       deleting, 182                          problems, 300
       saving and loading, 182                resizing, 144
  using, 161 to 179                           rows and columns, 144
  VXT 3270 TE dialog box                      scrolling speed, 150
       figure, 167                            using, 128 to 137




                                                                              Index–17
VXT DECterm window (cont’d)
  window settings, 142 to 147
  window title, 144                       W
VXT DECterm windows                       Warning bell, 255, 265, 273
  enabling and disabling, 111               volume slide bar, 42
VXT EX button (TM), 107                   Warning Bell button (DECterm), 155
VXT EX software                           3270 window
  loading, 243                              See VXT 3270 window
  overview, 4                               customizing, 8
  security, 245                           Window borders
  specifying, 98                            customizing, 219
  switching to VXT software, 246          Window colors (TM), 54, 55
  using, 242                                color, 55
VXT loader file (VXTLDR), 106               monochrome, 54
VXT Message Box, 13                       Window manager
  closing, 13                               border colors, 220
  controlling display of, 58                border settings, 218
  Customize menu                            customizing, 8
       Customize Message dialog box, 61     defining
  customizing, 61                                button, 226, 230
  figure, 13                                     key, 226, 230
  hiding, 14, 58                                 menu, 226
  icon, 58                                       menu item, 229
  saving the size and position of, 63       icon colors, 223
  starting, 21                              icon settings, 221
VXT software                                launching applications, 232
  boot commands, 108                             local, 233
  booting                                        remote, 236
       from VXT EX Options dialog box,      list of functions, 228
           246                              matte, 225
  loading                                   option settings
       from an InfoServer system, 102            saving and restoring, 215
       host-based operation, 100            Options submenu, 214
  loading process, 99                       remote, 29
  overview, 3                                    Open Look window manager, 29
  restarting, 27                            starting, 21
  software options, 126                     workspace settings, 216
  specifying a version, 98                Window manager menu
  system image names, 101, 103              customizing colors, 221
  turning off options, 110                Window menu (WM)
  version number, 125                       moving a window with, 203
VXT Software button (TM), 107               using, 200
                                          Window Options dialog box (DECterm), 143




Index–18
Window size                                  Workspace: Border Options dialog box (WM),
  when moving or resizing, 218                  218
Window Title button (DECterm), 144           Workspace: Customize Resource dialog box
Windows, 195 to 212                             (WM), 227
  See also Pointer shapes                    Workspace: Icon Color Options dialog box
  action when removed, 218                      (WM), 223
  activating, 217, 218                       Workspace: Icon Options dialog box (WM),
  background color, 56                          221
  changing input focus, 205                  Workspace: Matte Options dialog box (WM),
  changing the size of, 200                     225
  closing with the window menu button,
       219                                   X
  customizing
       colors, 221                           X image extension (XIE) software, 316 to
  defined, 197                                   320
  foreground color, 56                          bitonal images, 317
  highlight color, 56                           enabling, 107
  lowering to the bottom of the stack, 202      pipeline constraints, 318
  moving, 199, 218                              pipeline examples, 319
  Options submenu, 213                          pipelines, 317
  popping to the top of the stack, 202       X Image Extension (XIE) software
  reducing to icons, 201                        enabling or disabling use of, 112
  resizing, 203, 204                         X Image Extension button (TM), 107
  restacking, 205                            X server, 93 to 94
  restoring from icons, 203                     checking for XIE capability, 317
  saving window settings, 215                   Customize X Server dialog box (TM), 93
  selecting, 199                                Monitor, 94
  settings                                      scaling the display, 94
       VXT DECterm windows, 142              X Session Reset Server Action (TM), 94
  shadow colors, 55, 56                      X Window System, 7
  stacking, 202, 217                         X11 colors, 313
Work environment, 331                        XOFF signal, 69
Work group
  resource file name, 127
Workspace button (WM)
  using, 204
Workspace settings
  window manager, 216 to 218
Workspace submenu (WM), 204
  launching applications, 233
Workspace: Border Color Options dialog box
    (WM), 220




                                                                               Index–19
